Home

R&S FSW-K84/-K85 1xEVDO User Manual

1. sssssssss 142 REMOTE e 198 T Test Setup EE Connections saci e ler ut E Presentan ico Threshold Active channels cooocococccccccooooonccnnnconanonononnncnonnno 100 203 TM NS tardara 18 Calculating 119 121 213 Results remote cet Derek di 234 238 Retrieving su i tr edente ita 240 Title bar WINDOW arado E 14 Traces Configuration softkey Configuring remote Exporting remote A M Mode remote eter ia Results remote tet Traffic Operation mode uincere eode o e ee road 49 Trigger Adjusting Measurement example 145 CDP Measurement example sse 143 Configuration remote eseeseese 189 Configuration softkey 25494 Drop ouit Mesta oso dao aia Rus 94 External remote cuncta it cli 193 Holdoff eut eueug 13399 Hysteresis 94 OTS CL is ceto Peto aecenas aine End e Me e 94 External trigger remote iveco nota 192 UO Power remote IF Power remote RF Power remote lee Ge TE ER Beie EE 93 External 4 92 Fres RUM p 92 IFPOWOE einer tia 93 Trigger to frame 2 tenere rrr 16 Querying remote 234 Troubleshooting 2 133 lput overload erre tees 165 U UE User equipment see MS Mobile station AAA 11 Units Reference level oooooococccococococccnccconononccncnccnononanonono
2. POWer lt sb gt RESul1t on page 250 CALC MARK FUNC POW RES ACP see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer lt sb gt RESult on page 250 CCDF The CCDF measurement determines the distribution of the signal amplitudes comple mentary cumulative distribution function The CCDF and the Crest factor are dis played For the purposes of this measurement a signal section of user definable length is recorded continuously in the zero span and the distribution of the signal amplitudes is evaluated rum EE KNIE NES CN NK NE 2 RC UU User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 40 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurements and Result Displays El 3 2 2 MultiView 33 Spectrum 1xEV DO BTS Ref Level 0 00 dBm e RBW 10 MHz Att 10d8 AQT 6 25 ms 1 CCDF CF 878 608453352 MHz Mean Pwr 20 00 dB 2 Result Summary Samples 62500 Mean Peak 1 0 1 Trace 1 0 00 dBm 0 00 dBm jg 0 B Je Fig 3 26 CCDF measurement results in the 1xEV DO BTS application Remote command CONF CDP MEAS CCDF see CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 160 Querying results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 237 CALC MARK FUNC POW RES ACP see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer lt sb gt RESul1t on page 250 CALC MARK FUNC POW RES ACP see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer lt sb gt RESult on page 250 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics RESult lt t gt on page 252 Evaluati
3. 156 ARCHIVE Channels ca ns dca dis 16 17 QuasiinactiV8 vni rero treo eee 47 Active probe Mi rebutronm erret aid 78 Adjacent channel leakage ratio e 37 Agilent Long code generation mode 00 0 0 ee eee eects 46 AMAS POWET iii ica 23 Amplitude Analog Baseband Interface B71 settings 88 E el ue UCL 84 Configuring remote w 184 DOINGS E 84 Analog Baseband Amplitude settings ca erre 88 eot C M 73 le due 75 Analog Baseband B71 Full scale level ias 89 Tienes arica tea 76 Input type remote control seees 178 Analog Baseband Interface B71 Amplitude settings 5 nne rre nter 88 Input settings nr rernm eret eene 75 Analysis BTS Code Domain Settings 118 119 Remote commands 253 RE remote i car cie lat n 253 RF measurements creen 118 Settings oerte err kr i eden 118 Analysis interval MSRA D 97 98 197 Analysis lid eiii anna 57 Applications Adopted paramelters rrr eror 62 Switching I yu C rU Configuring remote e BIG CUOMIC circa ias dnce ia CES EC Manual Option ene Protective remote Pure e Auto level SV EIC O 109 Reference level erre reet 86 89 108 Softkey euer 86 89 108 Auto Scalillg rrr ett tnn ree race iae
4. eeeeeeneeee 140 Meas 3 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power and Frequency Error 141 Meas 4 Measuring the Triggered Relative Code Domain Power 143 Meas 5 Measuring the Composite EVM eee nen 146 Meas 6 Measuring the Peak Code Domain Error and the RHO Factor 147 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements 150 Ninth MUCHO Niet iii 150 AAA APP R RIRs n annu urina 155 Activating the Measurement Channel eese 156 Selecting a Measurement sseeeseeeeeee eene enne nennen rre 159 Configuring Code Domain Analysis ener nnne 160 Configuring RF Measurements eese nennen nennen nennen nn 215 Configuring the Result Display eene nennen nnns 219 Starting a Meas rement 2 ieieieiieioeceeseinecerensnn c tasa aine creas nap AR rina 228 Retrieving Results ener retra seascteecesascteetessasteeesesasvetees 233 General Analy SiS A 253 Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results eene 261 Configuring the Application Data Range MSRA mode only 263 Querying the Status RegisterS omooonnnnccinnncnnnnnnnnnncnnnnencnnncc cansan arena 265 Commands for Compatibility cccccesseeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeseeeeeesne
5. ss 16 Results remote ceteras 234 Chips Elo p M 273 Closing Channels remote osisssa oirne 157 Windows remote 223 226 Code Clas S m EIE 18 BIS application 2 2 i ashlee 273 MS applicatiO is ced tete Ee 274 Code Display Order 120 211 Code domain 2 3 2 5 12 nido neis dase tiene 273 Code Domain Analysis See RE 15 Code Domain Error Power See CDEP EM 22 Code Domain Power See CDP ia E EES 22 Code domain settings SOM eise Een icon 118 119 Code MUMBO eege recientes 18 Remote siena 222193 see also Channel number coooconocccccocccccnocccnnoncccnnnnncnn 273 Selecting 122 124 Code Power Display sa e eee cete 212 Codes 273 Longo wi 45 MAPPING Lm 52 Power display 119 121 Quasi inactive e 45 SOMO NEE 22 53 120 211 Complementary cumulative distribution function See CODE a eg det EE A0 Composite Constellation Evaluation Method 2 1 enit 24 Trace results riana ee ice ne rte ides 244 Composite data Bitstream trace results 245 Constellation trace results wee 245 EVM iie ato Eege 19 EVM trace results wee 245 Modulation ie 19 Power 16 Composite EVM irte etie 17 Evaluation Method 2 2 2 2 init 26 Measurement examples ws 146 Trace TEEN 245 Continue single sweep lei urticaria tros 107 Continuous sweep SO n 107 Conventio
6. Markers Individual Marker Settings In CDA evaluations up to 4 markers can be activated in each diagram at any time Analysis Markers Marker Settings Search Range Selected State Stimulus Code Domain Marker All Marker Off Selected Ee TEE 128 E EE 128 PU 129 Er e TRE 129 Al Markers QI e ve a Fe ee et eet e ed e b o echa ead rure ug 129 Selected Marker Marker name The marker which is currently selected for editing is highlighted orange Remote command Marker selected via suffix m in remote commands Marker State Activates or deactivates the marker in the diagram Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 255 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 256 Markers X value Defines the position of the marker on the x axis channel slot symbol depending on evaluation Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X on page 257 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 256 Marker Type Toggles the marker type The type for marker 1 is always Normal the type for delta marker 1 is always Delta These types cannot be changed Note If normal marker 1 is the active marker switching the Mkr Type activates an additional delta marker 1 For any other marker switching the marker type does not activate an additional marker it only switches the type of the selected marker Normal A normal
7. n iater terrent e tret nth Ert 191 TRIGger SEQueticelEBEVelBBPONWAOLr aen tion toni nro rt oet EE EATE NEER ETTEREN REES TRIGger SEQuence LEVelIFPOWSLE tr rtr tnter rn er e tren n re ida EEN TRIGger SEQuence LEVel l QPower TRIGoer SEQueticerEBEVeEREBONWOL ceca tia tomi roce eant E Ei iE EAEN EK E OE SETRA TRIGger SEQuencel LEVEN VIDEO ccoo tt rrr te rrr een ce net recent TRIGger SEQuence LL EVel EXTernal port 5 tot tr retten eror rr terr 192 TIRIGGSHESE QUCH CS SOR Cece 193 TRIGger SEQuerce SOURCSe coria nian e EN Xe eh EEN 193 TRIGge r SEQuence PIME RINTerval xao contr rn t ren e e Per E eet ra tr acd 195 Index Symbols 1xEV DO Introducir as Measurements Remote commands SS RF measurements epes Mee entrer Sereno 1xEV DO application BOSICS uu ee aw em TN Tu oak 44 1xEV DO mode ell UE 133 Optimizing Troubleshooting 5CHANS Predefined channel table oo occcccnnccccccncccnso 270 272 64 QAM Modulation ue rea Ero E 51 A Aborting E C 107 AC DC COUPIING EE 71 Access Operation mode rer nre rrr rr reta 49 ACK Channel Ype iii 48 ACLR HE Ee 37 Bandclasses 115 116 218 274 Configuring 1xEV DO 2 114 Res lts remole icc ne tere 250 Activating 1xEV DO measurements remote
8. Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 186 Unit Reference Level For CDA measurements the unit should not be changed as this would lead to useless results Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Reference Level Automatically determines the optimal reference level for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier for analog baseband input the full scale level are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal compression clipping and overload conditions are minimized To determine the optimal reference level a level measurement is performed on the R amp S FSW You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 109 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 210 RF Attenuation Defines the attenuation applied to the RF input of the R amp S FSW This function is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface Attenuation Mode Value RF Attenuation The RF attenuation can be set automatically as a function of the selected reference level Auto mode This ensures that the optimum RF attenuation is always used It is the default setting By default and when Using Electronic Attenuation is not available mechanical attenua tion is applied This function is not avai
9. 1xEV DO measurements require special applications on the R amp S FSW which you acti vate using the MODE key When you activate a measurement channel in 1xEV DO applications Code Domain Analysis of the input signal is started automatically However the 1xEV DO applica tions also provide various RF measurement types Selecting the measurement type gt To select an RF measurement type do one of the following e Select the Overview softkey In the Overview select the Select Measure ment button Select the required measurement e Press the MEAS key In the Select Measurement dialog box select the required measurement Some parameters are set automatically according to the 1xEV DO standard the first time a measurement is selected since the last PRESET operation A list of these parameters is given with each measurement type The parameters can be changed but are not reset automatically the next time you re enter the measurement The main measurement configuration menus for the RF measurements are identical to the Spectrum application For details refer to Measurements in the R amp S FSW User Manual The measurement specific settings for the following measurements are available via the Overview e Power Vs Lime BTS Olor A 111 e Signal Channel Power Measurements AA 114 e Channel Power ACLR Measurements sese 114 e Spectrum EMISSION Mask e GRANAT 115 e Occupied NET De VE 116 LEE Cup c
10. 45 Select meas ice iaiite d edes edt er discenda 61 SEM 1xEV DO results coincida taria 38 Bandclasses ccccccococccncoccconononcnnnnnnn 115 116 218 274 Configuring 1xEV DO sse Measurement examples si KEE e acciona Sequencer 12 61 Aborting remote EE 231 Activating remote EE 231 Mode remote 2 etri t ete teta FROM OG E NER MN Set Mean to Manual Power vs Time remote sssesssse 216 Sets Captured Definition Evaluation range 98 123 125 215 Sel EE 98 123 125 215 OO e Feet oe es ats 98 198 Settings e 63 Show inactive channels ooooocococcconocococcconccononnonnnnnccnnnnno 126 Signal capturing Remote commands ELE Signal channel power Measurement examples sseeeeeeee 138 Signal description BITS remote nerit HE iut 161 BTS Configuration E 0D Configuring i5 MS remote 164 MS Configuration 68 Remote commands nette rnnt 161 OTK CY M M 65 Signal source Ee tre Dep On edente dtt gets 168 Single sweep SOMO e M 107 Single ZOOM EE 110 Slope MI M 95 193 EEN 15 44 Captured veria 97 197 Evaluation range wie 123 125 Number of symbols onere ces 273 Parameters ud lio A E S N 30 Te at EE 123 125 215 Softkeys Amplitude Contig E 84 tel eege da 108
11. CDA Measurements in MSRA Operating Mode Maximum Power Recommended external attenuation 2 55 to 60 dBm 35 to 40 dB 2 50 to 55 dBm 30 to 35 dB 2 45 to 50 dBm 25 to 30 dB 2 40 to 45 dBm 20 to 25 dB 2 35 to 40 dBm 15 to 20 dB 2 30 to 35 dBm 10 to 15 dB 2 25 to 30 dBm 0 to 10 dB 2 20 to 25 dBm 0 to 5 dB lt 20 dBm 0 dB e For signal measurements at the output of two port networks connect the reference frequency of the signal source to the rear reference input REF INPUT of the R amp S FSW e The R amp S FSW must be operated with an external frequency reference to ensure that the error limits of the 1xEV DO specification for frequency measurements on base stations mobile stations are met A rubidium frequency standard can be used as a reference source for example e If the base station mobile station has a trigger output connect the trigger output of the base station mobile station to one of the trigger inputs TRIGGER INPUT of the R amp S FSW see Trigger 2 3 on page 79 Presettings For details see chapter 6 2 Code Domain Analysis on page 62 1 Enter the external attenuation Enter the reference level Enter the center frequency Set the trigger If used enable the external reference Select the 1xEV DO standard and the desired measurement N Oo a B o N Set the PN offset 4 10 CDA Measurements in MSRA Operating Mode The 1xEV DO BTS application can also be used
12. Code Domain Analysis Note Both single ended and differential probes are supported as input however since only one connector is occupied by a probe the Single ended setting must be used for all probes Single Ended l Q data only Differential Q and inverse Q data Remote command INPut IQ BALanced STATe on page 177 High Accuracy Timing Trigger Baseband RF Activates a mode with enhanced timing accuracy between analog baseband RF and external trigger signals Note Prerequisites for previous models of R amp S FSW For R amp S FSW models with a serial number lower than 103000 special prerequisites and restrictions apply for high accuracy timing e To obtain this high timing precision trigger port 1 and port 2 must be connected via the Cable for High Accuracy Timing order number 1325 3777 00 e As trigger port 1 and port 2 are connected via the cable only trigger port 3 can be used to trigger a measurement e Trigger port 2 is configured as output if the high accuracy timing option is active Make sure not to activate this option if you use trigger port 2 in your measurement setup e When you first enable this setting you are prompted to connect the cable for high accuracy timing to trigger ports 1 and 2 If you cancel this prompt the setting remains disabled As soon as you confirm this prompt the cable must be in place the firmware does not check the connection In remote operation the setting is activ
13. Example CALC DELT3 X REL Outputs the frequency of delta marker 3 relative to marker 1 or relative to the reference position Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the y axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker first To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single measurement mode See also INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 230 The unit depends on the application of the command Return values lt Position gt Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker or the fixed reference Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end CALC DELT2 ON Switches on delta marker 2 CALC DELT2 Y Outputs measurement value of delta marker 2 Usage Query only 11 10 2 2 11 10 2 3 General Analysis General Marker Settings RI GEET 258 DISPlay MTABle lt DisplayMode gt This command turns the marker table on and off Parameters lt DisplayMode gt ON Turns the marker table on OFF Turns the marker table off AUTO Turns the marker table on if 3 or more markers are active RST AUTO Example DISP MTAB ON Activates the marker table Manual operation See Marker Table D
14. RST PICH For further information refer to Power Reference on page 121 CDP PREF TOT Sets total power as reference power See Power Reference on page 121 11 5 11 Configuring Code Domain Analysis SENSe CDPower TPMeas lt State gt This command activates or deactivates the timing and phase offset evaluation of the channels to the pilot The results are queried using the TRAC DATA CTAB command or the CALC MARK FUNC CDP BTS RES command Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CDP TPM ON Activates timing and phase offset CDP SLOT 2 Selects slot 2 CDP CODE 11 Selects code number 11 CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES TOFF Reads out timing offset of the code with number 11 in slot 2 CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES POFF Reads out the phase offset of the code with number 11 in slot 2 Manual operation See Timing and phase offset calculation on page 119 Evaluation Range The evaluation range defines which data is evaluated in the result display SENSe CDPower GOBE 4 2 2 cies ii G axo e ERR n2 a a oe renee 213 SENSeJTODPOWeIOTYDPB tiae ehe Ope rev eec rte a Bien a aee ae Rex enu AERE 214 SENSeTGDPOWOEMADPPIBG ic htt teta pta 214 SENS amp q1CDPowerMMODBJP riori iei re tea Aa 214 E Ee RI 215 SENSE BI Ie oec on RE 215 SENSe CDPower CODE lt CodeNumber gt This command selects the channel code number The maximum number depends on the spreading
15. Release Notes The release notes describe the installation of the firmware new and modified func tions eliminated problems and last minute changes to the documentation The corre sponding firmware version is indicated on the title page of the release notes The most recent release notes are also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www2 rohde schwarz com product FSW html gt Downloads gt Firmware 1 3 Conventions Used in the Documentation 1 3 1 Typographical Conventions The following text markers are used throughout this documentation Convention Description Graphical user interface ele All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen such as ments dialog boxes menus options buttons and softkeys are enclosed by quotation marks KEYS Key names are written in capital letters File names commands File names commands coding samples and screen output are distin program code guished by their font Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font References References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quota tion marks Conventions Used in the Documentation 1 3 2 Conventions for Procedure Descriptions When describing how to operate the instrument several alternative methods may be available to perform the same
16. For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet Remote command TRIG SOUR IFP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 193 Trigger Level Trigger Source Defines the trigger level for the specified trigger source For details on supported trigger levels see the data sheet Remote command TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal lt port gt on page 192 For analog baseband or digital baseband input only Drop Out Time Trigger Source Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again Note For input from the optional Analog Baseband Interface using the baseband power trigger BBP the default drop out time is set to 100 ns to avoid unintentional trigger events as no hysteresis can be configured in this case Remote command TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe on page 190 Trigger Offset Trigger Source Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the measurement offset gt 0 Start of the measurement is delayed offset lt 0 Measurement starts earlier pre trigger Remote command TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 190 Hysteresis Trigger Source Defines the distance in dB to the trigger level that the trigger source must exceed before a trigger event occurs Settting a hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger events caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level This setting is o
17. IettieVilig eden tecto uds PICH REITER 48 Power reference i uisi eiecit 121 212 Predefined channel table 270 272 PICHRRI Predefined channel table sss 270 272 Pilot channel i cic ina ottica cns nee Ear a Evaluation Power Preamble PN offset False Measurement example c ooococicnccinnnccconicncoo 145 Power Absolute a tcc ti e pese cra dE ER eu dE 18 All 23 Channels eret ibi re dcos 18 36 114 Data Inactive channels uiii cin oaa ea tanto corn 17 c laisnids 18 Pilot Reference uices CES esa sa desde diag e 121 212 Reference Display visionaria 13 Relative A E A AA AANEEN ERR NERT Treshold E 100 203 Total vs chip evaluation method sssssssss 30 vs chip results remote eessse 246 vs half slot evaluation method ooooooccccccncccncoconccncos 30 vs half slot results remote sesessss 246 vs symbol evaluation method o vs symbol results remote sesssss Power control groups see Slots Power vs Time Preamble Length Preamble channel BUT orn miinaan naasar iaae Preamplifier SENG ET 87 e EE 87 Predefined channel tables BTS application MT 101 BTS mode Channel detection MS application MS mode Provi
18. RIAS e T 123 Det 10 c 123 IVER POUND E E 123 EE ORK t 124 Channel Selects a channel for the following evaluations see also chapter 3 1 2 Evaluation Methods for Code Domain Analysis on page 20 e Bitstream Code Domain Power Code Domain Error Power Peak Code Domain Error Power vs PCG Power vs Symbol Result Summary Symbol Constellation Symbol EVM The specified code is selected and marked in red For details on how specific codes are displayed see chapter 4 8 Code Display and Sort Order on page 53 Evaluation Range BTS application The number of available channels depends on the specified channel type For channel type PILOT and PREAMBLE values between 0 and 31 are valid For channel type MAC the range is between 0 and 63 and for DATA channels the range is 0 to 15 Remote command SENSe CDPower CODE on page 213 Half Slot Selects a half slot for the following evaluations e Bitstream Channel Table Code Domain Error Power Code Domain Power Composite Constellation Peak Code Domain Error Power vs Half Slot Power vs Symbol Result Summary Symbol Constellation Symbol EVM Remote command SENSe CDPower SLOT on page 215 Set to Analyze Selects a specific set for further analysis The value range is between 0 and Number of Sets on page 98 1 Remote command SENSe CDPower SET on page 215 Mapping Switc
19. Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer TYPE on page 162 6 2 4 6 2 4 1 Code Domain Analysis Roll Off Factor Filter Type Multicarrier Defines the roll off factor of the RRC filter which defines the slope of the filter curve and therefore the excess bandwidth of the filter Possible values are between 0 01 and 0 99 in 0 01 steps The default value is 0 02 This parameter is available for the RRC filter Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer TYPE on page 162 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer ROFF on page 161 Cut Off Frequency Filter Type Multicarrier Defines the frequency at which the passband of the RRC filter begins Possible values are between 0 1 MHz and 2 4 MHz in 1 Hz steps The default value is 1 25 MHz This parameter is available for the RRC filter Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer TYPE on page 162 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer COFRequency on page 161 Data Input and Output Settings The R amp S FSW can analyze signals from different input sources and provide various types of output such as noise or trigger signals e Input Source SANGS ici 70 LEE EI go m 78 e Digital FO Output Sets cdi creer cett is ii edle 80 Input Source Settings The input source determines which data the R amp S FSW will analyze Input settings can be configured in the Input dialog box Some settings are also available in the
20. The command returns three values for each code in a channel lt code number gt lt error power gt lt power ID gt The number of results corresponds to the spreading factor see chapter A 2 Channel Type Characteristics on page 273 In addition the output depends on the mapping settings The output is either the branch the Q branch or the complex signal Value Description lt code number gt code number within the channel lt error power gt value of the composite EVM lt power ID gt type of power detection 0 inactive channel 1 active channel The Hadamard or BitReverse order is important for sorting the channels but not for the number of values With Hadamard the individual codes are output in ascending order With BitReverse codes which belong to a particular channel are adjacent to each other Since an error power is output for Code Domain Error Power consolidation of the power values is not appropriate The number of codes that are output therefore gener ally corresponds to the base spreading factor 11 9 3 4 Code Domain Error Power MS application The command returns four values for each channel lt code class gt lt code number gt lt error power gt lt power ID gt Retrieving Results Value Description lt code class gt code class of the channel see table 11 3 lt code number gt code number of the channel lt signal level gt error power in
21. Usage Query only Configuring the Outputs Configuring trigger input output is described in chapter 11 5 4 2 Configuring the Trig ger Output on page 195 RI ee ee et keier 181 DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce lt State gt This command turns the 28 V supply of the BNC connector labeled NOISE SOURCE CONTROL on the R amp S FSW on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DIAG SERV NSO ON Manual operation See Noise Source on page 79 Frontend Configuration The following commands configure frequency amplitude and y axis scaling settings which represent the frontend of the measurement setup For more information see chapter 6 2 5 Frontend Settings on page 82 11 5 3 1 Configuring Code Domain Analysis No EE 182 e Amplitude and Scaling Settings 184 e Configuring the Aitenuation enne 187 Frequency I SENSeJTFREQusncy CENT GE 27d epe rcr ecce aee tec tuae de cape das apu eaa Res paene aa AA 182 ISENSeTPREOUSInGcV GENTO STEP cetus eet EE Re eate a eia xe EE ed 182 IGENSe TEbREOuenou CENTer STER AUTO tenente ttti 183 SENSe FREQuency CENT amp ESTEP LINK ie nitet nhe Rd ene nnn nn anra ies 183 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor cessisse eren neret 183 ISENSGPREQUBHCY OFF SGU Me 184 SENSe FREQuency CENTer lt Frequency gt This command defines the center frequency Parameters lt Frequency gt The allowed
22. lt Modulation gt lt Reserved1 gt lt Reserved2 gt lt Status gt lt CDPRelative gt This command defines a channel table Configuring Code Domain Analysis The following description applies to the EVDO BTS application only For the MS appli cation see CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 205 Before using this command you must set the name of the channel table using the CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SELect on page 202 command For a detailed description of the parameters refer to chapter 3 1 1 Code Domain Parameters on page 16 Parameters lt ChannelType gt The channel type is numerically coded as follows 0 PILOT 1 MAC 2 PREAMBLE with 64 chip length 3 PREAMBLE with 128 chip length 4 PREAMBLE with 256 chip length 5 PREAMBLE with 512 chip length 6 PREAMBLE with 1024 chip length 7 DATA lt CodeClass gt Depending on channel type the following values are allowed PILOT 5 MAC 6 PREAMBLE 5 DATA 4 spreading factor 2c9de class lt CodeNumber gt 0 spreading factor 1 lt Modulation gt Modulation type including mapping 0 BPSK I 1 BPSK Q 2 QPSK 3 8 PSK 4 16 QAM Modulation types QPSK 8 PSK 16 QAM have complex values lt Reserved1 gt Always 0 reserved lt Reserved2 gt Always 0 reserved lt Status gt O inactive 1 active Can be used in a setting command to disable a channel tempo rarily lt CDPRelative gt Power value in dB Example CONF C
23. lt Value gt lt numeric value gt RST depends on the result display The unit and range depend on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y MIN 60 DISP TRAC Y MAX 0 Defines the y axis with a minimum value of 60 and maximum value of 0 Manual operation See Y Maximum Y Minimum on page 90 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MINimum Value This command defines the minimum value of the y axis for all traces in the selected result display The suffix lt t gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt lt numeric value gt RST depends on the result display The unit and range depend on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y MIN 60 DISP TRAC Y MAX 0 Defines the y axis with a minimum value of 60 and maximum value of 0 Manual operation See Y Maximum Y Minimum on page 90 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVision Value This remote command determines the grid spacing on the Y axis for all diagrams where possible The suffix lt t gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt numeric value WITHOUT UNIT unit according to the result dis play Defines the range per division total range 10 lt Value gt RST depends on the result display Configuring Code Domain Analysis Example DISP TRAC Y PDIV 10 Sets the grid spacing to 10 units e g dB per division For example 10 dB in the Code Domain Power result display DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y
24. Amplitude tab of the Amplitude dialog box Since the Digital UO input and the Analog Baseband input use the same digital signal path both cannot be used simultaneously When one is activated established connec tions for the other are disconnected When the second input is deactivated connec tions to the first are re established This may cause a short delay in data transfer after Switching the input source Radi Frequency MPU iiiter erbe deer PORE FERE FERRI neve sahara 70 e Digital VO Input Settings oia ra edad 73 e Analog Baseband Input Gettngs AA 75 e Probe SENOS EE 77 Radio Frequency Input The default input source for the R amp S FSW is Radio Frequency i e the signal at the RF INPUT connector of the R amp S FSW If no additional options are installed this is the only available input source Code Domain Analysis Input un Input Source Power Sensor External Generator Probes Radio Frequency External Input Coupling Mixer Impedance Digital I g Q Direct Path Analog High Pass Filter 1 to 3 GHZ Baseband YIG Preselector Input Connector Baseband Input I Radio Frequency State AA 71 VTE COUN NG M 71 twee ler E 71 PMU MM Eaei 72 btiglisPass Filter 1 3 Ghz si ere iodo aries 72 hdc ro MD 72 INPUE COMMS CON eR EA 73 Radio Frequency State Activates input from the RF INPUT connector Remot
25. Auto Level 86 89 108 Bandclasses 4119 116 sg m M 113 Capture Offset Center 1 2 83 Channel Detection 22 recette eret 99 Code Domain Settings ssuusss 118 119 Continue Single Sweep isisisi siie 107 Continuous Sweep 107 BiglGonf ee nd D prende ai a iiia 93 Display COMO 1 rennen tns 15 61 Evaluation Range 2 rein 122 124 24 e M 60 External 4 02 Free Run 4 92 Frequency Config ne 82 IF Power ens 293 Iimport WEE 60 Input SOURCE Cornflg tret tn 70 ed doo a dias 60 O a E 60 Lower Level Hysteresis 109 Marker Config s 127 Meastime AUtO rre rtr rrr 109 Meastime Manual cv 109 KE costa der 132 Next Min 126192 Next Peak ze 132 No of HalfSlots 112 Norm Delta 22129 Outputs Config EE 78 SE Preamp EET MM 85 88 Ref Level Offset ooooooooocccccccocococococccocanonanccnnccanonono 85 89 Reference Manual nentes 113 Reference Mean Pwr 2 149 Restart on Fail i 113 RE Attem AUTO ine hte er entree tena 86 RF Atteri Manual succionar rtt 86 RE Slot Full Idle 5 ts a 112 Scale COMO neni ee e tret rne 90 Set Mean to Manual na T13 Signal Capture ertet eet nonis 96 Signal Description 4 65 Single Sweep s 104 Sweep Config
26. Evaluation Methods for Code Domain Analysis on page 20 e Bitstream Code Domain Power Code Domain Error Power Peak Code Domain Error Power vs PCG Evaluation Range MS application Power vs Symbol Result Summary Symbol Constellation Symbol EVM The specified code is selected and marked in red For details on how specific codes are displayed see chapter 4 8 Code Display and Sort Order on page 53 The number of available channels depends on the specified channel type For channel type PILOT and PREAMBLE values between 0 and 31 are valid For channel type MAC the range is between 0 and 63 and for DATA channels the range is 0 to 15 Remote command SENSe CDPower CODE on page 213 Half Slot Selects a half slot for the following evaluations Bitstream Channel Table Code Domain Error Power Code Domain Power Composite Constellation Peak Code Domain Error Power vs Half Slot Power vs Symbol Result Summary Symbol Constellation Symbol EVM Remote command SENSe CDPower SLOT on page 215 Set to Analyze Selects a specific set for further analysis The value range is between 0 and Number of Sets on page 98 1 Remote command SENSe CDPower SET on page 215 Branch Switches between the evaluation of the and the Q branch in MS measurements This affects the following evaluations Code Domain Power Code Domain Error Power Peak Code Domain Error Power vs slot Result Summary Rem
27. Manual operation See Peak Search on page 132 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command moves a marker to the next lower peak The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command moves a marker to the next minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next minimum value Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Minimum on page 132 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the minimum level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Minimum on page 132 General Analysis CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command moves a marker to the next minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Positioning Delta Markers The following commands position delta markers on the trace CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz M AimumlEEFT eene ennn enn 260 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzMAximumNENT esee nennen nnn 260 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK cessisse 260 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXiIMUM
28. Optional describes the device or application that created the file Comment Optional contains text that further describes the contents of the file DateTime Contains the date and time of the creation of the file Its type is xs dateTime see RsIqTar xsd Samples Contains the number of samples of the UO data For multi channel signals all chan nels have the same number of samples One sample can be e A complex number represented as a pair of and Q values e A complex number represented as a pair of magnitude and phase values e Areal number represented as a single real value See also Format element Clock Contains the clock frequency in Hz i e the sample rate of the I Q data A signal gen erator typically outputs the UO data at a rate that equals the clock frequency If the UO data was captured with a signal analyzer the signal analyzer used the clock fre quency as the sample rate The attribute unit must be set to Hz Format Specifies how the binary data is saved in the UO data binary file see DataFilename element Every sample must be in the same format The format can be one of the following e complex Complex number in cartesian format i e and Q values interleaved and Q are unitless real Real number unitless polar Complex number in polar format i e magnitude unitless and phase rad values interleaved Requires DataType float32 or f1oat64 DataType Specifies t
29. Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R amp S FSW No further trigger parameters are available for the connector Output The R amp S FSW sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 196 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt DIRection on page 195 Output Type Trigger 2 3 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the R amp S FSW triggers gered Code Domain Analysis Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FSW is in Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 as well as by a low level signal at the AUX port pin 9 User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Trigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 196 Level Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 196 Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the out
30. RF Results remote 2 Trace results remote A RF Slot K84 remote command ssssssss 218 RF attenuation P Iro 86 Manual FRE IN PUE E Connector remote E Overload protection remote Remote EE RF measurements A O 35 Analysis Analysis remote cnim ette 253 jefe mite tal ET 111 Configuring remote m Petformifig eite reni tte eater neces 135 EE 35 Results remote 249 Selecting Dk A adis 35 RF Power Trigger level remote 2 ita 193 RF signal e EE 36 114 RE Slot Elte torero at tetti 112 Rho Datta EE 16 MAC 16 Overall 16 Pilot s 16 Pr amble EE 16 hislegm EIS 17 18 RHO factor Measurement examples Results remote ENEE td Roll off factor Ee TT RRC filter lte TEE 162 RRC Filter Cut off TrequenGy acier 67 70 161 MultiCatfler 2 tr tete rere retis 67 69 Rollsoff factor caricias ci 67 70 161 RRI Channel type terret rrr nior teres 48 POWE siii aed aie 18 RUN CONT eu n 107 RUN SINGLE ROY end E E E 107 S lee Configuring in channel table S Digital VA E Digital UO remote esses Scaling Amplitude range automatically 90 Configuration SORKEY eu eerte neret eines 90 O naa 90 Scrambling
31. This command turns the zoom on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DISP ZOOM ON Activates the zoom mode Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 110 See Restore Original Display on page 110 See Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 110 11 7 3 2 Using the Multiple Zoom DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom AREA eese 227 DiSblavlfWiNDow nztZOOM ML Tiple z0oomzGTATe oococccccccccccncononinnnnononanannnnnnannnnn 228 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area for a multiple zoom To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 Frequency Sweep iRm ome 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Suffix lt zoom gt 1 4 Selects the zoom window EECH User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 227 11 8 Starting a Measurement Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define lt x2 gt lt y2 gt the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 110 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe State This command turns the mutl
32. i depend on the instrument and are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 182 Center Frequency Stepsize Defines the step size by which the center frequency is increased or decreased when the arrow keys are pressed When you use the rotary knob the center frequency changes in steps of only 1 10 of the Center Frequency Stepsize The step size can be coupled to another value or it can be manually set to a fixed value This setting is available for frequency and time domain measurements X Span Sets the step size for the center frequency to a defined factor of the span The X Factor defines the percentage of the span Values between 1 and 100 96 in steps of 1 96 are allowed The default setting is 10 9o This setting is only available for MCWN measurements Center Sets the step size to the value of the center frequency The used value is indicated in the Value field Code Domain Analysis Manual Defines a fixed step size for the center frequency Enter the step size in the Value field Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 182 Frequency Offset Shifts the displayed frequency range along the x axis by the defined offset This parameter has no effect on the instrument s hardware or on the captured data or on data processing It is simply a manipulation of the final results in which absolute fre quency values are displayed Thus the x axis
33. leue piso INPUEEATES TA ur I INPULRIETORRIPASS ES TA TO Ecuador io 167 INPut FILTer YIG STATe INPUEGAIN STA ce E INPUEGAIN VAL Ue E NEIE P PERS INPutlQ BAEancedESTATe s EE 177 INPutlQ FULEScale AUTO M OERE 177 lee NG HUE DEE 177 INPut lQ TYPE ds HIN PUI SEE Ci C meer INSTrument CREate DUPLICATE horinaa E AAA 156 INSTrument GREate REPLACE crono D Erro ia a a Fe ELE E aa us 157 INSTr ment CREate E E 156 INS TRUMENE BI EE 157 INS TRUMONt BE 157 INSTrument REName Ss INSTr ment SEL6Gt err trn t ARALAR d n AAA RA ug LEAYOUCADDEWINDOW I rit in eir deret etn ea t iy eL ren Eod eb rx ero 220 EAYout GATalogL WINDOW RE 222 EAYoutIDENtiiyE WINDOW KEE 223 LAY OUEREMOVE WINDOW siisii cin ataca 223 LAYOUt REP Lacs WINDOW E 223 LAYOUT SPLIWET oases 223 RN delt E UR VE 225 LAYOUT WINDOWSM gt IDENUPY E 225 LAY cGUEWINDOW lt N gt REMOYVO encase at ayn hea a EaD LAYout WINDow lt n gt REPLace MMEMON LOAD NO STATE aros taa rra Ee TE tete MMEMory STOResn IQ COMMBnt trot rtp A aaa 262 MMEMory STOResn IQ S TAT6e iite rrt aii ae 262 MMEMoON gt TORe lt n gt TRACO comas ltda oae ep tor Siro ic Ec a 248 QUTPU
34. measurement 8 1 Synchronization fails Check the center frequency Perform an automatic reference level adjustment In BTS mode When using an external trigger check whether an external trigger signal is being sent to the R amp S FSW and check the PN offset In MS mode check the Long Code Mask and Long Code Offset Make sure Invert Q is off Error Messages Error messages are entered in the error event queue of the status reporting system in the remote control mode and can be queried with the command SYSTem ERRor A short explanation of the application specific error messages for 1xEV DO measure ments is given below Status bar message Description Sync not found This message is displayed if synchronization is not possible Possible causes are that frequency level or signal description values are set incorrectly or the input signal is invalid Sync OK This message is displayed if synchronization is possible Preamble missing This message is displayed if the PREAMBLE channel type is examined and no preamble is found in the signal 9 How to Perform Measurements in 1xEV DO Applications The following step by step instructions describe how to perform measurements with the 1xEV DO applications To perform Code Domain Analysis 1 Press the MODE key and select the 1xEV DO BTS application for base station tests or 1xEV DO MS for mobile station tests Code Domain Analysis of
35. pease EA a eer ede petu di ere dpa ace t tae EA 210 SENSe ADJust ALL This command initiates a measurement to determine and set the ideal settings for the current task automatically only once for the current measurement This includes e Reference level e Scaling Example ADJ ALL Usage Event Manual operation See Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically Auto All on page 108 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation Duration In order to determine the ideal reference level the R amp S FSW performs a measurement on the current input data This command defines the length of the measurement if SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE is set to MANual Parameters Duration Numeric value in seconds Range 0 001 to 16000 0 RST 0 001 Default unit s Example ADJ CONF DUR MODE MAN Selects manual definition of the measurement length ADJ CONF LEV DUR 5ms Length of the measurement is 5 ms Manual operation See Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 109 Configuring Code Domain Analysis SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE Mode In order to determine the ideal reference level the R amp S FSW performs a measurement on the current input data This command selects the way the R amp S FSW determines the length of the measurement Parameters Mode AUTO The R amp S FSW determines the measurement length automati cally accordin
36. see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 220 TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt 1 4 gt Power vs Chip BTS application only This result display shows the power for all chips in a specific slot Therefore a trace consists of 2048 power values The measurement evaluates the total signal over a single slot in the selected branch The selected slot is highlighted red Power vs Chip ei Clrw Start Sym 0 256 Chip Stop Sym 2047 Fig 3 14 Power vs Chip result display Due to the symmetric structure of the 1xEV DO forward link signal it is easy to identify which channel types in the slot have power Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PVChip see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 220 Power vs Halfslot MS application only This result display shows the power of the selected channel over all half slots EECH User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 30 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurements and Result Displays EH 1 Power vs Half Slot 1 Clrw Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PHSLot see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 220 CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 234 Power vs Symbol The Power vs Symbol evaluation calculates the absolute power in dBm for each symbol in the selected channel and the selected half slot 1 Power vs Symbol 1 Clrw 1 Symb Symb 5 Fig 3 15 Power vs Symbol result display Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PSYMbol see LAYout ADD WI
37. 11 5 2 11 5 2 1 Configuring Code Domain Analysis Example CDP LCOD Q HF Define long code mask Manual operation See Long Code Mask Long Code Mask Q on page 69 Configuring the Data Input and Output The following commands are required to configure data input and output For more information see chapter 6 2 4 Data Input and Output Settings on page 70 e Tt ele TEE 165 e Remote Commands for the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 168 e Configuring Input via the Optional Analog Baseband Interface 176 e Setting Up Probes stes aaa 179 e Configuring the OUUU uo 181 RF Input INbPut ATTenuation PbOTechonRE Get 165 INPUECONNECION m 165 Ei ere TTT m 166 INPUEDPATM it 166 INPutFIETerHPASSESTATe reet cepa rd ida 167 INPut FIE Ter YIGD S ATQ ute da cti tetigere ten tete ener reati iad eee ets 167 INPUEIMPOQGINCGs E dior EEN 167 lege E oeio aN EET RERE 168 INPut ATTenuation PROTection RESet This command resets the attenuator and reconnects the RF input with the input mixer after an overload condition occured and the protection mechanism intervened The error status bit bit 3 in the STAT QUES POW status register and the INPUT OVLD message in the status bar are cleared For details on the status register see the R amp S FSW User Manual
38. 1173 9340 02 13 33 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurements and Result Displays IEN Inactive channels can be measured but the result is meaningless since these chan nels do not contain data Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH SEVM see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 220 CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 234 Symbol Magnitude Error The Symbol Magnitude Error is calculated analogous to symbol EVM The result is one symbol magnitude error value for each symbol of the slot of a special channel Positive values of symbol magnitude error indicate a symbol magnitude that is larger than the expected ideal value negative symbol magnitude errors indicate a symbol magnitude that is less than the ideal one The symbol magnitude error is the difference between the magnitude of the received symbol and that of the reference symbol rela ted to the magnitude of the reference symbol 1 Symbol Magnitude Error Symb 0 2 Symb Fig 3 19 Symbol Magnitude Error display for 1xEV DO BTS measurements Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH SMERror see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 220 TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt 1 4 gt Symbol Phase Error The Symbol Phase Error is calculated analogous to symbol EVM The result is one symbol phase error value for each symbol of the slot of a special channel Positive val ues of symbol phase error indicate a symbol phase that is larger t
39. 164 Multicarrier Activates or deactivates the multicarrier mode This mode improves the processing of multicarrier signals It allows you to measure one carrier out of a multicarrier signal Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier STATe on page 163 Enhanced Algorithm Multicarrier Activates or deactivates the enhanced algorithm that is used for signal detection on multicarrier signals This algorithm slightly increases the calculation time This setting is only available if Multicarrier on page 67 is activated Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier MALGo on page 163 Multicarrier Filter Multicarrier Activates or deactivates the usage of a filter for signal detection on multicarrier signals This setting is only available if Multicarrier on page 67 is activated For details see chapter 4 6 Multicarrier Mode on page 52 Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer STATe on page 162 Filter Type Multicarrier Selects the filter type if Multicarrier Filter is activated Two filter types are available for selection a low pass filter and an RRC filter By default the low pass filter is active The low pass filter affects the quality of the measured signal compared to a measurement without a filter The RRC filter comes with an integrated Hamming window If selected two more set tings become available for configuration the Roll Off Factor and the Cut Off Fre quency
40. 1xEV DO standard For a list of possible channel types see chapter 4 4 1 BTS Channel Types on page 48 Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 203 Channel Number Walsh Ch SF Channel number consisting of walsh channel code and spreading factor Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 203 Symbol Rate Symbol rate at which the channel is transmitted Modulation Modulation type used for transmission For a list of available modulation types see table 1 8 Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 203 Power Contains the measured relative code domain power The unit is dB The fields are filled with values after you press the Meas button see Creating a New Channel Table from the Measured Signal Measure Table on page 103 Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 203 Status Indicates the channel status Codes that are not assigned are marked as inactive channels Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 203 Domain Conflict Indicates a code domain conflict between channel definitions e g overlapping chan nels Code Domain Analysis 6 2 10 5 Channel Details MS application Channel details are configured in the Channel Table dialog box which is displayed when you select the New Copy or Edit buttons for a predefined channel table in the Channel Detection dialog box Add C
41. 85 88 Updating Result display remote ssssssss 264 Upper Level Hysteresis 109 User marnuals uita orte obe o rers se p meat eit dens 8 Ww Windows Adding Run Closing remote cnet COMMQUTING WE Layout remote Maximizing remote Querying remote Replacing remote Splitting remote is Title Dat oet na dert te ect e cades Types remote ettet nieto tnt Pete fetis X X value Market T 129 Y Y maximum Y minimum reg 90 YIG preselector Activating Deactivating eseeeeses 72 Activating Deactivating remote 167 Z Zooming Activating remote ooooccoccnncinconnccccnonncnnnarncncnnnccnncnno 227 Area Multiple mode remote ssssss 227 Area remote ceeeeeeceeeeeeceeeeeeceeeseeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeas 226 Deactivating T MultiplenoOdB se eoe torret rhet denen 110 Multiple mode remote c ococcnicccnnnccinnncicnccccono 227 228 Mime EEEREN 226 Restoring original display PESO Single mode 110 Single mode remote A 226
42. AUTO ON Activates the coupling of the step size to the span SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK lt CouplingType gt This command couples and decouples the center frequency step size to the span or the resolution bandwidth Parameters lt CouplingType gt SPAN Couples the step size to the span Available for measurements in the frequency domain RBW Couples the step size to the resolution bandwidth Available for measurements in the time domain OFF Decouples the step size RST SPAN Example FREQ CENT STEP LINK SPAN SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor Factor This command defines a step size factor if the center frequency step size is coupled to the span or the resolution bandwidth Parameters Factor 1 to 100 PCT RST 10 Example FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 20PCT 11 5 3 2 Configuring Code Domain Analysis SENSe FREQuency OFFSet lt Offset gt This command defines a frequency offset If this value is not O Hz the application assumes that the input signal was frequency shifted outside the application All results of type frequency will be corrected for this shift numerically by the application See also Frequency Offset on page 84 Note In MSRA mode the setting command is only available for the MSRA Master For MSRA applications only the query command is available Parameters lt Offset gt Range 100 GHz to 100 GHz RST 0 Hz Examp
43. Code Domain Power I Branch 2 ult Summary tesults Set 0 Slot Results Set 0 Slot 0 E 1 Channel bar for firmware and measurement settings 2 3 Window title bar with diagram specific trace information 4 Diagram area with marker information 5 Diagram footer with diagram specific information depending on measurement 6 Instrument status bar with error messages progress bar and date time display MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode additional tabs and elements are available A colored back ground of the screen behind the measurement channel tabs indicates that you are in MSRA operating mode RF measurements are not available in MSRA operating mode For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual Channel bar information In 1xEV DO applications the R amp S FSW shows the following settings Table 2 1 Information displayed in the channel bar in 1xEV DO applications Ref Level Reference level Freq Center frequency for the RF signal Att Mechanical and electronic RF attenuation Channel Channel number code number and spreading factor Half Slot Half Slot number see chapter 4 1 Slots and Sets on page 44 Power Ref Reference used for power results Subtype Subtype of the used transmission standard In addition the channel bar also displays information on instrument settings that affect the measurement results even th
44. DPAT OFF Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Direct Path on page 72 Configuring Code Domain Analysis INPut FILTer HPASs STATe lt State gt Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the R amp S FSW in order to mea sure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function requires an additional high pass filter hardware option Note for RF input signals outside the specified range the high pass filter has no effect For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards the harmonics are suppressed sufficiently by the YIG filter Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP FILT HPAS ON Turns on the filter Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz on page 72 INPut FILTer YIG STATe State This command turns the YIG preselector on and off Note the special conditions and restrictions for the YIG filter described in YIG Prese lector on page 72 Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 0 for UO Analyzer GSM VSA and MC Group Delay measurements Example INP FILT YIG OFF Deactivates the YIG preselector Manual operation See YIG Preselector on page 72 INPut IMPedance Impedance This command selects the nominal input impedance of the RF input 75 Q should be selected if the 50 O input impedance is transformed to a higher impe dance us
45. Element order for complex cartesian data 1 channel This example demonstrates how to store complex cartesian data in float32 format using MATLAB Save vector of complex cartesian I Q data i e iqiqiq N 100 iq randn 1 N 13 randn 1 N fid fopen xyz complex float32 w for k 1 length iq fwrite fid single real iq k f10at32 UO Data File Format iq tar fwrite fid single imag iq k float32 end fclose fid List of Remote Commands 1xEV DO SENSE JADIUSTALL cocina A ai eia a rE 208 SENSe JADJust GONFigure DUR Ati ria A A 208 SENSe JADJust CONFigure DURation MODE 2 oen enter einn t net i rbd 209 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYS Teresis LOWer oreet rre retener rn dc ah ted EE EE 209 SENSe JAD3Just CONFigure H YS l eresis UPPer i cire aaa IA 209 SENSe ADJust LEVel EI E AE COUN E 206 Ei Ee e ele RE 198 SENSe GDPOWer AVERAGE ET 210 SENSe JEDPOwWer eeh 213 SENSE JCDPOWer C bd E 214 SENSe CDPower IC TRESNOIG EE 203 SENSE CDPOWEr el e EE 197 SENSeJCDPoWer COD es EE 164 SENSe CDPower LE CODE Q E 164 SENSe CDPower EEVel ADJ st cione t tet ree rtr eR P Fore RE RE EXE ER LEEREN P eT TAE HR 269 SENSe CDPower MAPPing m SENSe CDPowerMMODS rrr rrt caricia t nant dr e Re E ER EE REY PERS PERE ERRATA SENSe CDBDPower NORMAalize rette re reet tne dhe rece ren t e a ode e Pa EUREN td SENSeJCDPowWer ele EE SENSe CDPOW
46. INPut DIQ CDEVice This command queries the current configuration and the status of the digital UO input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface For details see the section Interface Status Information for the optional Digital Base band Interface in the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer User Manual Return values lt ConnState gt Defines whether a device is connected or not 0 No device is connected 1 A device is connected lt DeviceName gt Device ID of the connected device lt SerialNumber gt Serial number of the connected device Configuring Code Domain Analysis lt PortName gt Port name used by the connected device lt SampleRate gt Maximum or currently used sample rate of the connected device in Hz depends on the used connection protocol version indica ted by lt SampleRateType gt parameter lt MaxTransferRate gt Maximum data transfer rate of the connected device in Hz lt ConnProtState gt State of the connection protocol which is used to identify the connected device Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done lt PRBSTestState gt State of the PRBS test Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done lt SampleRateType gt 0 Maximum sample rate is displayed 1 Current sample rate is displayed lt FullScaleLevel gt The level in dBm that should correspond to an l Q sample with the magnitude 1 if transferred from connected device If not available 1 ONAN
47. Meas 6 Measuring the Peak Code Domain Error and the RHO Factor Displaying RHO Make sure that all channels except the pilot channel code 0 64 are OFF so that only the pilot channel is available in the measurement No specific measurement is required to get the value for RHO The R amp S FSW always calculates this value automatically regardless of the code domain measurement per formed Besides the results of the code domain measurements the numeric result of the RHO measurement is shown in the General Result Summary by default in the second window User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 149 Introduction 11 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measure ments The following commands are required to perform measurements in 1xEV DO applica tions in a remote environment It assumes that the R amp S FSW has already been set up for remote operation in a network as described in the base unit manual d Note that basic tasks that are also performed in the base unit in the same way are not described here For a description of such tasks see the R amp S FSW User Manual In particular this includes Managing Settings and Results i e storing and loading settings and result data Basic instrument configuration e g checking the system configuration customizing the screen layout or configuring networks and remote operation Using the common status registers 11 1 After a short introduction to remote commands the tasks specific to
48. Mode The operation mode is used for the channel search Access The signal can contain only PICH always available and DATA chan nels Traffic The signal can contain all channels PICH RRI DATA ACK and DRC PICH and RRI are always available Remote command SENSe CDPower OPERation on page 211 CDP Average The Code Domain Analysis is averaged over all slots in the set For channel types Data and Preamble this calculation assumes that preambles of different lengths do not occur in the slots If active ALL is displayed in the Slot field in the channel bar This function is required by the 1xEV DO standard Remote command SENSe CDPower AVERage on page 210 Code Power Display For Code Domain Power evaluation Defines whether the absolute power or the power relative to the chosen reference in BTS application relative to total power is displayed Remote command SENSe CDPower PDISplay on page 212 Power Reference For Code Domain Power evaluation in the MS application only Defines the reference for relative power display Total Relative to the total signal power Evaluation Range BTS application PICH Relative to the power of the PICH Remote command SENSe CDPower PREFerence on page 212 7 3 Evaluation Range BTS application The evaluation range defines which channel Code Number slot or set is analyzed in the result display Channel Channel Type HS VSAM ccs AO 122
49. RIGHL ccccccccescecesseeececeseceseeseeeeeeseneeeaes 260 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkermz MiNimum LEET 261 CAL Culate lt n gt DELTamarkerem gt MINimum NEX To ooooccccccccnnnccccnnnoncnnconononononnnonnnnncnnnnnnnnns 261 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MlNimum PEAK eese ener 261 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz MiNimum RICH 261 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command moves a delta marker to the next higher value The search includes only measurement values to the left of the current marker posi tion Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next higher value Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 132 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the highest level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Peak Search on page 132 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command moves a delta marker to the next higher value Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command moves a delta marker to the next higher minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the curren
50. SCALe RLEVel lt ReferenceLevel gt This command defines the reference level for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant With a reference level offset O the value range of the reference level is modified by the offset Parameters lt ReferenceLevel gt The unit is variable Range see datasheet RST 0 dBm Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV 60dBm Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Reference Level on page 85 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet lt Offset gt This command defines a reference level offset for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Offset gt Range 200 dB to 200 dB RST 0dB Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV OFFS 10dB Manual operation See Shifting the Display Offset on page 85 INPut GAIN STATe lt State gt This command turns the preamplifier on and off It requires the additional preamplifiier hardware option This function is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP GAIN STAT ON Switches on 30 dB preamplification Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Preamplifier on page 87 11 5 3 3 Configuring Code Domain Analysis INPut GAIN VALue lt Gain gt This command selects the preamplification level if the preamplifier is activated INP GAIN STAT ON see INPut GAIN STATe on page 186 The command requires the additional preamplifier hardware o
51. STATus QUEStionable DIQ register for IQ measurements Readout deletes the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Example STAT QUES DIQ Usage Query only 11 5 2 3 Configuring Input via the Optional Analog Baseband Interface The following commands are required to control the optional Analog Baseband Inter face in a remote environment They are only available if this option is installed For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface see the R amp S FSW UO Ana lyzer User Manual Useful commands for Analog Baseband data described elsewhere e INP SEL AIQ see INPut SELect on page 168 e SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 182 Commands for the Analog Baseband calibration signal are described in the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote commands exclusive to Analog Baseband data input and output INPut IQ BALanced S TATe nennen bunte hie india 177 INPURIGZ PULL Scale nj E 177 INPUT PUL Seale BC EE 177 IMC 0 e m 178 CALibrattonAIQHATImingES EAT E 178 Configuring Code Domain Analysis INPut IQ BALanced STATe lt State gt This command defines whether the input is provided as a differential signal via all 4 Analog Baseband connectors or as a plain UO signal via 2 single ended lines Parameters lt State gt
52. Sort Order must define which branch results you want to analyze Especially for code power mea surements the results may vary considerably While a channel may be active on one branch the other branch may belong to an inactive channel For BTS signals the complex data i e both branches simultaneously may be ana lyzed as well 4 8 Code Display and Sort Order In the result displays that refer to codes the currently selected code is highlighted in the diagram You select a code by entering a code number in the Evaluation Range settings By default codes are displayed in ascending order of the code number Hadamard order The currently selected code number is highlighted In 1xEV DO signals the codes that belong to the same channel need not lie next to each other in the code domain they may be distributed All codes that belong to the same channel are highlighted in light green In the 1xEV DO BTS signals each of the four channel types occurs at a specific time within each slot Thus instead of selecting a code you can also select which channel type is to be evaluated and displayed directly By default the Pilot channel as the first in the slot is evaluated In 1xEV DO MS signals the sort order of the codes can be changed so that codes that belong to the same channel are displayed next to each other Bit Reverse sorting R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurement Basics 49 Example Example for Hadamard order With Hadamard
53. The result display therefore shows a peak code domain error that is too high Distortions also occur if unassigned codes are wrongly given the status of active channel To obtain reliable measurement results select an adequate channel threshold via the Inactive Channel Threshold setting Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PCDerror see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 220 CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES PCDerror see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 234 Phase Error vs Chip Phase Error vs Chip activates the phase error versus chip display The phase error is displayed for all chips of the slected slot The phase error is calculated by the difference of the phase of received signal and phase of reference signal The reference signal is estimated from the channel configu ration of all active channels The phase error is given in degrees in a range of 180 to 180 Fig 3 13 Calculating the magnitude phase and vector error per chip PHI gs glx N 2560 kelo N 1 where PHI phase error of chip number k Sk complex chip value of received signal Xk complex chip value of reference signal k index number of the evaluated chip N number of chips at each CPICH slot x phase calculation of a complex value R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurements and Result Displays 1 Phase Error vs Chip 256 hip Chip 2559 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PECHip
54. They are meant to demonstrate how operating and measurement errors can be avoided using correct settings The mea surements are performed on a 1xEV DO signal with an R amp S FSW equipped with the 1xEV DO BTS application O Measurement examples for mobile station tests The measurements can be performed for mobile station tests in a similar way with the 1xEV DO MS application In this case use the following settings e DIGITAL STD gt LINK DIRECTION gt UP REVERSE e FREQ 833 49GHz The measurements are performed using the following devices and accessories e The R amp S FSW with Application Firmware R amp S FSW K84 1xEV DO Base Station Test e The Vector Signal Generator R amp S SMU with option R amp S SMU B46 digital stand ard 1xEV DO options R amp S SMU B20 and R amp S SMU B11 required e 1 coaxial cable 500 approx 1 m N connector e 1 coaxial cable 500 approx 1 m BNC connector The following measurements are described e Meas 1 Measuring the Signal Channel Power eene 138 e Meas 2 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask 140 e Meas 3 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power and Frequency Error 141 e Meas 4 Measuring the Triggered Relative Code Domain Power 143 e Meas 5 Measuring the Composite EVM na nnnnnnanos 146 e Meas 6 Measuring the Peak Code Domain Error and the RHO Factor 147 10 1 Meas 1 Measuring the Signal Channel Power In the Powe
55. Third Generation Partnership Project 2 The 1xEV DO BTS application firmware is based on the cdma2000 High Rate Packet Data Air Interface Specification of version C S0024 v 3 0 dated December 2001 and the Recommended Minimum Performance Standards for cdma2000 High Rate Packet Data Access Network of version C S0032 0 v 1 0 dated December 2001 These standard documents are published as TIA 856 IS 856 and TIA 864 IS 864 respectively The application firmware supports code domain measurements on 1xEV DO signals This code domain power analyzer provides the following analyses among others Code Domain Power Channel Occupancy Table EVM Frequency Error and RHO Factor In the BTS application all four channel types PILOT MAC PREAMBLE and DATA are supported and the modulation types in the DATA channel type are detected auto matically The signals to be measured may contain different modulation types or pre amble lengths in each slot thus making it possible to perform measurements on base stations while operation is in progress In the MS application all 5 channel types PICH RRI DATA ACK and DRC as well as TRAFFIC and ACCESS operating mode are supported Owing to their time struc ture the signals are analyzed on half slot basis In addition to the code domain measurements described in the 1xEV DO standard the 1xEV DO applications feature measurements in the spectral range such as channel power adjacent channel power occup
56. Triggered Relative Code Domain Power to detect the start of a PCG To detect this start all possibilities of the PN sequence location have to be tested in Free Run trigger mode This requires computing time This computing time can be reduced by using an external frame trigger and entering the correct PN offset If the search range for the start of the power control group and the PN offset are known then fewer possibilities have to be tested This increases the measurement speed Test setup 1 2 Connect the RF output of the R amp S SMU to the input of the R amp S FSW Connect the reference input REF INPUT on the rear panel of the R amp S FSW to the reference input REF on the rear panel of the R amp S SMU coaxial cable with BNC connectors Connect the external trigger input of the R amp S FSW TRIGGER INPUT to the exter nal trigger output of the R amp S SMU TRIGOUT1 of PAR DATA Settings on the R amp S SMU 1 oN Oo mF Q Ww PRESET FREQ 878 49 MHz LEVEL 0 dBm DIGITAL STD 1xEV DO DIGITAL STD gt Set Default DIGITAL STD gt LINK DIRECTION gt DOWN FORWARD DIGITAL STD gt 1xEV DO gt STATE ON TRIG gt Marker 1 gt PN Sequence Period Settings on the R amp S FSW 1 2 3 4 5 PRESET MODE gt 1xEV DO BTS AMPT gt Reference level 10 dBm FREQ gt Center frequency 878 49 MHz TRIG External Trigger 1 The following results are displayed the first window sho
57. Type PILOT SubtypeO 1 1 Code Domain Power I Branch 2 0ode Fig 10 4 Meas 3 Reducing the Frequency Error by synchronizing the devices Behavior with deviating center frequency setting A measurement can only be valid if the center frequency of the DUT and the analyzer are balanced 1 On the signal generator change the center frequency in steps of 0 1 kHz and observe the analyzer display Up to a frequency error of approximately 1 0 KHz a Code Domain Power measure ment on the R amp S FSW is still possible A frequency error within this range causes no apparent difference in the accuracy of the Code Domain Power measurement In case of a frequency error of more than 1 0 kHz the probability of incorrect syn chronization increases This is indicated by the SYNC FAILED error message If the frequency error exceeds approximately 1 5 kHz a Code Domain Power mea surement cannot be performed This is also indicated by the SYNC FAILED error message 2 Reset the center frequency of the signal generator to 878 49 MHz The center frequency of the DUT should not deviate by more than 1 0 kHz from that of the R amp S FSW 10 4 Meas 4 Measuring the Triggered Relative Code Domain Power If the code domain power measurement is performed without external triggering a sec tion of the test signal is recorded at an arbitrary point of time and the firmware attempts User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 143 Meas 4 Measuring the
58. UNIT on page 171 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer AUTO on page 170 Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level If enabled the reference level is adjusted to the full scale level automatically if any change occurs Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling on page 171 Connected Instrument Displays the status of the Digital Baseband Interface connection If an instrument is connected the following information is displayed e Name and serial number of the instrument connected to the Digital Baseband Inter face Used port e Sample rate of the data currently being transferred via the Digital Baseband Inter face Code Domain Analysis e Level and unit that corresponds to an UO sample with the magnitude 1 Full Scale Level if provided by connected instrument Remote command INPut DIQ CDEVice on page 169 DiglConf Starts the optional R amp S DiglConf application This function is available in the In Output menu but only if the optional software is installed Note that R amp S DiglConf requires a USB connection not LAN from the R amp S FSW to the R amp S EX IQ BOX in addition to the Digital Baseband Interface connection R amp S DiglConf version 2 20 360 86 Build 170 or higher is required To return to the R amp S FSW application press any key The R amp S FSW application is dis played with the Input Output menu regardless of which key was pressed For details on the R amp S DiglConf application see the R amp SGEX IQ
59. add See the table below for available parameter values Return values lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Example Usage Manual operation Configuring the Result Display LAY ADD 1 LEFT MTAB Result 2 Adds a new window named 2 with a marker table to the left of window 1 Query only See Bitstream on page 21 See BTS Channel Results on page 21 See Channel Table on page 22 See Code Domain Power Code Domain Error Power on page 22 See Composite Constellation on page 24 See Composite Data Bitstream MS application only on page 24 See Composite Data Constellation MS application only on page 25 See Composite EVM on page 26 See General Results BTS application only on page 26 See Mag Error vs Chip on page 27 See Peak Code Domain Error on page 28 See Phase Error vs Chip on page 29 See Power vs Chip BTS application only on page 30 See Power vs Halfslot MS application only on page 30 See Power vs Symbol on page 31 See Result Summary MS application only on page 32 See Symbol Constellation on page 32 See Symbol EVM on page 33 See Symbol Magnitude Error on page 34 See Symbol Phase Error on page 34 See Diagram on page 41 See Result Summary on page 42 See Marker Table on page 42 See Marker Peak List on page 42 See Evaluation List on page 43 Table
60. any menu Importing and Exporting UO Data The l Q data to be evaluated for 1xEV DO can not only be measured by the 1xEV DO applications themselves it can also be imported to the applications provided it has the correct format Furthermore the evaluated UO data from the 1xEV DO applications can be exported for further analysis in external applications The import and export functions are available in the Save Recall menu which is dis played when you select the EJ Save or E Open icon in the toolbar For details on importing and exporting UO data see the R amp S FSW User Manual 6 2 1 6 2 2 CR Ca Overview Code Domain Analysis e Default Settings for Code Domain Analyse 63 e COMMOUPATON Ee EE 63 Ee ERR el e DEE 65 e Datalnput and Output Settings E 70 Frontend ET ue EE 82 A e tenent a EARS ABEN NARI KREANSSEN RENS RENE T pne eum e AREE 91 e Signal Capture Data Acoutston neen nnet 96 e Application Data MSRA once aaa 98 e Synchronization MS application pt riot t reef 98 Channel Detection Rm 99 WOOD SOUS miii da 106 e Automati e EE 108 e ZOOM FUNCION Siria ai 110 Default Settings for Code Domain Analysis When you activate a 1xEV DO application the first time a set of parameters is passed on from the currently active application e center frequency and frequency offset e reference level and reference level offset attenuation e Signal source and digital UO input settings
61. begins Possible values are between 0 1 MHz and 2 4 MHz in 1 Hz steps The default value is 1 25 MHz 6 2 3 2 Code Domain Analysis This parameter is available for the RRC filter Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer TYPE on page 162 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer COFRequency on page 161 MS Signal Description These settings describe the input signal in MS measurements Common Subtype Long Code Mask I Long Code Mask Q Multi Carrier Multi Carrier Enhanced Algorithm Multi Carrier Filter Filter Type Roll Off Factor Cut Off Frequency EIDEN Eed idad 69 L Enhanced AIDGPMIL ici ee 69 L Multicarrier FID era ce etre eb tia eet Lr rete ri oet reddis 69 Bia ER NR 69 i e A e ea E a EE 70 L Gut O EE 70 Subtype Specifies the characteristics of the used transmission standard For details see chapter 4 5 Subtypes on page 51 0 1 2 Increased number of active users Single carrier Code Domain Analysis 3 Modulation type 64QAM can be detected Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS SUBType on page 163 Long Code Mask Long Code Mask Q Defines the long code mask for each branch of the mobile in hexadecimal form The value range is from 0 to 4FFFFFFFFFF For more information on long codes see Long code scrambling on page 46 Remote command SENSe CDPower LCODe I on page 164 SENSe CDPower LCODe Q on page
62. dB lt power ID gt type of power detection 0 inactive channel 1 active channel 3 quasi inactive channel on the analyzed branch the channel is not occupied but an active channel exists on the other branch The Hadamard or BitReverse order is important for sorting the channels but not for the number of values With Hadamard the individual codes are output in ascending order With BitReverse codes which belong to a particular channel are adjacent to each other Since an error power is output for Code Domain Error Power consolidation of the power values is not appropriate The number of codes that are output therefore gener ally corresponds to the base spreading factor 11 9 3 5 Code Domain Power BTS application The command returns three values for each code in a channel lt code number gt lt power level gt lt power ID gt The number of results corresponds to the spreading factor see chapter A 2 Channel Type Characteristics on page 273 In addition the output depends on the mapping settings The output is either the branch the Q branch or the complex signal Value Description lt code number gt code number within the channel lt power level gt depending on SENSe CDPower PDISplay absolute level in dBm of the code channel at the selected channel slot or relative level in dB of the channel referenced to total power in the channel type lt power ID gt
63. data rate is higher than the maximal data rate of the connected instrument Reduce the sample rate to solve the problem 12 14 not used 15 This bit is always set to 0 SGTATusOUEGponable DiO CONDitton nennen nennen nne 175 STATUus QUEStonable DIG ENADBIB cursa Corr n e e rte 175 STATUS QUESTONA BIG DIG NTRS RSINON icto cas etr e Crave oo 175 STATus QUEStionable DIQ PTRansition eec 175 STATusOUEGtonabie DIOT EVEN 176 Configuring Code Domain Analysis STATus QUEStionable DIQ CONDition lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the CONDition section of the STATus QUEStionable DIQ CONDition status register The command does not delete the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Example STAT QUES DIQ COND Usage Query only STATus QUEStionable DIQ ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the ENABle part of a register The ENABle part allows true conditions in the EVENt part of the status register to be reported in the summary bit If a bit is 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit transitions to true a positive transition will occur in the summary bit reported to the next higher level Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The
64. ecrit 102 201 A 101 206 Creating from measurement 103 160 Deleting te 102 202 D eleting chanriels 2 rete nnne 103 Details BT EE 103 Details MS EEN 105 DO IDLE 270 272 DO8PSK 270 271 DOTOQAM EE 270 271 Rief a ee le 104 DOQPSK nl EE Evaluation Method oder keke ae 22 Managing 101 Managing remote A 200 Map PING WEE 106 Name 102 206 Parameters 2 222 c dn utet edet 126 PIGH BEEN 270 272 lee 270 272 Predefined 5e dte ee dioses td 270 RECENT 101 200 Results remote coordina 238 Selected EE 101 200 Selecting 101 202 206 e EE 102 SOMN iii oa 103 Trace results tin iaa ld 240 Channel types ACK mu 48 BS o tiesa 48 Configuring in table 104 105 DATA M M 48 Betected MS i ner terrm rre eterne 48 ele un 48 Evaluation MAC 48 MS a lit 48 Parameter values remote Ee EE PILOT EE PREAMBLE a REMOS str tad El e ME REIS us Special MS Channels Active Bandwidth BitSthO Lu iio erede che ceo 2 Evaluation range cities 122 124 Inactive SHOWING otto cni eec ra teret 126 Number caia dl 273 Parameters 18 Power 18 Selected DIS play viisiin dne ettet 13 A eege 23 26 104 106 line le EE 26 TYPE eee and Chip Rate Error
65. frequency error is the sum of the fre quency error of the R amp S FSW and that of the device under test Frequency differences between the transmitter and receiver of more than 1 0 kHz impair synchronization of the Code Domain Power measurement If at all possible the transmitter and the receiver should be synchronized The frequency error is available in the units Hz or ppm referred to the carrier frequency Chip Rate Error CERRor The chip rate error 1 2288 Mcps in ppm A large chip rate error results in symbol errors and therefore in possible synchronization errors for Code Domain Power measurements This parameter is also valid if the R amp S FSW could not synchronize to the 1xEV DO signal Composite Data CODPower MS application subtype 2 3 only Power Power of composite data channel Delta RRI PICH DRPich MS application subtype 0 1 only Delta RRI PICH in dB Code Domain Analysis Parameter SCPI Parame Description ter Rho Data RHOData BTS application only RHO over all half slots for the DATA area Rho MAC RHOMac BTS application only RHO over all slots for the MAC area Rho Overall RHOVerall MS application only RHO over all half slots Rho Overall 1 2 RHO1 BTS application only RHO2 RHOoverai 1 Over all slots over all chips with averaging starting at the half slot limit RHO oyeran 2 Over all slots over all chips with averaging starting at the quarter slot limit R
66. gt LIMit lt k gt PVTime REFerence on page 216 Reference Manual Defines the reference value for the limits manually Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt PVTime REFerence on page 216 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt PVTime RVALue on page 217 Set Mean to Manual When selected the current mean power value of the averaged time response is used as the fixed reference value for the limit lines Reference Manual is activated Now the IDLE slot can be selected and the measurement sequence can be finished Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt PVTime REFerence on page 216 Restart on Fail Evaluates the limit line over all results at the end of a single sweep The sweep restarts if the result is FAIL After a PASS or MARGIN result the sweep ends This function is only available in single sweep mode Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime FREStart on page 217 R amp S9FSW 84 K85 Configuration 6 3 2 Signal Channel Power Measurements The Power measurement determines the 1xEV DO signal channel power To do so the RF signal power of a single channel is analyzed with 1 2288 MHz band width over a single trace The displayed results are based on the root mean square The bandwidth and the associated channel power are displayed in the Result Sum mary In order to determine the signal channel power the 1xEV DO application performs a Channel Power measurement as in the Spectrum appl
67. however When you switch off electronic attenuation the RF attenuation is automatically set to the same mode auto manual as the electronic attenuation was set to Thus the RF attenuation may be set to automatic mode and the full attenuation is provided by the mechanical attenuator if possible Both the electronic and the mechanical attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed in the status bar Remote command INPut EATT STATe on page 189 INPut EATT AUTO on page 188 INPut EATT on page 188 Input Settings Some input settings affect the measured amplitude of the signal as well The parameters Input Coupling and Impedance are identical to those in the Input settings See chapter 6 2 4 1 Input Source Settings on page 70 Preamplifier Input Settings If the optional Preamplifier hardware is installed a preamplifier can be activated for the RF input signal You can use a preamplifier to analyze signals from DUTs with low input power This function is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface For R amp S FSW 26 or higher models the input signal is amplified by 30 dB if the pream plifier is activated For R amp S FSW 8 or 13 models the following settings are ava
68. in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one Min Hold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSW saves each trace point in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one Average The average is formed over several measurements The Sweep Average Count determines the number of averaging procedures View The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed Blank Removes the selected trace from the display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 254 Markers Markers help you analyze your measurement results by determining particular values in the diagram Thus you can extract numeric values from a graphical display Markers are configured in the Marker dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following e Inthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker tab e Press the MKR key then select the Marker Config softkey Markers in Code Domain Analysis measurements In Code Domain Analysis measurements the markers are set to individual symbols codes slots or channels depending on the result display Thus you can use the mark ers to identify individual codes for example e IndividuallMaikel SEIS ui aii iain dnl aa Giclee 128 General Marker Settings iia 129 e Marker Search Gettngs AA 130 e Marker Positioning Funcions uec Az 131
69. minhold or average mode Therefore it can be used to continue measure ments using maxhold or averaging functions Suffix n irrelevant Usage Event Starting a Measurement Manual operation See Continue Single Sweep on page 107 INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous lt State gt This command controls the measurement mode for an individual measurement chan nel Note that in single measurement mode you can synchronize to the end of the mea surement with OPC OPC or WAI In continuous measurement mode synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement is not possible Thus it is not recommended that you use continuous measurement mode in remote control as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a single measurement end synchronization For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual If the measurement mode is changed for a measurement channel while the Sequencer is active see INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate on page 231 the mode is only considered the next time the measurement in that channel is activated by the Sequencer Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 Continuous measurement OFF 0 Single measurement RST 1 Example INIT CONT OFF Switches the measurement mode to single measurement INIT CONT ON Switches the measurement mode to continuous measurement Manual operation See Continuous Sweep RUN CON
70. new channel this will cause an error Example INST REN Spectrum2 Spectrum3 Renames the channel with the name Spectrum2 to Spectrum3 Usage Setting only INSTrument SELect lt ChannelType gt This command activates a new measurement channel with the defined channel type or selects an existing measurement channel with the specified name See also INSTrument CREate NEW on page 156 For a list of available channel types see table 11 1 Parameters lt ChannelType gt BDO 1xEV DO BTS option R amp S FSW K84 MDO 1xEV DO MS option R amp S FSW K85 SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute This command restores the default instrument settings in the current channel Use INST SEL to select the channel Example INST Spectrum2 Selects the channel for Spectrum2 SYST PRES CHAN EXEC Restores the factory default settings to the Spectrum2 channel Usage Event Manual operation See Preset Channel on page 65 Selecting a Measurement The following commands are required to define the measurement type in a remote environment For details on available measurements see chapter 3 Measurements and Result Displays on page 15 CONFloure CDbower BTGlMEAGurement entnehmen 160 Configuring Code Domain Analysis CONFigure C DPower BTS MEASurement Measurement This command selects the RF measurement type with predefined settings according to the 1xEV DO standard Parameters lt Measu
71. not a number is returned Example INP DIQ CDEV Result 1 SMW200A 101190 BBMM 1 OUT 100000000 200000000 Passed Passed 1 1 4QNAN Manual operation See Connected Instrument on page 74 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer AUTO lt State gt If enabled the digital input full scale level is automatically set to the value provided by the connected device if available This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband interface is installed Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Configuring Code Domain Analysis Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 74 INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling lt State gt If enabled the reference level for digital input is adjusted to the full scale level automat ically if the full scale level changes This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is installed Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level on page 74 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer lt Level gt Defines or queries the Full Scale Level i e the level that corresponds to an I Q sam ple with the magnitude 1 This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is installed Parameters lt Level gt lt numeric value gt Range 1pV to 7 071 V RST 1V Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 74 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT lt Unit gt Defines the unit of the full scal
72. of a spectrum display is shifted by a constant offset if it shows absolute frequencies but not if it shows frequencies relative to the signal s center frequency A frequency offset can be used to correct the display of a signal that is slightly distorted by the measurement setup for example The allowed values range from 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting is 0 Hz Remote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 184 6 2 5 2 Amplitude Settings Amplitude settings determine how the R amp S FSW must process or display the expected input power levels Amplitude settings for input from the optional Analog Baseband interface are described in chapter 6 2 5 3 Amplitude Settings for Analog Baseband Input on page 88 To configure the amplitude settings Amplitude settings can be configured via the AMPT key or in the Amplitude dialog box gt To display the Amplitude dialog box do one of the following e Select Input Frontend from the Overview and then switch to the Amplitude tab e Select the AMPT key and then the Amplitude Config softkey Code Domain Analysis Amplitude Reference Level Input Settings Value ifi alue o 0 dBm Preamplifier Offset 0 0 dB Input Coupling Unit aa Impedance Mechanical Attenuation Electronic Attenuation State Mode Mode Value Using Electronic E e fre oro 87 JN gt E 87 Lia 001 MEM 87 Reference Level Defines the expected maximum reference lev
73. or 3 11 9 3 10 Composite Data EVM MS application The command returns the error vector magnitude for each despreaded chip of the composite data channel D This evaluation is only available for subtypes 2 or 3 The number of returned values is 1024 11 9 3 11 Composite EVM RMS The command returns two values for each half slot in the following order lt Half Slot number gt lt value in gt The number of value pairs corresponds to the number of captured half slots 11 9 3 12 Mag Error vs Chip When the trace data for this evaluation is queried a list of magnitude error values of all chips at the selected slot is returned 2560 values The values are calculated as the Retrieving Results magnitude difference between the received signal and the reference signal for each chip in and are normalized to the square root of the average power at the selected slot 11 9 3 13 Peak Code Domain Error The command returns 2 values for each half slot in the following order lt half slot number gt lt level value in dB gt The number of value pairs corresponds to the number of captured half slots 11 9 3 14 Phase Error vs Chip When the trace data for this evaluation is queried a list of phase error values of all chips in the selected slot is returned 2560 values The values are calculated as the phase difference between the received signal and the reference signal for each chip in degrees and are normal
74. or deactivates the YIG preselector if available on the R amp S FSW An internal YIG preselector at the input of the R amp S FSW ensures that image frequen cies are rejected However this is only possible for a restricted bandwidth In order to use the maximum bandwidth for signal analysis you can deactivate the YIG preselector at the input of the R amp S FSW which may lead to image frequency display Code Domain Analysis Note that the YIG preselector is active only on frequencies greater than 8 GHz There fore switching the YIG preselector on or off has no effect if the frequency is below that value Remote command INPut FILTer YIG STATe on page 167 Input Connector Determines whether the RF input data is taken from the RF INPUT connector default or the optional BASEBAND INPUT connector This setting is only available if the optional Analog Baseband Interface is installed and active for input It is not available for the R amp S FSW67 For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Remote command INPut CONNector on page 165 Digital UO Input Settings The following settings and functions are available to provide input via the optional Digi tal Baseband Interface in the applications that support it These settings are only available if the Digital Baseband Interface option is installed on the R amp S FSW They can be configured via t
75. parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Setting parameters lt SumBit gt Range 0 to 65535 Usage SCPI confirmed STATus QUEStionable DIQ NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the Negative TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 1 to 0 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Setting parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 STATus QUEStionable DIQ PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the Positive TRansition part of a register Configuring Code Domain Analysis Setting a bit causes a 0 to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Setting parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 STATus QUEStionable DIQ EVENt lt ChannelName gt This command queries the contents of the EVENt section of the
76. permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters lt Trace gt Number of the trace to be stored lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR1 TRAC 3 C TEST ASC Stores trace 3 from window 1 in the file TEST ASC Usage SCPI confirmed FORMat DEXPort DSEParator lt Separator gt This command selects the decimal separator for data exported in ASCII format 11 9 5 Retrieving Results Parameters lt Separator gt COMMa Uses a comma as decimal separator e g 4 05 POINt Uses a point as decimal separator e g 4 05 RST RST has no effect on the decimal separator Default is POINt Example FORM DEXP DSEP POIN Sets the decimal point as separator Retrieving RF Results The following commands retrieve the results of the 1xEV DO RF measurements Useful commands for retrieving results described elsewhere e CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 237 Remote commands exclusive to CAL Gulatesmss AMIESKS FAME o ASA ais 249 CAL Culate nz M Abker mmzEUNGCHonP OWer zsbzHRESGu 250 CAL Culate nzGTATletceREGultets sen nn nnns ne sensa sns nenas 252 GONFigure CDPower BTS PVTimes LIST RESUIE 2 cieli rotate cuc erectis 252 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt FAIL This c
77. power of an ideally generated reference signal Thus the EVM is shown in The diagram consists of a composite EVM for each slot The measurement evaluates the total signal over the entire period of observation The selected slot is highlighted red You can set the number of slots in the Signal Capture settings see Number of Slots on page 97 2 Composite EVM i Cir 1 Slot Fig 3 9 Composite EVM result display Only the channels detected as being active are used to generate the ideal reference signal If a channel is not detected as being active e g on account of low power the difference between the test signal and the reference signal and therefore the compo site EVM is very large Distortions also occur if unassigned codes are wrongly given the status of active channel To obtain reliable measurement results select an ade quate channel threshold via the Inactive Channel Threshold on page 100 setting Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH CEVM see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 220 CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES MACCuracy see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 234 General Results BTS application only In the BTS application the result summary is divided into two different evaluations e Channel and code specific results see BTS Channel Results on page 21 e General results for the set and slot The General Results show the data of various measurements in numerical form for
78. provides information on the expected input signal e BTS e WE Non ME 161 e IMS Signal Beseniplipii cca ec rre teo cede bud rdc ter d d 164 11 5 1 1 BTS Signal Description The following commands describe the input signal in BTS measurements For more information see chapter 4 6 Multicarrier Mode on page 52 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer COFRequency esee 161 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTerROF FF ooociccccccccnconncnnononnncncnnnnonono nc 161 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer S TATe eee eene 162 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer TYPE ccccceeceececeeeeeeeecaeaeaeaeeeaeeneeeteneneees 162 CONFloure CDbPower BTGlMCAbrer MAL Go 163 CONFloure CDbowerf BTGlMCAbRrert SGTATel nana 163 GONFigure GDPower BTS SUBTYpe renean pee Cuneo xen eda da eap ERE Stu 163 SENSeJTCDBPONWeOIRPNGOPISQU EE 164 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer COFRequency Frequency This command sets the cut off frequency for the RRC filter Parameters Frequency Range 0 1 MHz to 2 4 MHz RST 1 25 Example CONF CDP MCAR ON Activates multicarrier mode CONF CDP MCAR FILT ON Activates an additional filter for multicarrier measurements CONF CDP MCAR FILT TYPE RRC Activates the RRC filter CONF CDP MCAR FILT COFR 1 5MHZ Sets the cut off frequency to 1 5 MHz Manual operation See Cut Off
79. see the device manuals Micro buton ACOM EE 78 Microbutton Action Active R amp S probes except for RT ZS10E have a configurable microbutton on the probe head By pressing this button you can perform an action on the instrument directly from the probe Select the action that you want to start from the probe Run single Starts one data acquisition No action Prevents unwanted actions due to unintended usage of the microbut ton Remote command SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup MODE on page 179 6 2 4 2 Output Settings The R amp S FSW can provide output to special connectors for other devices For details on connectors refer to the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual Front Rear Panel View chapters o How to provide trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 78 Code Domain Analysis Output settings can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key or in the Outputs dia log box IF Video Output IF Wide Out Frequency Noise Source Trigger 2 Trigger 3 NOISE SOURCE csi A a 79 TUI ta A Ai E aerated A 79 Ge asia i 80 L E 80 A A A ud 80 L Send NL oo NOD T m 80 Noise Source Switches the supply voltage for an external noise source on or off External noise sources are useful when you are measuring power levels that fall below the noise floor of the R amp S FSW itself for example when measuring the noise level of a DUT Remot
80. sorting the following code order is displayed the Pilot channel is selected 1 Code Domain Power I Branch 1 Gode Fig 4 5 Code Domain Error Power result display in Hadamard code sorting order The same results in Bit Reverse order 1 Code Domain Power I Branch Fig 4 6 Code Domain Error Power result display in BitReverse code sorting order For the display in the 1xEV DO BTS application the scale for code based diagrams displays 32 codes For the display in the 1xEV DO MS application the scale for code based diagrams dis plays 16 codes Test Setup for 1xEV DO Base Station or Mobile Sta tion Tests Before a 1xEV DO measurement can be performed the R amp S FSW must be set up in a test environment This section describes the required settings of the R amp S FSW if it is used as a 1xEV DO base or mobile station tester Before starting the measurements the R amp S FSW has to be configured correctly and supplied with power as described in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual Preparing For Use Furthermore the applica tion firmware 1xEV DO BTS or 1xEV DO MS must be enabled Installation and ena bling of the application firmware are described in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual or in the Release Notes User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 54 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurement Basics Risk of instrument damage during operation An unsuitable operating site or test setup can cause damage to the instrume
81. task In this case the procedure using the touchscreen is described Any elements that can be activated by touching can also be clicked using an additionally connected mouse The alternative procedure using the keys on the instrument or the on screen keyboard is only described if it deviates from the standard operating procedures The term select may refer to any of the described methods i e using a finger on the touchscreen a mouse pointer in the display or a key on the instrument or on a key board 1 3 3 Notes on Screenshots When describing the functions of the product we use sample screenshots These screenshots are meant to illustrate as much as possible of the provided functions and possible interdependencies between parameters The screenshots usually show a fully equipped product that is with all options instal led Thus some functions shown in the screenshots may not be available in your par ticular product configuration 2 Welcome to the 1xEV DO Applications The 1xEV DO options are firmware applications that add functionality to the R amp S FSW to perform measurements on downlink or uplink signals according to the 1xEV DO standard R amp S FSW K84 performs Base Transceiver Station BTS measurements on forward link signals on the basis of the 3GPP2 Standard Third Generation Partnership Project 2 R amp S FSW K85 performs Mobile Station MS measurements on reverse link signals on the basis of the 3GPP2 Standard
82. the average count has been reached Parameters lt SweepCount gt Example Usage Manual operation When you set a sweep count of 0 or 1 the R amp S FSW performs one single measurement in single measurement mode In continuous measurement mode if the sweep count is set to 0 a moving average over 10 measurements is performed Range 0 to 200000 RST 0 SWE COUN 64 Sets the number of measurements to 64 INIT CONT OFF Switches to single measurement mode INIT WAI Starts a measurement and waits for its end SCPI confirmed See Sweep Average Count on page 106 See No of HalfSlots on page 112 11 5 9 Automatic Settings MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode the following automatic commands are not available as they require a new data acquisition However 1xEV DO applications cannot perform data acquisition in MSRA operating mode Configuring Code Domain Analysis Useful commands for adjusting settings automatically described elsewhere e DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO ONCE on page 184 Remote commands exclusive to adjusting settings automatically SENSE JADJUSPAL conocia a 208 SENSe JADJust CONFigure DURA ON i occomoicrcnnnccncanan nain tnim nnn rienda aan na dcr naci n 208 IGENZGelADlust CONEioure DURatonMODE essere nennen 209 IGENZGelADlust CONEioure Hv teresle LOMer eene 209 SENSeJADJust CONFigure HY teresle Uber 209 SENSe TABJUSEEEMel
83. the current diagram by a new diagram which displays an enlarged extract of the trace This function can be used repetitively until the required details are visible Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 227 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA on page 226 Multiple Zoom Ba In multiple zoom mode you can enlarge several different areas of the trace simultane ously An overview window indicates the zoom areas in the original trace while the zoomed trace areas are displayed in individual windows The zoom area that corre sponds to the individual zoom display is indicated in the lower right corner between the scrollbars Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 228 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA on page 227 Restore Original Display Restores the original display and closes all zoom windows Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 227 single zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 228 for each multiple zoom window E Deactivating Zoom Selection mode Deactivates any zoom mode RF Measurements Tapping the screen no longer invokes a zoom but selects an object Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 227 single zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 228 for each multiple zoom window 6 3 RF Measurements
84. the filename uses the following convention lt xyz gt lt Format gt lt Channels gt ch lt Type gt e xyz a valid Windows file name e Format complex polar or real see Format element e Channels Number of channels see NumberOfChannels element e Type float32 float64 int8 int16 int32 or int64 see DataType element Examples xyz complex 1ch float32 e xyz polar 1ch float64 e xyz real 1ch int16 xyz complex 16ch int8 UserData Optional contains user application or device specific XML data which is not part of the iq tar specification This element can be used to store additional information e g the hardware configuration User data must be valid XML content PreviewData Optional contains further XML elements that provide a preview of the UO data The preview data is determined by the routine that saves an iq tar file e g R amp S FSW For the definition of this element refer to the RsIqTar xsd schema Note that the preview can be only displayed by current web browsers that have JavaScript enabled and if the XSLT stylesheet open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt is available Example ScalingFactor Data stored as int16 and a desired full scale voltage of 1 V ScalingFactor 1 V maximum int16 value 1 V 215 3 0517578125e 5 V Scaling Factor Numerical value Numerical value x ScalingFac tor Minimum negative int16 value 215 32768 1V Maximum positiv
85. the following formula No of sets measurement time in seconds 80 ms time per set Enter the next larger integer value 4 Define the starting point of the application data as the Capture offset The offset is calculated according to the following formula lt capture offset gt lt starting point for application gt lt starting point in capture buf fer gt 5 The analysis interval is automatically determined according to the selected chan nel slot or frame to analyze defined for the evaluation range depending on the result display Note that the frame slot channel is analyzed within the application data If the analysis interval does not yet show the required area of the capture buf User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 136 fer move through the frames slots channels in the evaluation range or correct the application data range If the Sequencer is off select the Refresh softkey in the Sweep menu to update the result displays for the changed application data Meas 1 Measuring the Signal Channel Power 10 Measurement Examples The following measurement examples demonstrate the basic Code Domain Analysis functions for the 1xEV DO standard These examples assume a basic test setup as described in chapter 4 9 Test Setup for 1xEV DO Base Station or Mobile Station Tests on page 54 The following measurement examples are basic 1xEV DO base station tests using a setup with a signal generator e g an R amp S SMU
86. time depends on available memory Parameters lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see INSTrument LIST on page 157 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The channel name is displayed as the tab label for the measurement channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel see INSTrument LIST on page 157 Example INST CRE SAN Spectrum 2 Adds an additional spectrum display named Spectrum 2 Activating the Measurement Channel INSTrument CREate REPLace lt ChannelName1 gt lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName2 gt This command replaces a measurement channel with another one Setting parameters lt ChannelName1 gt String containing the name of the measurement channel you want to replace lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see INSTrument LIST on page 157 lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the name of the new channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel see INSTrument LIST on page 157 Example INST CRE REPL Spectrum2 IQ IQAnalyzer Replaces the channel named Spectrum2 by a new measure ment channel of type IQ Analyzer named IQAnalyzer Usage Setti
87. tion CD ROM delivered with the instrument In the user manuals all instrument func tions are described in detail Furthermore they provide a complete description of the remote control commands with programming examples The user manual for the base unit provides basic information on operating the R amp S FSW in general and the Spectrum application in particular Furthermore the soft ware functions that enhance the basic functionality for various applications are descri Conventions Used in the Documentation bed here An introduction to remote control is provided as well as information on main tenance instrument interfaces and troubleshooting In the individual application manuals the specific instrument functions of the applica tion are described in detail For additional information on default settings and parame ters refer to the data sheets Basic information on operating the R amp S FSW is not inclu ded in the application manuals All user manuals are also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www2 rohde schwarz com product FSW html Service Manual This manual is available in PDF format on the Documentation CD ROM delivered with the instrument It describes how to check compliance with rated specifications instru ment function repair troubleshooting and fault elimination It contains all information required for repairing the R amp S FSW by replacing modules
88. to analyze data in MSRA operating mode R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurement Basics In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master actually captures data the MSRA applications receive an extract of the captured data for analysis referred to as the application data For the 1xEV DO BTS application in MSRA operating mode the application data range is defined by the same settings used to define the signal cap ture in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode In addition a capture offset can be defined i e an offset from the start of the captured data to the start of the analysis interval for the 1xEV DO BTS measurement Data coverage for each active application Generally if a signal contains multiple data channels for multiple standards separate applications are used to analyze each data channel Thus it is of interest to know which application is analyzing which data channel The MSRA Master display indicates the data covered by each application restricted to the channel bandwidth used by the corresponding standard for 1xEV DO 1 2288 MHz by vertical blue lines labeled with the application name Analysis interval However the individual result displays of the application need not analyze the com plete data range The data range that is actually analyzed by the individual result dis play is referred to as the analysis interval In the 1xEV DO BTS application the analysis interval is automatically determined according to the selected channe
89. to perform all measurements consecutively and either switch through the results easily or monitor all results at the same time in the MultiView tab For details on the Sequencer function see the R amp S FSW User Manual Selecting the measurement type When you activate a measurement channel in a 1xEV DO application Code Domain Analysis of the input signal is started automatically However the 1xEV DO applica tions also provide other measurement types gt To select a different measurement type do one of the following e Select the Overview softkey In the Overview select the Select Measure ment button Select the required measurement e Press the MEAS key In the Select Measurement dialog box select the required measurement Result DIS BIA M te cies SA ee m 61 e Code Doman ANAE a ege eati x D nti eee 62 E SIC D r 111 Result Display The captured signal can be displayed using various evaluation methods All evaluation methods available for 1xEV DO applications are displayed in the evaluation bar in SmartGrid mode when you do one of the following e Select the EJ SmartGrid icon from the toolbar e Select the Display button in the Overview Press the MEAS key e Select the Display Config softkey in any 1XEV DO menu Up to 16 evaluation methods can be displayed simultaneously in separate windows The 1xEV DO evaluation methods are described in ch
90. use the mark ers to identify individual codes for example Search Next EE 132 Search Next MiNiIMUM EE 132 SEL re EE 132 SAA A oce E TG4 S Eat H TRIER DR da E To CL UCET DAE aidan 132 Search Next Peak Sets the selected marker delta marker to the next lower maximum of the assigned trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 259 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum NEXT on page 260 Search Next Minimum Sets the selected marker delta marker to the next higher minimum of the selected trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 259 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum NEXT on page 261 Peak Search Sets the selected marker delta marker to the maximum of the trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum PEAK on page 259 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK on page 260 Search Minimum Sets the selected marker delta marker to the minimum of the trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum PEAK on page 259 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum PEAK on page 261 Error Messages 8 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Mea surement If the results do not meet your expectations try the following methods to optimize the
91. values Test setup 1 Connect the RF output of the R amp S SMU to the input of the R amp S FSW 2 Connect the reference input REF INPUT on the rear panel of the R amp S FSW to the reference input REF on the rear panel of the R amp S SMU coaxial cable with BNC connectors 3 Connect the external trigger input of the R amp S FSW TRIGGER INPUT to the exter nal trigger output of the R amp S SMU TRIGOUT1 of PAR DATA Settings on the R amp S SMU 1 PRESET FREQ 878 49 MHz LEVEL 0 dBm DIGITAL STD 1xEV DO DIGITAL STD gt Set Default DIGITAL STD gt LINK DIRECTION gt DOWN FORWARD DO O0 Or 2 uw DIGITAL STD gt 1xEV DO gt STATE ON Settings on the R amp S FSW 1 PRESET 2 MODE gt 1xEV DO BTS 3 AMPT gt Reference level 10 dBm 4 FREQ gt Center frequency 878 49 MHz R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurement Examples EH 5 TRIG gt External Trigger 1 6 MEAS CONFIG gt Display Config gt Composite EVM Window 2 replacing Result Summary 7 AUTO SET gt Auto Scale All The following results are displayed the first window shows the diagram of the Composite EVM measurement result In the second window the General Result Summary is displayed The Slot Results show the numeric results of the Code Domain Power measurement including the values for the Composite EVM MultiView 33 Spectrum 1xEV DO BTS Ref Level m Freq 878 49MHz Channel 0 32 Code Power Relative At
92. 010 1010 1010 1010 DATA 2 4 Q 1111 1111 1111 1111 ACK 4 8 l 0000 0000 0000 1000 DRC 8 16 Q 0110 0000 0000 0000 Channel Type Characteristics A 2 Channel Type Characteristics At a chip rate of 1 2288 MHz the symbol rate results as 1 2288MHz spreading factor The bit rate depends on how many bits describe a symbol in the modulation type being used BTS signals Due to the different PREAMBLE lengths the DATA area is shortened depending on the PREAMBLE All relationships can be seen in the following table Table 1 8 Relationship between various parameters in 1xEV DO BTS application Channel type Code Sub SF Symbol Modulation type Chips per slot Sym Bits per slot and code class type rate bols per Mapping or Mapping slot Q complex and code PILOT 5 32 38 4 ksps BPSK I 96 2 192 6 6 12 MAC 6 0 1 64 19 2ksps BPSK I BPSK Q 64 4 256 4 4 8 2 3 128 9 6ksps BPSK I BPSK Q 128 2 256 2 2 4 OOK ACK I OOK ACK Q OOK NAK I OOK NAK Q PREAMBLE 5 0 1 32 38 4 ksps BPSK I Preamble length 64 128 4 256 16 512 16 16 32 1024 32 32 64 2 64 19 2 ksps BPSK I Preamble length 64 1 1 128 2 2 256 4 4 512 8 8 16 1024 16 16 32 3 128 9 6ksps BPSK I or BPSK Preamble length Q 64 0 5 0 5 1 128 1 1 2 256 2 2 4 512 4 4 8 1024 8 8 16 DATA 4 0 1 2 16 76 8ksps QPSK 8 PSK 400 4 Mapping always complex 16 Q
93. 02 3GB 6 XML 7209 MYTABLE XML 349 UJ Query only See Predefined Tables on page 101 Table 11 4 Description of query results in example Value Description 52853 Total size of all channel table files 52583 bytes 2634403840 Free memory on hard disk 2 6 Gbytes 3GB 1 16 XML Channel table 1 3GB 1 16 XML 3469 File size for channel table 1 3469 bytes 3GB 1 32 XML Channel table 2 3GB 1 32 XML 5853 File size for channel table 2 5853 bytes 3GB 1 64 XML Channel table 3 3GB 1 64 XML 10712 File size for channel table 3 10712 bytes Channel table x CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle COPY lt FileName gt This command copies one channel table into another one The channel table to be copied is selected with command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle NAME on page 206 Parameters lt FileName gt Example Usage Manual operation string with a maximum of 8 characters name of the new channel table CONF CDP CTAB NAME NEW TAB Defines the channel table name to be copied CONF CDP CTAB COPY CTAB 2 Copies channel table NEW TAB to CTAB 2 Event See Copying a Table on page 102 Configuring Code Domain Analysis CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DELete This command deletes the selected channel table The channel table to be deleted is selected with the command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle N
94. 1 Magnitude Error vs Chip Chip 0 25 amp Chip Chip 2559 Fig 3 11 Magnitude Error vs Chip display for 1xEV DO BTS measurements Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH MECHip see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 220 TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt 1 4 gt Peak Code Domain Error The Peak Code Domain Error is defined as the maximum value for the Code Domain Power Code Domain Error Power for all codes Thus the error between the measure ment signal and the ideal reference signal is projected onto the code domain at a spe cific base spreading factor In the diagram each bar of the x axis represents one slot The y axis represents the error power The measurement evaluates the total signal over the entire period of observation The currently selected slot is highlighted red You can select the Number of Sets and the number of evaluated slots in the Signal Capture settings see chapter 6 2 7 Signal Capture Data Acquisition on page 96 MS application the error is calculated only for the selected branch I or Q 1 Peak Code Domain Error Clrw Fig 3 12 Peak Code Domain Error display in the BTS application User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 28 Code Domain Analysis Note Only the channels detected as being active are used to generate the ideal refer ence signal If a channel is not detected as being active e g on account of low power the difference between the test signal and the reference signal is very large
95. 106 SWEEP COUN EE 106 Trace CONG EE 126 Trigger CORflg EE 91 Trigger Offset io 94 Upper Level Hysteresis nrrnenns 109 Sort order BIEROVOIS eii eese lo Partage nt 53 eoo lie 22 120 211 Hadamard ERR 53 Span A ra paoia raa eeuna deade aaa 62 Special channels MS aienti Eed 48 Specifics for efe nite UCL EE 65 Spectrum Emission Mask S66 SEM EE Spreading ET BTS application i meters MS application E Querying remote Status Channels cep M s 265 Status registers HE We TH Oe EE 165 STATus QUEStionable DIQ vissiin 173 A irdenas 01 273 Remote cit TT II A Da 163 A AO 66 68 Suffixes COMMON incor lia Ia eurer PRA ta ce Rid 155 Remote commands dessert i 152 Sweep ADOMING eene 107 Configuration softkey 106 Configuring remote 206 A ed 106 Symbol Constellation Evaluation method Trace results e EIN Evaluation method Ee A e Le EE Symbol Magnitude Error Evaluation Trace results Symbol Phase Error Evaluation 34 Trace Feeler 2 rre a rete 248 Symbol rate del BTS applicatiori iter tn 273 el 13 Symbols Number per Slot cte rines 273 per half slot Power Synchronization ro Denes Auxiliary piloE cmo it 46 98 ChiahnelPOW r otn ite tr 46 98 Pilot oaoa dl 46 98 Reference frequencies
96. 11 6 lt WindowType gt parameter values for 1xEV DO application Parameter value Window type BITStream Bitstream CCONst Composite Constellation CDBits Composite Bitstream MS application with subtype 2 or 3 only CDConst Composite Data Constellation MS application with subtype 2 or 3 only CDEPower Code Domain Error Power CDPower Code Domain Power CEVM Composite EVM Configuring the Result Display Parameter value Window type CRESults BTS Channel results CTABle Channel Table DIAG Power vs Time diagram BTS application only GRESults General results BTS application only LEValuation List evaluation SEM Power vs Time MECHip Magnitude Error vs Chip MTABle Marker table PCDerror Peak Code Domain Error PCHip Power vs Chip BTS application only PECHip Phase Error vs Chip PHSLot Power vs Halfslot MS application only PSYMbol Power vs Symbol RSUMmary Result Summary SCONst Symbol Constellation SEVM Symbol EVM SMERror Symbol Magnitude Error SPERror Symbol Phase Error LAYout CATalog WINDow This command queries the name and index of all active windows in the active mea surement channel from top left to bottom right The result is a comma separated list of values for each window with the syntax lt WindowName_1 gt lt Windowlndex_1 gt lt WindowName_n gt lt Windowlndex_n gt Return values lt WindowName gt string
97. 117 6 3 1 Power Vs Time BTS only The Power vs Time measurement performs a special Spectrum Emission Mask mea surement with predefined settings as defined by the 1xEV DO standard To do so it examines a specified number of half slots Up to 36 half slots can be captured and pro cessed simultaneously That means that for a standard measurement of 100 half slots RF Measurements only three data captures are necessary After capturing the data the application aver ages the measured values and compares the results to the emission envelope mask Table 6 2 Default settings used for the Power vs Time measurement Setting Default value Frequency Span 0 Zero Span Sweep Time 833 38 Ms RBW 3 MHz VBW 10 MHz Detector RMS Trace Mode Average not available via the Overview only via softkeys in the Power vs Time menu which is displayed when you press the MEAS CONFIG key Furthermore the following buttons are not available in the Overview o The measurement specific settings for the Power vs Time measurement are currently e Signal Description e Signal Capture e Synchronization Channel Detection The following settings can be configured for the Power vs Time measurement Eat le EE 112 PRP SOO EE 112 Burst ai 113 Reference M an WE iicet da dida diia idad 113 Reference Manda 113 Set Mean to Manual cuina e aiii 113 Restan on Falli scs ad ene SSES 113 No of HalfSlots Defines the
98. 1xEV DO First EVolution Data Only 1xEV DOO was specified by 3GPP2 3rd Generation Partnership Project 2 The fol lowing link provides access to 3GPP2 specifications http www 3gpp2 org Public_html specs index cfm The 1xEV DO standard was developed from the cdma2000 standard which in turn was an extension of cdmaOne IS 95 All these standards are based on the same RF parameters thus the RF measurements of cdma2000 and 1xEV DO are identical In the code domain however cdma2000 and 1xEV DO are not compatible since the chips for 1xEV DO are assigned chronologically one after the other to the different channel types and in the DATA channel type 8 PSK and 16 QAM modulation methods are used in addition to QPSK With cdma2000 only BPSK and QPSK modulation methods are used Furthermore a slot is always assigned to precisely one mobile sta tion with 1xEV DO whereas with cdma2000 several mobile stations communicate with the base station simultaneously Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used in 1xEV DO tests and measurements is provided here for a better understanding of the required configu ration settings SOW ANG SOS E 44 e Scrambling via PN Offsets and Long Codes essen 45 e Synchronization MS application oh 46 e Channel Detection and Channel Types cccccccseececcccseeseecctecenedsecdeneeseeaecneneees 47 O MEDER 51 e Mu lticamier Mod
99. 1xEV DO applica tions are described here Mute E 150 COMMON DUMMIES ids rdc A 155 e Activating the Measurement Channel essei needs 156 e Selecting a Measurement nannte 159 e Configuring Code Domain Anahysis A 160 e Configuring RF Measuremelts uero reete rrr rere a an ee rd P reza dt 215 e Configuring the Result Display 219 e Starting a Measurement seeec eee ntneze stunt te za DaRp nennen nando 228 e Rel ieving Resullst cere ettet t e E 233 e General UIDI IEEE 253 e Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results esee 261 e Configuring the Application Data Range MSRA mode only 263 e Querying the Status Regislers eerie deua e Ecre dada 265 e Commands for Compatibilty coin ENEE SEENEN eta SERRE 267 Introduction Commands are program messages that a controller e g a PC sends to the instru ment or software They operate its functions setting commands or events and request information query commands Some commands can only be used in one way others work in two ways setting and query If not indicated otherwise the com mands can be used for settings and queries The syntax of a SCPI command consists of a header and in most cases one or more parameters To use a command as a query you have to append a question mark after the last header element even if the command contains a parameter R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote
100. 22 Composite Constellation sesssssssss 24 Composite Data Bitstream remote 245 Composite Data Constellation remote 245 Composite Data EVM remote 245 Composite EVM edu NENNEN 26 Composite EVM remote 245 ele e il WEE 61 Configuring remote 2 219 DIagf atri aeri mae ener ener es 41 Evaluation Jegen ed enm OC Ede 43 Marker table 42 Peak Code Domain Error 28 Peak list 42 PowWer VS CHIP cc terere tare re rni deed 30 Power vs Chip remote 246 Power vs half slot ice reti geed ee 30 Power vs half slot remote 246 Power vs Symbol sistiese isoine aksi 31 Result Summary 32 42 see also Evaluations one ee 15 Symbol Constellation A 32 Symbol EVM 5 2 ete geg nce evene ttr geet 33 Result Summary Evaluation method 32 42 Result display s oce dada 42 ee 247 Results Calculated remote AAA 233 CDP remote 0 2 234 Data format remote 238 Evaluating 118 Exporting remote Retrieving remote RF remote 249 Trace remote 238 Trace data remote sssssssssssssss 238 Trace data query remote 239 240 Updating the display remote ssssse 264 Retrieving Calculated results remote ssessss 233 Results remote
101. 33 MHz indicated for reference only Invert Q Inverts the sign of the signal s Q branch The default setting is OFF Remote command SENSe CDPower QINVert on page 198 Number of Slots Sets the number of slots you want to analyze The maximum number of slots is 36 for the BTS application and 70 in the MS applica tion The default value is 3 To capture more slots increase the Number of Sets on page 98 to capture In this case the number of slots is number of sets x 32 BTS application or number of sets x 64 MS application 6 2 8 6 2 9 Code Domain Analysis For more information on slots and sets see chapter 4 1 Slots and Sets on page 44 Remote command SENSe CDPower IQLength on page 197 Number of Sets Defines the number of consecutive sets to be captured and stored in the instrument s IQ memory The possible value range is from 1 to a maximum of 1500 BTS applica tion or 810 MS application sets The default setting is 1 If you capture more than one set the number of slots PCGs is always 64 1xEV DO BTS application 32 and is not available for modification Remote command SENSe CDPower SET COUNt on page 198 Set to Analyze Selects a specific set for further analysis The value range is between 0 and Number of Sets on page 98 1 Remote command SENSe CDPower SET on page 215 Application Data MSRA For the 1xEV DO BTS application in MSRA operating mode t
102. 5 Symb O 7 66667 Symb 2 Power vs Chip For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual See Se aa User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 58 Import Export Functions 5 1 Q Data Import and Export Baseband signals mostly occur as so called complex baseband signals i e a signal representation that consists of two channels the in phase lI and the quadrature Q channel Such signals are referred to as UO signals UO signals are useful because the specific RF or IF frequencies are not needed The complete modulation information and even distortion that originates from the RF IF or baseband domains can be ana lyzed in the UO baseband Importing and exporting UO signals is useful for various applications e Generating and saving UO signals in an RF or baseband signal generator or in external software tools to analyze them with the R amp S FSW later e Capturing and saving l Q signals with an RF or baseband signal analyzer to ana lyze them with the R amp S FSW or an external software tool later As opposed to storing trace data which may be averaged or restricted to peak values UO data is stored as it was captured without further processing The data is stored as complex values in 32 bit floating point format Multi channel data is not supported The UO data is stored in a format with the file extension iq tar For a detailed description see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Export on
103. 600 307 d 1536 vin leie Oo O 204813 QPSK 2 153 1 em 919 vw Bjensups 30723 8PSK 2 153 2 1600 ars vin ijwesup 4096 V3 16QAM2 1596 1 gt gt 1000 3106 Y N 2457 6 kbps 4096 1 3 16 QAM 1 1536 1536 Rate Siots Packets requiring Preamble t Preamble always starts on a full siot boundary multiple slots use a 4 2 MACindex encoded as W on channel only slot interlace system Fig 4 1 Slot structure chip distribution and preamble lengths in 1xEV DO BTS application The 1xEV DO applications can capture up to 48000 slots about 80 seconds in a sin gle sweep In order to improve performance during measurement and analysis the captured slots are not processed by the 1xEV DO application all at once but rather in sets one at a time One set usually consists of 32 slots in BTS application and 64 slots in the MS application You can select how many sets are to be captured and which set is currently analyzed and displayed The possible capture range is from 1 to a maximum of 1500 BTS application or 810 MS application sets 4 2 Scrambling via PN Offsets and Long Codes Short code scrambling Base stations use a pseudo noise PN sequence also referred to as short code sequence to scramble the data during transmission The used PN sequence is circula ted in fixed time intervals A specified PN offset value determines the start phase for the short code sequence The PN parameter is unique for each base station Thus the s
104. 78 Minimum 132 Marker POSITIONING rtr 132 Next eene 132 icol 90 MKR gt nc m 131 Modulation ACCURACY T eeeeee 26 Bits per symbol 273 274 WY m PIN 19 Modulation types A emen tes etd uates ee vc be vss MAC MS bites ON OFF keying OOKA OOKN x SUDIY POD des 51 MS Mobile station a n Sesaat 11 MSR ACLR Results remote ete ances 250 MSRA Analysis interval Operating mode MSRA applications Capture OffSeL E Capture offset remote MSRA Master Data Coverage enne i eter pet 57 Multicarrier eier LEE 67 69 163 Carrier detection 67 69 163 El aii sedanu aaue 67 69 162 Filter types 67 69 162 ui c O 52 MOd6 cii Re e rer etii tis 52 67 69 Multiple Measurement channels sssssssssss 12 61 Multiple zoom N Next Mini MM e M Marker positioning m NexEP6ealk oit ere eene Hype id ton asada Marker positlOnilig iacit rra tni oct rentes No of Half Slots 3c cii E o ertet toa tt oe de d ere te e Noise SOU CC IM eege 79 O OBW OCCUPIED bandwidth siii 39 HE E El 39 Configuring 1xEV DO seen 116 Offset Analysis interval isss sansara aia 95 Frequentes 84 Reference level one c TS OOKA Modulation type e ir E ec e te e reins 51 OOKN Modula
105. 90 Auto settings ica ette nn ene E rra 108 Meastime AU O circo ce rene see iens 109 Meastime Manual ooooooccccccnoccoocccnncononooonnncnccccnananonnns 109 Remote comnmiands 5 m aia 207 Autosearch Channel detection eint reno 47 Auxiliary pilot Synchronization Average LEE B B4 Modulation dVp8S eegend ed 51 Bandclasses PER EE Defining SEM Supported Bandwidth Coverage MSRA mode coooooccccnooccconocccononancnonnccninancnn no 57 TE EE 62 Bit Reverse SOM Order NER 53 120 211 Bitstream Evaluation method 221 Trace results 240 Branches 02 ICI H M 47 Evaluation range ssssesssss 123 125 214 REtMevINO Pere 240 Selecting re tont tenente 123 125 214 BTS Base transceiver station seis dd HESE PM 113 Power vs Time remote esses 217 C STE Te TEE 97 197 Capture offset MSRA applications nens 95 98 Remote Softkey Carrier Frequency Error ice eire 16 CCDF TXEV DO results user Configuring 1xEV DO CDA ee re ts Analysis settings BTS oi ele tal ET Configuring remote eee Evaluation settings BTS remote ET Parameters 2 ced gue ce rg rco cete Deme Performifig tan Ete teretes aci fm C CDE Peak See PODE E 28 CDEP Code Domain Error Power c ooccccnccccoc
106. ACE2 Reads out the results in BitReverse order Manual operation See Operation Mode on page 121 SENSe CDPower ORDer lt SortOrder gt This command sets the channel sorting for the Code Domain Power and Code Domain Error Power result displays Parameters lt SortOrder gt Example Manual operation Configuring Code Domain Analysis HADamard BITReverse RST HADamard For further details refer to chapter 4 8 Code Display and Sort Order on page 53 CDP ORD HAD Sets Hadamard order TRAC TRACE2 Reads out the results in Hadamard order CDP ORD BITR Sets BitReverse order TRAC TRACE2 Reads out the results in BitReverse order See Code Display Order on page 120 SENSe CDPower PDISplay Mode This command defines how the pilot channel power is displayed in the Result Sum mary In relative mode the reference power is the total power Parameters Mode Example Manual operation ABS REL RST REL CDP PDIS REL Pilot channel power is displayed in relation to the total power See Code Power Display on page 119 SENSe CDPower PREFerence Power This command specifies the reference power for the relative power result displays e g Code Domain Power Power vs PCG Parameters Power Example Manual operation PICH TOTal PICH The reference power is the power of the pilot channel TOTal The reference power is the total power of the signal
107. AM PreambleChips Modulation type DataNettoChips Reference Supported Bandclasses A 3 Channel type Code Sub SF Symbol Modulation type Chips per slot Sym Bits per slot and code class type rate bols per Mapping or Mapping slot Q complex and code QPSK 8 16 64 PSK QAM QAM 3 16 64 QAM 1600 0 1600 100 200 300 400 500 1600 64 1536 96 192 288 384 480 1600 128 1472 92 184 276 368 460 1600 256 1344 84 168 252 336 420 1600 512 1088 68 136 204 272 340 1600 1024 576 36 72 104 144 180 MS signals Table 1 9 Relationship between various channel parameters in the 1xEV DO MS application Data rate ksps Spreading factor Code class Symbols per half slot 76 8 16 4 64 153 6 8 3 128 307 2 4 2 256 Table 1 10 Relationship between modulation type and bits per symbol Modulation type Bits per symbol BPSK 1 2BPSK 2 QPSK 2 8 PSK 3 16QAM 4 Q2 4 Q4 2 Q4Q2 6 E4E2 9 Reference Supported Bandclasses The bandclass defines the frequency band used for ACLR and SEM measurements It also determines the corresponding limits and ACLR channel settings according to the UO Data File Format iq tar 1xEV DO standard The used bandclass is defined in the SEM or ACLR measurement settings see Bandclass on page 115 Table 1 11 Supported bandclasses for 1xEV
108. AME on page 206 Example CONF CDP CTAB NAME MEN TAB Defines the channel table name to be deleted CONF CDP CTAB DEL Deletes the table Manual operation See Deleting a Table on page 102 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle RESTore This command restores the predefined channel tables to their factory set values In this way you can undo unintentional overwriting Example CONF CDP CTAB REST Restores the channel table Usage Event Manual operation See Restoring Default Tables on page 102 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SELect lt FileName gt This command selects a predefined channel table file for comparison during channel detection Before using this command the channel table must be switched on first with the com mand CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle STATe on page 202 Parameters lt FileName gt RST RECENT Example CONF CDP CTAB ON Switches the channel table on CONF CDP CTAB SEL CTAB 1 Selects the predefined channel table CTAB 1 Manual operation See Selecting a Table on page 101 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle STATe State This command switches the channel table on or off Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CONF CDP CTAB ON Manual operation See Using Predefined Channel Tables on page 100 11 5 7 2 Configuring Code Domain Analysis SENSe CDPower ICTReshold lt ThresholdLevel gt This command defines the minimum power w
109. ANDclass on page 218 6 3 5 Occupied Bandwidth The Occupied Bandwidth measurement is performed as in the Spectrum application with default settings Table 6 6 Predefined settings for 1xEV DO OBW measurements Setting Default value 96 Power Bandwidth 99 Channel bandwidth 1 2288 MHz The Occupied Bandwidth measurement determines the bandwidth that the signal occu pies The occupied bandwidth is defined as the bandwidth in which in default settings 99 of the total signal power is to be found The percentage of the signal power to be included in the bandwidth measurement can be changed For further details about the Occupied Bandwidth measurements refer to Measuring the Occupied Bandwidth in the R amp S FSW User Manual To restore adapted measurement parameters the following parameters are saved on exiting and are restored on re entering this measurement e Reference level and reference level offset e RBW VBW e Sweep time RF Measurements e Span 6 3 6 CCDF The CCDF measurement determines the distribution of the signal amplitudes comple mentary cumulative distribution function The CCDF and the Crest factor are dis played For the purposes of this measurement a signal section of user definable length is recorded continuously in zero span and the distribution of the signal ampli tudes is evaluated The measurement is useful to determine errors of linear amplifiers The crest factor is d
110. AUTO State This command turns automatic selection of the electronic attenuation on and off If on electronic attenuation reduces the mechanical attenuation whenever possible This command requires the electronic attenuation hardware option It is not available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is active 11 5 4 Configuring Code Domain Analysis Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example INP EATT AUTO OFF Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 87 INPut EATT STATe lt State gt This command turns the electronic attenuator on and off This command requires the electronic attenuation hardware option It is not available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is active Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INP EATT STAT ON Switches the electronic attenuator into the signal path Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 87 Configuring Triggered Measurements The following commands are required to configure a triggered measurement in a remote environment The tasks for manual operation are described in chapter 6 2 6 Trigger Settings on page 91 The OPC command should be used after commands that retrieve data so that subse quent commands to change the selected trigger source are held off until after the sweep is completed and the data has been returned 11 5 4 1 e Configuring the Triggering Conditions
111. All bits that are part of inactive channels are marked as being invalid using dashes 3 Bitstream Table Ty ne PES Fig 3 1 Bitstream result display in the BTS application To select a specific symbol press the MKR key If you enter a number the marker jumps to the selected symbol If there are more symbols than the screen is capable of displaying use the marker to scroll inside the list The number of symbols per slot depends on the spreading factor symbol rate and the antenna diversity The number of bits per symbol depends on the modulation type For details see chapter A 2 Channel Type Characteristics on page 273 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH BITS see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 220 BTS Channel Results In the BTS application the result summary is divided into two different evaluations e Channel and code specific results e General results for the set and slot see General Results BTS application only on page 26 The Channel Results show the data of various measurements in numerical form for a specific channel User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 21 R amp S9FSW 84 K85 Measurements and Result Displays 2 Result Summary Channel Results T Code Results 0 0 Fig 3 2 Channel results summary For details on the individual parameters see chapter 3 1 1 Code Domain Parame ters on page 16 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH CRES see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 220 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer
112. BOX Digital Inter face Module R amp SGDiglConf Software Operating Manual Note If you close the R amp S DiglConf window using the Close icon the window is minimized not closed If you select the File gt Exit menu item in the R amp S DiglConf window the application is closed Note that in this case the settings are lost and the EX IQ BOX functionality is no longer available until you restart the application using the DiglConf softkey in the R amp S FSW once again Analog Baseband Input Settings The following settings and functions are available to provide input via the optional Ana log Baseband Interface in the applications that support it They can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key in the Input dialog box Radio Frequency 0 Input Settings Digital IQ 1 Q Mode Input Config Analog Baseband E GK A High Accuracy Timing Trigger Baseband RF IQ File Signal Path Analog I jQ For more information on the optional Analog Baseband Interface see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Code Domain Analysis If Analog Baseband input is used measurements in the frequency and time domain are not available Analog Baseband Input Gtate cn nnnrnnnnnn cnn rca 76 Heike 76 PUES en e UE DEE 76 High Accuracy Timing Trigger Baseband HE 77 Center E UE 77 Analog Baseband Input State Enables or disable the use of the Analog Baseband input source for measurements Analog Baseband is o
113. BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the ENABle part of a register The ENABle part allows true conditions in the EVENt part of the status register to be reported in the summary bit If a bit is 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit transitions to true a positive transition will occur in the summary bit reported to the next higher level Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel STATus QUEStionable SYNC NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the Negative TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 1 to O transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel STATus QUEStionable SYNC PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt These commands control the Positive TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 0 to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVEN
114. CDP CBSTReam CDBits Composite Bitstream MS mode with subtype 2 or 3 only XTIM CDP COMP CONSt CDConst Composite Data Constellation MS mode with subtype 2 or 3 only XPOW CDEPower CDEPower Code Domain Error Power XTIM CDP COMP EVM CDEVm Composite EVM XPOW CDP RATio CDPower Code Domain Power XTIM CDP MACCuracy CEVM Composite EVM XTIM CDP ERR CTABle CTABle Channel Table XTIM CDP PVCHip PCHip Power vs Chip BTS mode only PHSLot Power vs Halfslot MS mode only XTIM CDP ERR PCDomain PCDerror Peak Code Domain Error XTIM CDP PVSYmbol PSYMbol Power vs Symbol XTIM CDP ERR SUMMary RSUMmary Result Summary CRESults Channel Results BTS mode only GRESults General Results BTS mode only XPOW CDP RATio SCONSt Symbol Constellation XTIM CDP SYMB EVM SEVM Symbol EVM Commands for Compatibility CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime LIST STATe lt State gt Opens a new window to display a list evaluation Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the LAYout commands for new remote control programs see chapter 11 7 2 Working with Win dows in the Display on page 220 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF SENSe CDPower LEVel ADJust This command adjusts the reference level to the measured channel power This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without
115. Channel Tables nennen nnne 203 General Channel Detection and Channel Table Management The following commands configure how channels are detected and channel tables are managed CONFigure CDPower BTSECTABlIe DATalog eiit t ett tnter ad 200 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle COPY coco noria 201 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DELete crocororoorccorosancnanarandnana nan tann rn dn Rua dean 202 CONFioure CDbower BITGlCTAblebtztore nn 202 CONFigure CDP ower BTS C TABIE SELEC EE 202 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABIe STATe 2211 iron as 202 SENSe CDPower eng D 203 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle CATalog This command reads out the names of all channel tables stored on the instrument The first two result values are global values for all channel tables the subsequent values are listed for each individual table Return values lt TotalSize gt Sum of file sizes of all channel table files in bytes lt FreeMem gt Available memory left on hard disk in bytes lt FileName gt File name of individual channel table file lt FileSize gt File size of individual channel table file in bytes Example Usage Manual operation Configuring Code Domain Analysis CONF CDP CTAB CAT Sample result description see table below 52853 2634403840 3GB 1 16 XML 3469 3GB 1 32 XML 5853 3GB 1 64 XML 10712 3GB 2 XML 1428 3GB 3 16 XML 3430 3GB 3 32 XML 5868 3GB 4 XML 678 3GB 5 2 XML 2554 3GB 5 4 XML 4101 3GB 5 8 XML 72
116. Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements A header contains one or more keywords separated by a colon Header and parame ters are separated by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank If there is more than one parameter for a command these are separated by a comma from one another Only the most important characteristics that you need to know when working with SCPI commands are described here For a more complete description refer to the User Manual of the R amp S FSW Remote command examples Note that some remote command examples mentioned in this general introduction may not be supported by this particular application 11 1 1 Conventions used in Descriptions Note the following conventions used in the remote command descriptions e Command usage If not specified otherwise commands can be used both for setting and for querying parameters If a command can be used for setting or querying only or if it initiates an event the usage is stated explicitely e Parameter usage If not specified otherwise a parameter can be used to set a value and it is the result of a query Parameters required only for setting are indicated as Setting parameters Parameters required only to refine a query are indicated as Query parameters Parameters that are only returned as the result of a query are indicated as Return values e Conformity Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as SCPI con firmed All com
117. Configuring Code Domain Analysis Manual operation See Trigger Source on page 92 See Free Run on page 92 See External Trigger 1 2 3 on page 92 See Digital l Q on page 93 See IF Power on page 93 TRIGger SEQuence TIME RINTerval Interval This command defines the repetition interval for the time trigger Parameters Interval 2 0 ms to 5000 Range 2ms to 5000 s RST 1 0s Example TRIG SOUR TIME Selects the time trigger input for triggering TRIG TIME RINT 50 The measurement starts every 50 s Configuring the Trigger Output The following commands are required to send the trigger signal to one of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors OU TPutctRIGSersport RE DE 195 OUTPut TRIGger port L E Vel eio iu ct enero er ex dnx 196 OUTPubt TRIGgerspor OT YPQguu cere nr ctun eroe E pee ld ee unus dee 196 OUTbutTRlGoerzportz PULL SelMMedlate nennen nennen 196 Rene e PULSE E 197 This command selects the trigger direction for trigger ports that serve as an input as well as an output Suffix lt port gt Selects the used trigger port 2 trigger port 2 front panel 3 trigger port 3 rear panel Parameters lt Direction gt INPut Port works as an input OUTPut Port works as an output RST INPut Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 79 Configuring Code Domain Analysis OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel lt Level gt This command defines the level of
118. Ction Nothing is started on pressing the micro button RST RSINgle Manual operation See Microbutton Action on page 78 SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup NAME Queries the name of the probe Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Return values lt Name gt Name string Usage Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup STATe Queries if the probe at the specified connector is active detected or not active not detected To switch the probe on i e activate input from the connector use INP SEL AIQ see INPut SELect on page 168 Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Return values lt State gt DETected NDETected RST NDETected 11 5 2 5 11 5 3 Configuring Code Domain Analysis Usage Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup TYPE Queries the type of the probe Suffix lt p gt 1 2 3 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Return values lt Type gt String containing one of the following values None no probe detected active differential active single ended
119. DO RF measurements Bandclass SCPI para Description 0 0 800 MHz Cellular Band 1 1 1 9 GHz PCS Band 2 2 TACS Band 3A 3 JTACS Band 2832 MHz and x 834 MHz 2838 MHz and lt 846 MHz 2860 MHz and x 895 MHz 3B 21 JTACS Band 2810 MHz and lt 860 MHz except 2832 MHz and x 834 MHz 2838 MHz and x 846 MHz 3C 22 JTACS Band lt 810 MHz and gt 895 MHz 4 4 Korean PCS Band 5 5 450 MHz NMT Band 6 6 2 GHz IMT 2000 Band 7 7 700 MHz Band 8 8 1800 MHz Band 9 9 900 MHz Band 10 10 Secondary 800 MHz 11 11 400 MHz European PAMR Band 12 12 800 MHz PAMR Band 13 13 2 5 GHz IMT 2000 Extension Band 14 14 US PCS 1 9 GHz Band 15 15 AWS Band 16 16 US 2 5 GHz Band 17 17 US 2 5 GHz Forward Link Only Band AA VQ Data File Format iq tar UO data is packed in a file with the extension iq tar An iq tar file contains UO data in binary format together with meta information that describes the nature and the Q Data File Format iq tar source of data e g the sample rate The objective of the iq tar file format is to separate UO data from the meta information while still having both inside one file In addition the file format allows you to preview the UO data in a web browser and allows you to include user specific data The iq tar container packs several files into a single tar archive file Files in tar format can be unpacked using standard archive tools see http en wikip
120. DP CTAB NAME NEW TAB Selects channel table for editing If a channel table with this name does not exist a new channel table is created CONF CDP CTAB DATA 0 6 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 10 5 3 4 0 0 1 0 0 Defines a table with the following channels PICH 0 64 and data channel with RC4 Walsh code 3 32 Configuring Code Domain Analysis Manual operation See Channel Type on page 104 See Channel Number Walsh Ch SF on page 104 See Modulation on page 104 See Power on page 104 See Status on page 104 See Modulation on page 106 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA lt ChannelType gt lt CodeClass gt lt CodeNumber gt lt Mapping gt lt Activity gt lt Reserved1 gt lt Status gt lt Reserved2 gt This command defines a channel table The following description applies to EVDO MS mode K85 only For BTS mode see CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 203 Before using this command you must set the name of the channel table using the CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SELect on page 202 command For a detailed description of the parameters refer to chapter 3 1 1 Code Domain Parameters on page 16 Parameters lt ChannelType gt The channel type is numerically coded as follows 0 PICH 1 RRI 2 DATA 3 ACK 4 DRC 5 INACTIVE lt CodeClass gt 2104 lt CodeNumber gt 0 15 lt Mapping gt 0 branch 1 Q branch lt Activity gt 0 65535 decimal The decimal number interpreted as a binary numb
121. E NEW TAB Manual operation See Creating a New Table on page 101 See Name on page 102 11 5 8 Sweep Settings SENSE AVERAGE SAA COUNT cuina dice hacer e s 206 SENSE IS WESP COUNE caves cnasinacatssiavessvadasaeud Re er cde c td e edd de tb vedi 207 SENSe AVERage lt n gt COUNt lt AverageCount gt This command defines the number of sweeps that the application uses to average traces for all windows lt n gt is irrelevant In case of continuous sweeps the application calculates the moving average over the average count In case of single sweep measurements the application stops the measurement and calculates the average after the average count has been reached Parameters lt AverageCount gt Usage Manual operation Configuring Code Domain Analysis If you set a average count of 0 or 1 the application performs one single sweep in single sweep mode In continuous sweep mode if the average count is set to 0 a moving average over 10 sweeps is performed Range 0 to 200000 RST 0 SCPI confirmed See Sweep Average Count on page 106 SENSe SWEep COUNt lt SweepCount gt This command defines the number of measurements that the application uses to aver age traces In case of continuous measurement mode the application calculates the moving aver age over the average count In case of single measurement mode the application stops the measurement and cal culates the average after
122. E or CALC LIM PVT REF MAN see CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt PVTime REFerence on page 216 Parameters lt RefLevel gt Reference level in dBm Range 200 to 200 RST 20dBm Default unit dBm Example CALC LIM PVT REF MAN Manual reference value for limit lines CALC LIM PVTime RVAL 33 5 Set manual reference value to 33 5 Manual operation See Reference Manual on page 113 CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime BURSt CENTer State This command activates an automatic burst alignment to the center of the diagram Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Burst Fit on page 113 CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime FREStart State If switched on this command evaluates the limit line over all results at the end of a sin gle sweep The sweep is restarted if this result is FAILED 11 6 2 Configuring RF Measurements Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CONF CDP PVT FRES ON Restarts a single sweep if the result evaluation is failed Manual operation See Restart on Fail on page 113 CONFigure CDPower BTS RFSLot Slot Defines the expected signal The limit lines and the borders for calculating the mean power are set accordingly Parameters Slot FULL IDLE FULL Full slot signal The lower and upper limit line are called PVTFL PVTFU IDLE Idle slot signal The lower and upper limit line are called PVTIL PVTIU RS
123. ED o E 172 eg ue leede 172 OUTPUEMRIGGEr lt pOn DIRCCUON m 195 OUTPut TRIGgersport l EVel n trt Re erre nre tne eap Ee RARE 196 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTY PE i oreet ren trt either rere rero ta e e X HF SU aere eroi te rr Rao ries 196 OUTPut TRIGgersport PULSe IMMed ale on tirer roce ear gereret mettre pasa 196 OUTPut TRIGgersport PULSe EENGILh nre tror rere AAA tere T Enea 197 S TAT s QUEStionable DIQ CONDITION a reri ioa pere toc te ad 175 STATus QUEStionable DIO ENABIG 7 remos i etant pest E i verno uin ettet EP Re ne sese deer STATus QUEStionable DIQ NTRansition STATus QUEStionable DIQ PTRansition STATusOUEGtonabie DIOTEMENU enne E RaR Ee EEEE nnne retener 176 STATusS QUEStionable S YNC CONDIION KEE 266 STATus QUEStionable SYNC ENABle STATus QUEStionable SYNC NTRansition STATus QUEStionable SYNC PTRansition STATUs QUEStionable SYNGEEVENE sive irn tri netter esee yer Yee Ra rre peer EE eene 266 SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXE UtE eene etre EE EEEren ensis 159 VO TEM SEQUENCE EE 232 Ee EE NEE 238 TRIGger SEQuence BBPower HOLDoff s TRIGger SEQuence D Mesire i rtt rn tnter ener ee rt ea cies TRIGger SEQueticer HOLDOFfI TIME 2 casan rre ep EENS TRIGger SEQuerice IFPower HOLDBDJolF iuret tr trente re rtp ren ne npn rrr ein TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis
124. Frequency on page 67 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer ROFF lt RollOffFactor gt This command sets the roll off factor for the RRC filter Parameters RollOffFactor Range 0 01 to 0 99 RST 0 02 Configuring Code Domain Analysis Example CONF CDP MCAR ON Activates multicarrier mode CONF CDP MCAR FILT ON Activates an additional filter for multicarrier measurements CONF CDP MCAR FILT TYPE RRC Activates the RRC filter CONF CDP MCAR FILT ROFF 0 05 Sets the roll off factor to 0 05 Manual operation See Roll Off Factor on page 67 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer STATe State This command activates or deactivates the usage of a filter for multicarrier measure ments Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CONF CDP MCAR ON Activates multicarrier mode CONF CDP MCAR FILT OFF Activates an additional filter for multicarrier measurements Manual operation See Multicarrier Filter on page 67 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer TYPE Type This command sets the filter type to be used in multicarrier mode You can set the parameters for the RRC filter with the CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer COFRequency and CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer ROFF commands Parameters Type LPASs RCC RST LPAS Example CONF CDP MCAR ON Activates multicarrier mode CONF CDP MCAR FILT ON Activates an additional fil
125. GSM R amp S FSW K10 GSM GSM Multi Carrier Group Delay R amp S FSW K17 MCGD MC Group Delay Amplifier Measurements R amp S FSW K18 AMPLifier Amplifier Noise R amp S FSW K30 NOISE Noise Phase Noise R amp S FSW K40 PNOISE Phase Noise Transient Analysis R amp S FSW K60 TA Transient Analysis VSA R amp S FSW K70 DDEM VSA 3GPP FDD BTS R amp S FSW K72 BWCD 3G FDD BTS 3GPP FDD UE R amp S FSW K73 MWCD 3G FDD UE TD SCDMA BTS R amp S FSW K76 BTDS TD SCDMA BTS TD SCDMA UE R amp S FSW K77 MTDS TD SCDMA UE cdma2000 BTS R amp S FSW K82 BC2K CDMA2000 BTS cdma2000 MS R amp S FSW K83 MC2K CDMA2000 MS 1xEV DO BTS R amp S FSW K84 BDO 1xEV DO BTS 1xEV DO MS R amp S FSW K85 MDO 1xEV DO MS WLAN R amp S FSW K91 WLAN WLAN LTE R amp S FSW K10x LTE LTE Real Time Spectrum R amp S FSW B160R RTIM Real Time Spectrum K160RE DOCSIS 3 1 R amp S FSW K192 DOCSis DOCSIS 3 1 Note the default channel name is also listed in the table If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel 11 4 Selecting a Measurement INSTrument REName lt ChannelName1 gt lt ChannelName2 gt This command renames a measurement channel Parameters lt ChannelName1 gt String containing the name of the channel you want to rename lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the new channel name Note that you can not assign an existing channel name to a
126. ILOT The PILOT channel type comprises 96 chips and is located in the center of each half slot It must be available in the signal for the base station signal to be detected In the PILOT channel type only the 0 32 channel on the branch is active With spreading factor 32 the BPSK I and hypothetically BPSK Q modula tion are used Hypothetically because no signal should exist on the Q branch e MAC The Medium Access Control channel type is 64 chips in front of and behind the PILOT The MAC channel type contains the reverse activity RA channel and the MAC reverse power control RPC channels with which the power of the active terminals is controlled The MAC indices described in the standard MAC can be transformed into Walsh codes very easily The analysis for the MAC channel type is performed with spreading factor 64 BPSK I and BPSK Q modulation are used e DATA The DATA channel type is located with a length of up to 400 chips at the beginning and end of each half slot The useful data is transmitted in it As shown in figure 4 1 there are packets that transmit their data distributed over 1 2 4 8 or 16 slots depending on the transmission rate Initially a PREAMBLE range is trans mitted being between 64 and 1024 chips long followed by the data If more than one slot is required for transmission the other data of this data packet follows at intervals of four slots then without another preamble In the DATA channel type QPSK 8 PSK an
127. MAC and the spreading factor number of orthogonal codes doubles for channel types MAC and PREAMBLE In subtype 2 the following modulation types are added within some of the MAC chan nels in the BTS application e ON OFF keying ACK on the branch OOKA I e ON OFF keying ACK on the Q branch OOKA Q e ON OFF keying NACK on the branch OOKN I e ON OFF keying NACK on the Q branch OOKN Q If the 2 bits within an ON OFF keying modulation are identical the modulation cannot be recognized as an ON OFF keying modulation If both bits contain 1 ON the modu lation is identical to a BPSK and is recognized as BPSK If both bits contain 0 OFF there is no power within that code and slot and therefore no modulation is detected If the evaluation is set to MAPPING COMPLEX the separate and Q branch detection within the result summary is no longer selected and the modulation type is a 2BPSK with the coding number 5 via remote In the MS application as of subtype 2 the new modulation types B4 Q4 Q2 Q4Q2 and E4E2 are supported Multicarrier Mode In both R amp S FSW 1xEV DO applications a special multicarrier mode is available see below and channels using the new modulation types can be detected As of subtype 3 the additional modulation type 64QAM can be used For BTS signals the MAC RA channel occupies a variable code number and the preamble occupies the l and the Q branch 4 6 Multicarrier Mode The 1xEV DO application
128. MGeaS uiua Lies A AA 213 SENSe CDPower AVERage State If enabled the CDP is calculated over all slots and displayed as required by the 1xEV DO standard This command is only available for Code Domain Power evaluations Parameters State ON OFF RST 0 Example CDP AVER ON Activate averaging CDP relative over all slots Configuring Code Domain Analysis Manual operation See CDP Average on page 119 SENSe CDPower NORMalize lt State gt If enabled the UO offset is eliminated from the measured signal This is useful to deduct a DC offset to the baseband caused by the DUT thus improving the EVM Note however that for EVM measurements according to standard compensation must be disabled Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example SENS CDP NORM ON Activates the elimination of the l Q offset Manual operation See Compensate IQ Offset on page 119 SENSe CDPower OPERation lt Mode gt The operation mode is used for the channel search Parameters lt Mode gt ACCess TRAFfic ACCess Only PICH always available and DATA channels can exist TRAFfic All channels PICH RRI DATA ACK and DRC can exist PICH and RRI are always in the signal RST TRAFfic For further details refer to Operating Modes Access and Traf fic on page 49 Example CDP ORD HAD Sets Hadamard order TRAC TRACE2 Reads out the results in Hadamard order CDP ORD BITR Sets BitReverse order TRAC TR
129. MUM nennen 185 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MINimum DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe PDlVision esses 185 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel essent nennen 186 DilSblavtWiN ow nzTRACectGTSCALelbRlEvVelOEtF Get 186 DISPlayEWINDow lt h gt TRACe lt t gt ESTATEL cion at 254 BISPlay WINDowsn ZOOM AREA cui atn etre aaa 226 DlSblavfWiNDow nzZOOMMUL Tiple zo0omz AREA nennen rennen eee nerenr enne 227 DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom STATe seen enne nennen 228 BUER TR E Ree EN RE 227 FORMaEDEXPort D SEP TE 248 FORMat DA HE INITiate lt n gt CONMeas INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous INITiatesn gt REF EE INITiate lt n gt SEQuencerABORt EE 231 INlTlate nz GEOuencer IMMecdlate AAA 231 INITiate ns SEQuencer MODE ngasin a Aa Aia ca erp uds 231 INiTiate n gt SEQuenc r REFRESNEALL oia eI nta eerte hr teens 232 INITiate lt n gt IMMediate INPUEAT TORU e TEE INPUEAT Fenuation AU TO DH 188 INbPutATTenuattonPhROTechonhRtzet AAA 165 Jl ele e Ee ll Diere PING E Ier lee RI INPut DIQ RANGe COUPIling INPUtiDIO RANGe UPP ET E INPut DIO RANGe UPPer AUTO sscsccencescacessssesctsssnconecebseosenceserncancessensoedeeaevsnsanestsausedsaneencendateonsarsarnerneeoes 170 INP t DIO RANGe UPPed UNIT mucosas as 171 INPut DIQ SRATe sss INPut DIQ SRATe AUTO INPUEDP A Thornton eebe ege INPUT EAT WEE
130. Max Inactive IPMMax Maximum power level in inactive MAC channels relative to the Power MAC absolute power of the MAC channel in dB This is the highest value from the l and Q branch of the inactive MAC channels Max Power Data PDMax Maximum power level in Data channel This is the highest value of the and Q branch of the Data channel Min Power Data PDMin Minimum power level in Data channel This is the lowest value of the and Q branch of the Data channel Peak CDE PCDerror Peak code domain error in dB Power Data PDATa Power in the Data channel in dBm Power MAC PMAC Power in the MAC channel in dBm Power Pilot PPILot Power of the pilot channel in dBm PPICh BTS application power of the PICH channel Power Preamble PPReamble Power in the PREAMBLE channel in dBm Preamable Length PLENgth Length of preamble in chips RHO RHO Quality parameter RHO According to the 1xEV DO standard RHO is the normalized correlated power between the measured and the ideal reference signal When RHO is measured the 1xEV DO standard requires that only the pilot channel be supplied RRI Power PRRI Power of the RRI channel in dBm Slot SLOT Slot number Total Power PTOTal Total power of the signal in dBm Channel Parameters The following parameters refer to a specific channel Table 3 3 Channel specific parameters Parameter SCPI Parame Description ter Channel Pwr Rel CDPRelative Relative
131. Measurements and Result Displays MultiView 33 Spectrum 1xEV DO BTS Reference Level Ref Level 0 0 RBW 10kHz 0 dBm Att dB SWT 100m VBW 300kHz Mode Auto Swee 1 1001 pts 200 0 kHz Span 2 0 MHz CDMA 2000 Bandwidth Offset Power M 10 55 dBm 10 55 dBm Fig 3 22 Power measurement results in the 1xEV DO BTS application Remote command CONF CDP MEAS POW see CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 160 Querying results CALC MARK FUNC POW RES CPOW see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer lt sb gt RESult on page 250 CALC MARK FUNC POW RES ACP see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer lt sb gt RESul1t on page 250 Channel Power ACLR Channel Power ACLR performs an adjacent channel power measurement in the default setting according to 1xEV DO specifications adjacent channel leakage ratio The R amp S FSW measures the channel power and the relative power of the adjacent channels and of the alternate channels The results are displayed in the Result Sum mary User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 37 R amp S9FSW 84 K85 Measurements and Result Displays HP P P enmsi Teem ex MultiView 33 Spectrum 1xEV DO BTS RBW 10kHz 10dB SWT 100 ms VBW 300 kHz Mode Auto Sweep CF 878 608453352 MHz 1001 pts 419 0 kHz Span 4 19 MHz 2 Result Summary CDMA 2000 Channel Bandwidth Offse
132. NDow on page 220 CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 234 EECH User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 31 R amp S9FSW 84 K85 Measurements and Result Displays EH Result Summary MS application only The Result Summary evaluation displays a list of measurement results on the screen For details on the displayed values see chapter 3 1 1 Code Domain Parameters on page 16 Note BTS application In the BTS application the result summary is divided into two different evaluations e Channel and code specific results see BTS Channel Results on page 21 e General results for the set and slot see General Results BTS application only on page 26 The Result Summary shows the data of various measurements in numerical form for all channels 2 Result Summary General Results Set OXT Slot Results Half Slot 0 Channel Results Fig 3 16 Result Summary display in the MS application The Result Summary is divided into three parts e General results for the selected set e Slot results for the selected half slot e Channel results for the selected channel Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH RSUMmary see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 220 CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 234 Symbol Constellation The Symbol Constellation evaluation shows all modulated symbols of t
133. Name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Windowlndex numeric value Index of the window Example LAY CAT Result 25 2 1 1 Two windows are displayed named 2 at the top or left and 1 at the bottom or right Usage Query only Configuring the Result Display LAYout IDENtify WINDow lt WindowName gt This command queries the index of a particular display window in the active measure ment channel Note to query the name of a particular window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify query Query parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window Return values Windowlndex Index number of the window Usage Query only LAYout REMove WINDow lt WindowName gt This command removes a window from the display in the active measurement channel Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Usage Event LAYout REPLace WINDow lt WindowName gt lt WindowType gt This command replaces the window type for example from Diagram to Result Sum mary of an already existing window in the active measurement channel while keeping its position index and window name To add a new window use the LAYout ADD WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window By default the name of a window is the sa
134. ON OFF RST OFF Example OUTP DIQ ON Manual operation See Digital Baseband Output on page 81 OUTPut DIQ CDEVice This command queries the current configuration and the status of the digital UO data output to the optional Digital Baseband Interface Return values lt ConnState gt Defines whether a device is connected or not 0 No device is connected 1 A device is connected lt DeviceName gt Device ID of the connected device lt SerialNumber gt Serial number of the connected device lt PortName gt Port name used by the connected device lt NotUsed gt to be ignored lt MaxTransferRate gt Maximum data transfer rate of the connected device in Hz Configuring Code Domain Analysis lt ConnProtState gt State of the connection protocol which is used to identify the connected device Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done lt PRBSTestState gt State of the PRBS test lt NotUsed gt lt Placeholde Example Manual ope STATus QU This register This register Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done to be ignored r gt for future use currently 0 OUTP DIQ CDEV Result 1 SMW200A 101190 CODER 1 IN 0 200000000 Passed Done 0 0 ration See Output Settings Information on page 82 See Connected Instrument on page 82 EStionable DIQ Register contains information about the state of the digital UO input and output is used by the op
135. ON Differential OFF Single ended RST ON Example INP 1Q BAL OFF Manual operation See Input Configuration on page 76 INPut IQ FULLscale AUTO State This command defines whether the full scale level i e the maximum input power on the Baseband Input connector is defined automatically according to the reference level or manually Parameters State ON Automatic definition OFF Manual definition according to INPut 10 FULLscale LEVel on page 177 RST ON Example INP IQ FULL AUTO OFF Manual operation See Full Scale Level Mode Value on page 89 INPut IQ FULLscale LEVel lt PeakVoltage gt This command defines the peak voltage at the Baseband Input connector if the full scale level is set to manual mode see 1NPut 10 FULLscale AUTO on page 177 Parameters lt PeakVoltage gt 0 25V 0 5V 1V 2V Peak voltage level at the connector For probes the possible full scale values are adapted according to the probe s attenuation and maximum allowed power RST 1V Example INP IQ FULL 0 5V Manual operation See Full Scale Level Mode Value on page 89 Configuring Code Domain Analysis INPut IQ TYPE lt DataType gt This command defines the format of the input signal Parameters lt DataType gt Example Manual operation IQ I Q IO The input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application Two input channels are required for each input signal one for the in phase co
136. Order Defines the sorting of the channels for the Code Domain Power and Code Domain Error result displays For further details on the code order refer to chapter 4 8 Code Display and Sort Order on page 53 Hadamard By default the codes are sorted in Hadamard order i e in ascending order The power of each code is displayed there is no visible distinction between channels If a channel covers several codes the display shows the individual power of each code Bit Reverse Bundles the channels with concentrated codes e all codes of a channel are next to one another Thus you can see the total power of a concentrated channel Remote command SENSe CDPower ORDer on page 211 Code Domain Analysis Settings MS application Compensate IQ Offset If enabled the UO offset is eliminated from the measured signal This is useful to deduct a DC offset to the baseband caused by the DUT thus improving the EVM Note however that for EVM measurements according to standard compensation must be disabled Remote command SENSe CDPower NORMalize on page 211 Timing and phase offset calculation Activates or deactivates the timing and phase offset calculation of the channels to the pilot channel If deactivated or if more than 50 active channels are in the signal the calculation does not take place and dashes are displayed instead of values as results Remote command SENSe CDPower TPMeas on page 213 Operation
137. Pe on page 196 Level Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 196 Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth on page 197 Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 3 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate on page 196 Digital UO Output Settings The optional Digital Baseband Interface allows you to output l Q data from any R amp S FSW application that processes UO data to an external device The configuration settings for digital UO output can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key or in the Outputs dialog box R amp S FSW 84 K85 Configuration These settings are only available if the Digital Baseband Interface option is installed on the R amp S FSW As of firmware version 2 10 digital UO output is also available with bandwidth ext
138. R amp SSFSW 84 K85 1xEV DO Measurements User Manual le Walsh K Ksps Mod Power Channel Type SymRate PILOT d8m SlotResults SE A er Pilot 1173 9340 02 13 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Test amp Measurement User Manual This manual applies to the following R amp S FSW models with firmware version 2 20 and higher R8SP FSW8 1312 8000K08 e R amp S FSW13 1312 8000K13 e R amp S FSW26 1312 8000K26 e R amp S FSW43 1312 8000K43 e R amp S FSW50 1312 8000K50 e R amp S FSW67 1312 8000K67 a sa The following firmware options are described e R amp S FSW K84 1313 1480 02 e R amp S FSW K85 1313 1497 02 The firmware of the instrument makes use of several valuable open source software packages For information see the Open Source Acknowledgement on the user documentation CD ROM included in delivery Rohde amp Schwarz would like to thank the open source community for their valuable contribution to embedded computing 2015 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Muhldorfstr 15 81671 Munchen Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual R amp S9FSW is ab
139. SEQuence LEVel IFPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level at the third intermediate frequency that must be exceeded to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed If defined a reference level offset is also considered For compatibility reasons this command is also available for the baseband power trigger source when using the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet RST 10 dBm Example TRIG LEV IFP 30DBM TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the magnitude the I Q data must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 130 dBm to 30 dBm RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV Top 30DBM Configuring Code Domain Analysis TRIGger SEQuence LEVel RFPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level the RF input must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed If defined a reference level offset is also considered The input signal must be between 500 MHz and 8 GHz Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt For details on available trigger levels
140. Select the Display Config button in the configuration Overview e Select the Display Config softkey from the MEAS CONFIG menu The selected evaluation not only affects the result display but also the results of the trace data query see chapter 11 9 3 Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt on page 239 The Code Domain Analyzer provides the following evaluation methods for measure ments in the code domain Mr E 21 BTS Channel RESULT EE 21 Ghannel EC 22 Code Domain Power Code Domain Error POWeED cccccsceeeceeetseeeeeeeteeceeeenseanees 22 Composite ConstellatOn lt osa ER ne n eene ERE ene ne x EAEE 24 Composite Data Bitstream MS application only 24 Composite Data Constellation MS application onhy esee 25 leones 26 General Results BTS application only inrer nnne nnns 26 Mag Error vs o 27 Peak Code Domain EE 28 Phase Enor vs EE 29 Power vs Chip BTS application oh 30 Power vs Flalislot MS application only nett reb tn rette 30 Power vs Symbol ctione cedere Dur ere pe d ud 31 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurements and Result Displays Result Summary MS application only cicer nrc x neto re etes 32 Symbol ne O ona TAN 32 viuere zo A EE E S E E dote 33 SMDL Ee ue EE 34 Symbol PHASE EE 34 Bitstream The Bitstream evaluation displays the demodulated bits of a selected channel over a selected slot
141. Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Reference Level Automatically determines the optimal reference level for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier for analog baseband input the full scale level are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal compression clipping and overload conditions are minimized To determine the optimal reference level a level measurement is performed on the R amp S FSW You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 109 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 210 Full Scale Level Mode Value The full scale level defines the maximum power you can input at the Baseband Input connector without clipping the signal The full scale level can be defined automatically according to the reference level or manually For manual input the following values can be selected e 025V e 05V e 1V Code Domain Analysis e 2V If probes are connected the possible full scale values are adapted according to the probe s attenuation and maximum allowed power For details on probes see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and l Q Input User Manual Remote command INPut IQ FULLscale AUTO on page 177 INPut IQ FULLscale LEVel on page 177 6 2 5 4 Y Axis Scaling The vertical axis scaling is configurable In C
142. T FULL Example CONF CDP RFSL FULL Use limit line for FULL slot and connect FULL slot signal Manual operation See RF Slot on page 112 1xEV DO SEM and ACLR Measurements CONFigure CDPower BTS BCLass BANDoGClass ceeeceseeeeeeeeee nennen nnn diia 218 CONFigure CDPower BTS BCLass BANDclass lt Bandclass gt This command selects the bandclass for the measurement The bandclass defines the frequency band used for ACLR and SEM measurements It also determines the corre sponding limits and ACLR channel settings according to the 1xEV DO standard Parameters lt Bandclass gt For an overview of available bandclasses and the corresponding parameter values see chapter A 3 Reference Supported Bandclasses on page 274 RST 0 Example CONF CDP BCL 1 Selects band class 1 1900 MHz Manual operation See Bandclass on page 115 Configuring the Result Display 11 7 Configuring the Result Display The following commands are required to configure the screen display in a remote envi ronment The tasks for manual operation are described in chapter 6 1 Result Dis play on page 61 e General Window GCotmmarids re ree tree ene tene eant re nean 219 e Working with Windows in the Display 220 e Zoonming into the DISplay 2 m REOR GERI ER Rede SER Re Dac REP REI ERRN 226 11 7 1 General Window Commands The following commands are required to configure general window layout independent of the
143. T on page 107 INITiate lt n gt IMMediate This command starts a single new measurement You can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Usage Event Manual operation See Single Sweep RUN SINGLE on page 107 Starting a Measurement INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer ABORt This command stops the currently active sequence of measurements The Sequencer itself is not deactivated so you can start a new sequence immediately using INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate on page 231 To deactivate the Sequencer use SYSTem SEQuencer on page 232 Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Usage Event INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate This command starts a new sequence of measurements by the Sequencer Its effect is similar to the INITiate lt n gt IMMediate command used for a single measurement Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuencer on page 232 Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements Usage Event INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer MODE lt Mode gt This command selects the way the R amp S FSW application performs measurements seq
144. TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe lt DropoutTime gt Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before a trigger is detected again For input from the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 using the baseband power trigger BBP the default drop out time is set to 100 ns to avoid unintentional trigger events as no hysteresis can be configured in this case Parameters lt DropoutTime gt Dropout time of the trigger Range Osto10 0s RST Os Manual operation See Drop Out Time on page 94 TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME lt Offset gt Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the measurement Parameters Offset RST 0s Example TRIG HOLD 500us Manual operation See Trigger Offset on page 94 Configuring Code Domain Analysis TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff lt Period gt This command defines the holding time before the next trigger event Note that this command can be used for any trigger source not just IF Power despite the legacy keyword Note If you perform gated measurements in combination with the IF Power trigger the R amp S FSW ignores the holding time for frequency sweep FFT sweep zero span and UO data measurements Parameters lt Period gt Range Os to 10s RST Os Example TRIG SOUR EXT Sets an external trigger source TRIG IFP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns Manual operation See Trigger Holdoff on page 95 TRIGg
145. The command works only if the overload condition has been eliminated first Usage Event INPut CONNector lt ConnType gt Determines whether the RF input data is taken from the RF input connector or the optional Analog Baseband connector This command is only available if the Analog Baseband interface R amp S FSW B71 is installed and active for input It is not available for the R amp S FSW67 For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Configuring Code Domain Analysis Parameters lt ConnType gt RF RF input connector AIQI Analog Baseband connector RST RF Example INP CONN AIQI Selects the analog baseband input Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Input Connector on page 73 INPut COUPling lt CouplingType gt This command selects the coupling type of the RF input The command is not available for measurements with the optional Digital Baseband Interface Parameters lt CouplingType gt AC AC coupling DC DC coupling RST AC Example INP COUP DC Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Input Coupling on page 71 INPut DPATh lt State gt Enables or disables the use of the direct path for frequencies close to O Hz Parameters lt State gt AUTO 1 Default the direct path is used automatically for frequencies close to 0 Hz OFF 0 The analog mixer path is always used RST 1 Example INP
146. ailable if this option is instal led Information on the STATus QUEStionable DIO register can be found in STA Tus QUEStionable DIQ Register on page 173 e Configuring Digital UO Input and Output 169 SIATus QUEStOonable e e Ne 173 Configuring Code Domain Analysis Configuring Digital UO Input and Output Remote commands for the R amp S DiglConf software Remote commands for the R amp S DiglConf software always begin with SOURce EBOX Such commands are passed on from the R amp S FSW to the R amp S DiglConf automatically which then configures the R amp S EX IQ BOX via the USB connection All remote commands available for configuration via the R amp S DiglConf software are described in the R amp SGEX IQ BOX Digital Interface Module R amp SGDiglConf Software Operating Manual Example 1 SOURce EBOX RST SOURce EBOX IDN Result Rohde amp Schwarz DiglConf 02 05 436 Build 47 Example 2 SOURCe EBOX USER CLOCk REFerence FREQuency 5MHZ Defines the frequency value of the reference clock Remote commands exclusive to digital UO data input and output INPUT DIOG DEVICE E 169 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer AUTO taii ii a Aa a ias 170 eise weg Geer Be EE 171 INPUEDIO RANGET UPP EP ME 171 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer plNIT aii on aiia ea a RD 171 PU DI GQ SRA E 171 INPUEBICESRATE AUTO iriiringa aa a 172 OUTPUT AAA A E 172 OQUTPUEDIO CDEVi T a M 172
147. al To abort a sequence of measurements by the Sequencer use the INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer ABORt command Note on blocked remote control programs If a sequential command cannot be completed for example because a triggered sweep never receives a trigger the remote control program will never finish and the remote channel to the R amp S FSW is blocked for further commands In this case you must inter rupt processing on the remote channel first in order to abort the measurement To do so send a Device Clear command from the control instrument to the R amp S FSW on a parallel channel to clear all currently active remote channels Depend ing on the used interface and protocol send the following commands e Visa viClear e GPIB ibcir e RSIB RSDLLibclr Now you can send the ABORt command on the remote channel performing the mea surement Example ABOR INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and immediately starts a new one Example ABOR WAI INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and starts a new one once abortion has been completed Usage Event SCPI confirmed INITiate lt n gt CONMeas This command restarts a single measurement that has been stopped using ABORt or finished in single measurement mode The measurement is restarted at the beginning not where the previous measurement was stopped As opposed to INITiate lt n gt IMMediate this command does not reset traces in maxhold
148. all channels in all slots in a specific set User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 26 R amp S9FSW 84 K85 Measurements and Result Displays 2 Result Summary General Results Set 0 Slot Results Set 0 7 Slot 0 Fig 3 10 General results summary For details on the individual parameters see chapter 3 1 1 Code Domain Parame ters on page 16 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH GRES see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 220 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 234 Mag Error vs Chip Mag Error vs Chip activates the Magnitude Error versus chip display The magnitude error is displayed for all chips of the selected slot The magnitude error is calculated as the difference of the magnitude of the received signal to the magnitude of the reference signal The reference signal is estimated from the channel configuration of all active channels The magnitude error is related to the square root of the mean power of reference signal and given in percent kk el00 W 2560 ke 0 N 1 MAG Ce 2 x 2 a N xf where MAG magnitude error of chip number k Sk complex chip value of received signal Xk complex chip value of reference signal k index number of the evaluated chip N number of chips at each CPICH slot n index number for mean power calculation of reference signal User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 27 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurements and Result Displays
149. ams the reference level is then used as the maximum on the y axis Code Domain Analysis Since the hardware of the R amp S FSW is adapted according to this value it is recom mended that you set the reference level close above the expected maximum signal level to ensure an optimum measurement no compression good signal to noise ratio Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel on page 186 Shifting the Display Offset Reference Level Defines an arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level The scal ing of the y axis is changed accordingly Define an offset if the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the R amp S FSW so the application shows correct power results All displayed power level results will be shifted by this value The setting range is 200 dB in 0 01 dB steps Note however that the internal reference level used to adjust the hardware settings to the expected signal optimally ignores any Reference Level Offset Thus it is impor tant to keep in mind the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle and not to rely on the displayed reference level internal reference level displayed reference level offset Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 186 Unit Reference Level For CDA measurements the unit should not be changed as this would lead to useless results
150. and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV RFP 30dBm TRIGger SEQuence LEVel ViDeo lt Level gt This command defines the level the video signal must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed Parameters lt Level gt Range O PCT to 100 PCT RST 50 PCT Example TRIG LEV VID 50PCT TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe lt Type gt For external and time domain trigger sources you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Parameters lt Type gt POSitive NEGative POSitive Triggers when the signal rises to the trigger level rising edge NEGative Triggers when the signal drops to the trigger level falling edge RST POSitive Example TRIG SLOP NEG Manual operation See Slope on page 95 TRIGger SEQuence SOURce lt Source gt This command selects the trigger source Note on external triggers Configuring Code Domain Analysis If a measurement is configured to wait for an external trigger signal in a remote control program remote control is blocked until the trigger is received and the program can continue Make sure this situation is avoided in your remote control programs Parameters lt Source gt Example IMMediate Free Run EXTernal Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT connector EXT2 Trigger signal from
151. application Note that the suffix n always refers to the window in the currently selected measure ment channel see INSTrument SELect on page 159 DISPlay FORMal M M 219 DISPlay p WINDows ER E 219 DISPlay FORMat lt Format gt This command determines which tab is displayed Parameters lt Format gt SPLit Displays the MultiView tab with an overview of all active chan nels SINGle Displays the measurement channel that was previously focused RST SING Example DISP FORM SPL DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE Size This command maximizes the size of the selected result display window temporarily To change the size of several windows on the screen permanently use the LAY SPL command see LAYout SPLitter on page 223 Parameters lt Size gt LARGe Maximizes the selected window to full screen Other windows are still active in the background SMALI Reduces the size of the selected window to its original size If more than one measurement window was displayed originally these are visible again RST SMALI 11 7 2 Configuring the Result Display Example DISP WIND2 LARG Working with Windows in the Display The following commands are required to change the evaluation type and rearrange the screen layout for a measurement channel as you do using the SmartGrid in manual operation Since the available evaluation types depend on the selected application some parameters for the follow
152. applications and the MSRA Master lt n gt is irrelevant Note even if the analysis line display is off the indication whether or not the currently defined line position lies within the analysis interval of the active application remains in the window title bars Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Configuring the Application Data Range MSRA mode only CALCulate lt n gt MSRA ALINe VALue lt Position gt This command defines the position of the analysis line for all time based windows in all MSRA applications and the MSRA Master lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Position gt Position of the analysis line in seconds The position must lie within the measurement time of the MSRA measurement Default unit s CALCulate lt n gt MSRA WINDows lt n gt IVAL This command queries the analysis interval for the window specified by the WINDow suffix lt n gt the CALC suffix is irrelevant This command is only available in application measurement channels not the MSRA View or MSRA Master Return values lt IntStart gt Start value of the analysis interval in seconds Default unit s lt IntStop gt Stop value of the analysis interval in seconds Usage Query only INITiate lt n gt REFResh This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated SYSTem SEQuencer SYST SEQ OFF and only for applications in MSRA mode not the MSRA Master The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by th
153. apter 3 1 2 Evaluation Methods for Code Domain Analysis on page 20 Code Domain Analysis To close the SmartGrid mode and restore the previous softkey menu select the 2 Close icon in the righthand corner of the toolbar or press any key o For details on working with the SmartGrid see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual 6 2 Code Domain Analysis 1xEV DO measurements require a special application on the R amp S FSW which you activate using the MODE key When you activate a 1xEV DO application the first time a set of parameters is passed on from the currently active application center frequency and frequency offset e reference level and reference level offset attenuation After initial setup the parameters for the measurement channel are stored upon exiting and restored upon re entering the channel Thus you can switch between applications quickly and easily When you activate a 1xEV DO application Code Domain Analysis of the input signal is started automatically with the default configuration The Code Domain Analyzer menu is displayed and provides access to the most important configuration functions This menu is also displayed when you press the MEAS CONFIG key The Span Bandwidth Lines and Marker Functions menus are not available in the 1xEV DO application Code Domain Analysis can be configured easily in the Overview dialog box which is displayed when you select the Overview softkey from
154. ar file format make sure to validate your XML file against the given schema The following example shows an UO parameter XML file The XML elements and attrib utes are explained in the following sections Sample UO parameter XML file xyz xml lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt xml stylesheet type text xsl href open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt RS IQ TAR FileFormat fileFormatVersion 1 xsi noNamespaceSchemaLocation RsIqTar xsd Q Data File Format iq tar xmlns xsi http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema instance gt lt Name gt FSV K10 lt Name gt lt Comment gt Here is a comment lt Comment gt lt DateTime gt 2011 01 24T14 02 49 lt DateTime gt lt Samples gt 68751 lt Samples gt lt Clock unit Hz gt 6 5e 006 lt Clock gt lt Format gt complex lt Format gt lt DataType gt float32 lt DataType gt lt ScalingFactor unit V gt 1 lt ScalingFactor gt lt NumberOfChannels gt 1 lt NumberOfChannels gt DataFilename xyz complex float32 DataFilename lt UserData gt lt UserDefinedElement gt Example lt UserDefinedElement gt lt UserData gt lt PreviewData gt lt PreviewData gt lt RS_IQ TAR FileFormat gt Element Description RS IQ TAR File Format The root element of the XML file It must contain the attribute fileFormatVersion that contains the number of the file format definition Currently fileFormatVersion 2 is used Name
155. as a result of transmit diversity Remote command CDP LAY ADD 1 RIGH CDPower see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 220 CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES CDP Or CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES CDPR see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 234 CDEP LAY ADD 1 RIGH CDEPower see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 220 CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 234 Composite Constellation In Composite Constellation evaluation the constellation points of the 1536 chips are displayed for the specified slot This data is determined inside the DSP even before the channel search Thus it is not possible to assign constellation points to channels The constellation points are displayed normalized with respect to the total power 2 Composite Constellation Fig 3 6 Composite Constellation display in the BTS application Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH CCON see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 220 CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 234 Composite Data Bitstream MS application only This result display is only available in the MS application for subtypes 2 or 3 The Composite Data Bitstream provides information on the demodulated bits for the special composite data channel and selected half slot regardless of which channel is selected IESSE Use
156. asnevesssaceasnanasdeneassoesnesiaessionadiecsesbinntastinsdebecssuesncuvens 67 A EE 67 A FACO cette eee 67 A 5 NOE 67 Subtype Specifies the characteristics of the used transmission standard For details see chapter 4 5 Subtypes on page 51 0 1 Single carrier nz Increased number of active users 3 Modulation type 64QAM can be detected Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS SUBType on page 163 PN Offset Specifies the Pseudo Noise PN offset from an external trigger If no offset is specified or no external trigger is available calculation is much slower as the correct PN must be determined from all possible positions For details see chapter 4 2 Scrambling via PN Offsets and Long Codes on page 45 Remote command SENSe CDPower PNOFfset on page 164 Code Domain Analysis Multicarrier Activates or deactivates the multicarrier mode This mode improves the processing of multicarrier signals It allows you to measure one carrier out of a multicarrier signal Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier STATe on page 163 Enhanced Algorithm Multicarrier Activates or deactivates the enhanced algorithm that is used for signal detection on multicarrier signals This algorithm slightly increases the calculation time This setting is only available if Multicarrier on page 67 is activated Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier MALGo on page 163 Multicarrier Filter Multicarrier A
157. assumed that for the first 256 chips 1 4 of the half slot 1 8 of the entire slot only the RRI and then the PICH is active in this half slot If only the PICH is active RRI activity 0 the PICH is active for the entire 1024 chips of the half slot Operating Modes Access and Traffic In the MS application there are two operating modes for transmission Access mode and Traffic mode The following diagrams show the possible channels together with their position on the and Q branch the possible orientation in time and the gain The ACCESS mode initiates and controls the data transmission between the mobile station and the base station In Access mode only the Reverse Pilot Channel PICH and the Reverse Data Channel DATA are used Channel Detection and Channel Types Fig 4 2 1xEV DO MS channels in ACCESS mode Once the transmission has been established the TRAFFIC mode takes over The Traf fic mode contains all 5 channels listed in table 4 1 The RRI takes up the first 256 chips of the first half slot and shares its code with the PICH The ACK is always just one half slot in length The DRC is a multiple of slots in length and offset by one half slot 4 5 Subtypes Data Fig 4 3 1xEV DO MS channels in TRAFFIC mode Subtypes The 1xEV DO standard includes various subtypes of the protocol for the physical layer In subtype 2 the number of active users increases which has an affect on the used traffic channel
158. ated without a prompt For more information see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Remote command CALibration AIQ HATiming STATe on page 178 Center Frequency Defines the center frequency for analog baseband input For real type baseband input I or Q only the center frequency is always O Hz Note If the analysis bandwidth to either side of the defined center frequency exceeds the minimum frequency 0 Hz or the maximum frequency 40 MHz 80 MHz an error is displayed In this case adjust the center frequency or the analysis bandwidth Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 182 Probe Settings Probes are configured in a separate tab on the Input dialog box which is displayed when you select the INPUT OUTPUT key and then Input Source Config R amp S9FSW 84 K85 Configuration Input Source Power Sensor Probes Probe I Name RT ZS30 Serial Number 1410 4309 02 S Not Present Part Number 101241 Type Single Ended Microbutton Action Run Single For each possible probe connector Baseband Input Baseband Input Q the detec ted type of probe if any is displayed The following information is provided for each connected probe e Probe name e Serial number e R amp S part number e Type of probe Differential Single Ended For more information on using probes with an R amp S FSW see the R amp S FSW User Manual For general information on the R amp S9RTO probes
159. atic setting adjustments Enter the value in seconds Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE on page 209 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation on page 208 Upper Level Hysteresis When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the Auto Level function the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed compared to the last mea surement before the reference level is adapted automatically Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis UPPer on page 209 Lower Level Hysteresis When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the Auto Level function the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below compared to the last mea surement before the reference level is adapted automatically Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWer on page 209 Code Domain Analysis 6 2 13 Zoom Functions The zoom functions are only available from the toolbar AE LI E 110 DIIGO E 110 Restore Original Display ion ii i 110 R Deactivating Zoom Selection model 110 Single Zoom R A single zoom replaces
160. ault Settings for Code Domain Analysis on page 63 for details Remote command SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute on page 159 Select Measurement Selects a different measurement to be performed See Selecting the measurement type on page 61 Specifics for The measurement channel may contain several windows for different results Thus the settings indicated in the Overview and configured in the dialog boxes vary depending on the selected window Select an active window from the Specifics for selection list that is displayed in the Overview and in all window specific configuration dialog boxes The Overview and dialog boxes are updated to indicate the settings for the selected window 6 2 3 Signal Description The signal description provides information on the expected input signal e BIS Signal Desernplioli t e iio 65 e MS Signal Deseriptioki 1e derepente iia 68 6 2 3 1 BTS Signal Description These settings describe the input signal in BTS measurements Code Domain Analysis Code P 7 Common Subtype PN Offset for external Trigger only 0 Multi Carrier Multi Carrier Enhanced Algorithm Multi Carrier Filter Filter Type Roll Off Factor Cut Off Frequency opio eenegen ee eege Eege 66 Sache 66 DUNCAN LES E ETT 67 L Enhanced AIgorith m ccccccccccsccsesssessseesssesesesesecescseceseeteseeeseseseceneseceseases 67 L Multicarrier FIGI sce cessies
161. breviated as R amp S FSW R amp S FSW 84 K85 Contents 1 2 1 3 2 1 2 2 3 1 3 2 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 4 10 5 1 6 1 6 2 6 3 Contents LL 7 About this AAPP Ap A ANNAE ERAS 7 Documentation OvervVieW cooomoioicioniaci narnia 8 Conventions Used in the Documentation eese 9 Welcome to the 1xEV DO ApplicatiONS oooomccccccccccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnas 11 Starting the 1XEV DO Applications eese enn 12 Understanding the Display Information ccceeccceseeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 12 Measurements and Result Displays eeeeeeeees 15 Code Domain Analysis tein ne 15 RF Measuremints ein ree bee PUE Ee eege 35 Measurement BASICS s ee AA Slots and Sets ici 44 Scrambling via PN Offsets and Long Codes eee 45 Synchronization MS application only eee 46 Channel Detection and Channel Types eeeeeeeennnneenenennn nnn 47 i evs 51 Multicarrier Modo iii as 52 Code Mapping and Branches cccceeceeseeeeeee eee ceee eee eeeeeesseeaneeseeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeaneeeeeees 52 Code Display and Sort Order eese nennen nnne nennt 53 Test Setup for 1xEV DO Base Station or Mobi
162. cation Remote command CONF CDP MEAS ESP see CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 160 Querying results CALC MARK FUNC POW RES CPOW see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer lt sb gt RESult on page 250 CALC MARK FUNC POW RES ACP see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer lt sb gt RESult on page 250 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt FAIL on page 249 Occupied Bandwidth The Occupied Bandwidth measurement determines the bandwidth in which in default settings 99 of the total signal power is to be found The percentage of the signal power to be included in the bandwidth measurement can be changed The occupied bandwidth Occ BW and the frequency markers are displayed in the marker table User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 39 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurements and Result Displays SS _ SS SS SSS SS ES cot 8 MultiView 32 Spectrum 3 1xEV DO BTS dB s SWT 100 ms 1 Occupied Bandwidth CF 878 60845 AHZ 1001 pts 420 0 kHz Span 4 2 MHz 2 Marker Table Type Ref Tre Stimulus Response Function Function Result Mi 1 878 38075 MHz 25 55 dBm T 8 MHz 30 52 dBm Doc Bv 2 647552448 MHz 01 dBm Fig 3 25 OBW measurement results in the 1xEV DO BTS application Remote command CONF CDP MEAS OBAN see CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 160 Querying results CALC MARK FUNC POW RES OBW see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion
163. cial marker functions and spectrograms which are not available in the 1xEV DO applications For details see the Analysis chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual o Mid is 253 LEN DU a asia 255 11 10 1 Traces The trace settings determine how the measured data is analyzed and displayed on the screen In 1xEV DO applications only one trace per window can be configured for Code Domain Analysis DISPlayE WINDow sn TRAGest MODE 2 2 rte cda 254 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t STATe essere nennen nnne nene nens 254 General Analysis DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE Mode This command selects the trace mode In case of max hold min hold or average trace mode you can set the number of single measurements with SENSe SWEep COUNt Note that synchronization to the end of the measurement is possible only in single sweep mode Parameters Mode WRITe Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting AVERage The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Aver age Count determines the number of averaging procedures MAXHold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and dis played The R amp S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace mem ory only if the new value is greater than the previous one MINHold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace mem
164. cting measurements see Selecting the measurement type on page 61 Evaluation methods The captured and processed data for each measurement can be evaluated with vari ous different methods All evaluation methods available for the selected 1xEV DO measurement are displayed in the evaluation bar in SmartGrid mode The evaluation methods for CDA are described in chapter 3 1 2 Evaluation Methods for Code Domain Analysis on page 20 e Code Domain Analyse 15 e IRF Measufreiigiile ici TA beate tud vt d d dde 35 3 1 Code Domain Analysis The 1xEV DO firmware applications feature a Code Domain Analyzer It can be used used to perform the measurements required in the 1xEV DO specification concerning the power of the different codes In addition the modulation quality EVM and RHO factors frequency error and trigger to frame time and also peak code domain error are determined Constellation analyses and bit stream analyses are similarly available The calculation of the timing and phase offsets of the channels for the first active chan nel can be enabled The observation period can be adjusted in multiples of the slot Basically the firmware differentiates between the following result classes for the evalu ations Results which take the overall signal into account over the whole observation period all slots Results that take a channel type such as MAC into account over the whole period of observation Results that
165. ctivates or deactivates the usage of a filter for signal detection on multicarrier signals This setting is only available if Multicarrier on page 67 is activated For details see chapter 4 6 Multicarrier Mode on page 52 Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer STATe on page 162 Filter Type Multicarrier Selects the filter type if Multicarrier Filter is activated Two filter types are available for selection a low pass filter and an RRC filter By default the low pass filter is active The low pass filter affects the quality of the measured signal compared to a measurement without a filter The RRC filter comes with an integrated Hamming window If selected two more set tings become available for configuration the Roll Off Factor and the Cut Off Fre quency Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer TYPE on page 162 Roll Off Factor Filter Type Multicarrier Defines the roll off factor of the RRC filter which defines the slope of the filter curve and therefore the excess bandwidth of the filter Possible values are between 0 01 and 0 99 in 0 01 steps The default value is 0 02 This parameter is available for the RRC filter Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer TYPE on page 162 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer ROFF on page 161 Cut Off Frequency Filter Type Multicarrier Defines the frequency at which the passband of the RRC filter
166. d the R amp S FSW averages the measured values and compares the results to the emission envelope mask This measurement is required by the standard for the Emission Envelope Mask It is only available in the BTS application The Power vs Time diagram displays the averaged power values versus time and the results of the limit checks IESSE User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 35 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurements and Result Displays Limit check indicates the overall result of all limit checks PVTFU PVTIU indicates the upper limit check PVTFL PVTIL indicates the lower limit check A e Leg MES MultiView Spectrum 1xEV DO BTS Rel Level 10 00 dim Freq 100Hz Sample Rate 43152 Mhe S 33 3 Att 20 dB Count 100 100 TRG EXT1 1 Power vs Time 2 List Evaluation Start vg Max Min us dam d8 der dBm dB TESTI Fig 3 21 Power vs Time measurement results in the 1xEV DO BTS application Remote command CONF CDP MEAS PVT see CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 160 Querying results CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime LIST RESult on page 252 Power The Power measurement determines the 1xEV DO signal channel power To do so the 1xEV DO application performs a Channel Power measurement as in the Spectrum application with settings according to the 1xEV DO standard The bandwidth and the associated channel power are displayed in the Result Summary User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 36 R amp S9FSW 84 K85
167. d 16 QAM modulation types are used Analysis is performed with a spreading factor of 16 e PREAMBLE The first 64 to 1024 chips of the DATA channel type are replaced by the PREAMBLE channel type at the beginning of a data packet Depending on the transmission speeds being used and whether the start of data of the packet is missed preambles of different length can be in the signal The application firmware detects the preambles automatically If the PREAMBLE channel type is examined and no preamble is found in the signal this is indicated by the message PREAM BLE MISSING see chapter 8 1 Error Messages on page 133 Spreading fac tor 32 is used for analysis of the PREAMBLE channel type as for the PILOT chan nel type Again only a BPSK I modulated channel should occur but with variable code number 4 4 2 MS Channel Types The following channel types can be detected in 1xEV DO MS signals by the 1xEV DO MS application Table 4 1 Channel types in 1xEV DO MS signals Channel Ch no Mapping Description type SF PICH 0 16 l Reverse Pilot Channel RRI 0 16 l Reverse Rate Indicator DATA 2 4 Q Reverse Data Channel User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 48 Channel Detection and Channel Types Channel Ch no Mapping Description type SF ACK 4 8 l Reverse Acknowledgment Channel DRC 8 16 Q Reverse Data Rate Control Channel If the RRI and the PICH channel types are active it is
168. dB power of the channel refers either to the pilot channel or the total power of the signal Channel Pwr Abs CDPabsolute Absolute dBm power of the channel Walsh Chan CHANnel Channel number including the spreading factor nel SF SFACtor Code Domain Analysis Parameter SCPI Parame ter Description Channel Type Channel type BTS application e 0 PICH 1 RRI 2 DATA 3 ACK 4 DRC 5 INACTIVE Code Class Code class of the channel See table 11 2 and table 11 3 Code Number Code number within the channel 0 to lt SF gt 1 Composite Data EVM CDERms CDEPeak MS application only RMS or peak value of EVM error vector magnitude of composite data channel Composite Data CODMulation MS application only Modu Modulation type and selected branch of the composite data channel Mapping MS application only Modulation type including mapping 0 I branch 1 Q branch 2 and Q branch Modulation Type MTYPe BTS application only Modulation type including mapping 0 BPSK I 1 BPSK Q 2 QPSK 3 8 PSK 4 16 QAM 5 2BPSK Modulation types QPSK 8 PSK 16 QAM have complex values Phase Offset POFFset Phase offset between the selected channel and the pilot channel If enabled see Timing and phase offset calculation on page 119 the maximum value of the phase offset is displayed together with the associated channel in the last two lines Si
169. dco neo n tr rra nlt reae nes 189 e Configuring the Trigger Output diia 195 Configuring the Triggering Conditions TRIGger SEQuehce BBPowerHOLDoff eres ctetu c eet 190 TRIGSer SEQuence DTME 1 sa cadens to eee ee titi 190 TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME 190 TRiGger SEOuence FPowerHOl RE 191 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis nina ettet nere Eaa aa Eaa 191 TRlGoert GtOuencelLEVel D bower eere enne nennen enne nnns 191 TRIGger SEQuence LE EVellEXTernaleport uat eoe ce ten n re cene 192 TRIGger SEQuence LEVelFPOWer ie Loco eerte dva saec Pape sa e LU sine sie 192 TRIGger SEQuence LEVE O Power EE 192 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel RFPOWET nena nennen ener 193 Configuring Code Domain Analysis RR Eeer ee Eer 193 TRIGge SE Quenec SLOPE oia 193 RRE ee BI 193 TRiGger SEQuence TIMEIRIN EE 195 TRIGger SEQuence BBPower HOLDoff lt Period gt This command defines the holding time before the baseband power trigger event The command requires the optional Digital Baseband Interface or the optional Analog Baseband Interface Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 191 command for new remote control programs Parameters lt Period gt Range 150 ns to 1000s RST 150 ns Example TRIG SOUR BBP Sets the baseband power trigger source TRIG BBP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns
170. de including scrambling sequence AUXiliary Pilot Similar to synchronization on pilot but with the different known sequence spreading code of the auxiliary pilot channel POWer This frame synchronization method does not require a pilot channel because it analyzes the power of any specified channel currently code 3 with spreading factor 4 which is the data chan nel 2 RST PILot Manual operation See Sync To on page 98 11 5 7 Channel Detection The channel detection settings determine which channels are found in the input signal The commands for working with channel tables are described here When the channel type is required as a parameter by a remote command or provided as a result for a remote query the following abbreviations and assignments to a numeric value are used Table 11 2 BTS channel types and their assignment to a numeric parameter value Parameter Channel type 0 PILOT 1 MAC 2 PREAMBLE 64 chips 3 PREAMBLE 128 chips 4 PREAMBLE 256 chips 5 PREAMBLE 512 chips 6 PREAMBLE 1024 chips 7 DATA 11 5 7 1 Configuring Code Domain Analysis Table 11 3 MS channel types and their assignment to a numeric parameter value Parameter Channel type 0 PICH 1 RRI 2 DATA 3 ACK 4 DRC 5 INACTIVE 6 DSC 7 Auxiliary pilot e General Channel Detection and Channel Table Management 200 e Configuring
171. ded Restoring u ET Presetting Channels enter asad Default values A M Probes MIGhODUTON Pe 78 Settings Protection RF input remote cet et 165 Q Q2 Modulation PS west ione a e oe exces 51 Q4 ModulationityD68 iecit irt ree ere ba eee 51 Q4Q2 Modulation type ir oe e v tenes 51 Quasi inactive codes oen nee tote sen ehe etn 47 R R amp S Elie UE 75 R amp S EX 1Q BOX A EE 75 Range A A O Reference level Reference Manual K84 remote command Reference Mean POWER itor Interni reed Power vs Time remote Reference DOW c i sis poteet tii Er seed er idi sace Refreshing MSRA applications remote ssssss 264 MSRT applications remote ssssse 264 Remote commands Basics On SM 150 Boolean valles ico ria das 154 Capitalization 2d 152 Character data ui geng e nere 154 Data blocks 2155 Numeric values 99 Obsolete 267 Optional keywords ccoo 152 Parameters 2359 Strings 2195 SIUE MEHREREN 152 Resetting RE INDUEPEOtECtiON EE 165 Restart on Fail Ee aid 217 Restoring Channel settings 65 269 Predefined channel tables 102 202 Result displays DA aii os 20 Channel Bitstreatri nein nee 21 Code Domain Error Power 22 Code Domain Power ulss iake
172. ding factor see chapter A 2 Channel Type Characteristics on page 273 Symbol Magnitude Error When the trace data for this evaluation is queried the magnitude error in of each symbol at the selected slot is transferred The number of the symbols depends on the spreading factor of the selected channel NOFSymbols 10 2 8 CodeClass 11 9 4 Retrieving Results Symbol Phase Error When the trace data for this evaluation is queried the phase error in degrees of each symbol at the selected slot is transferred The number of the symbols depends on the spreading factor of the selected channel NOFSymbols 10 2 9 CodeClass Exporting Trace Results Trace results can be exported to a file For more commands concerning data and results storage see the R amp S FSW User Manual MMEMoneSTORSSDPET e 248 FORMat DEXPGR E EIERE aant tet du rk e e rk pe cai ar ELLE Dag 248 MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe Trace lt FileName gt This command exports trace data from the specified window to an ASCII file Trace export is only available for RF measurements For details on the file format see Reference ASCII File Export Format in the R amp S FSW User Manual Secure User Mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data
173. ding their frequency and power The 1xEV DO applications perform the SEM measurement as in the Spectrum applica tion with the following settings Table 6 5 Predefined settings for 1xEV DO SEM measurements Bandclass 0 800 MHz Cellular Span 4 MHz to 1 98 MHz Number of ranges 5 Fast SEM ON Sweep time 100 ms Number of power classes 3 Power reference type Channel power For further details about the Spectrum Emission Mask measurements refer to Spec trum Emission Mask Measurement in the R amp S FSW User Manual RF Measurements O Changing the RBW and the VBW is restricted due to the definition of the limits by the standard To restore adapted measurement parameters the following parameters are saved on exiting and are restored on re entering this measurement e Reference level and reference level offset e Sweep time e Span The main measurement menus for the RF measurements are identical to the Spectrum application However for ACLR and SEM measurements an additional softkey is available to select the required bandclass Bandclass The bandclass defines the frequency band used for ACLR and SEM measurements It also determines the corresponding limits and ACLR channel settings according to the 1xEV DO standard For an overview of supported bandclasses and their usage see chapter A 3 Refer ence Supported Bandclasses on page 274 Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS BCLass B
174. direct path for small frequencies In spectrum analyzers passive analog mixers are used for the first conversion of the input signal In such mixers the LO signal is coupled into the IF path due to its limited isolation The coupled LO signal becomes visible at the RF frequency 0 Hz This effect is referred to as LO feedthrough To avoid the LO feedthrough the spectrum analyzer provides an alternative signal path to the A D converter referred to as the direct path By default the direct path is selected automatically for RF frequencies close to zero However this behavior can be deactivated If Direct Path is set to Off the spectrum analyzer always uses the ana log mixer path Auto Default The direct path is used automatically for frequencies close to zero Off The analog mixer path is always used Remote command INPut DPATh on page 166 High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the analyzer in order to measure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function requires an additional hardware option Note for RF input signals outside the specified range the high pass filter has no effect For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards the harmonics are suppressed sufficiently by the YIG filter Remote command INPut FILTer HPASs STATe on page 167 YIG Preselector Activates
175. dual measurements are activated using the CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 160 command see chapter 11 4 Selecting a Measurement on page 159 In addition to the common RF measurement configuration commands described for the base unit some special commands are available in 1xEV DO applications e 1xEV DO BTS Power vs Time Measurements eee 216 e 1xEV DO SEM and ACLRMeaesurements nennen nnne 218 11 6 1 Configuring RF Measurements 1xEV DO BTS Power vs Time Measurements The following commands are only available for Power vs Time measurements in 1xEV DO BTS application Useful commands for configuring RF measurements described elsewhere e SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 207 Remote commands exclusive to 1xEV DO RF measurements CALGulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt PV Time REFOTENCe oiiro traiter ete tert neta d etna e EEN 216 CALOCulate n LIMit k PVTime RVALue essssssseeseeeeeenen enne nnns nnns E RETRE 217 CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime BURSt CENTer esses nnne 217 CONFigtine CDPower BTS PV Time FRE Start acit titor dte neben 217 CONFigure CDPower BTS RFSLolt 2 coire ce eco ee aec de aea cc cana EEN 218 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt PVTime REFerence Mode If enabled the mean power is calculated and the limit lines are set relative to that mean power The standard requires that the FULL slot first be measured with the limit line relative t
176. e 202 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer COFRequenCy ccccnocccoccccnncnonncnoncnancnno conan conca rancio non ncannannnacnns 161 GONFigure CDPower BTS MCARtrier FILTer ROFF ntt etre tenen n dee 161 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer TYPE rca cirrosis 162 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer S TATe nono conan nennen 162 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier MALGO nior ttn etn etin rrt tete na 163 CONFigure CDPower BIS MCARMEN STATO tnter tnr ec canes 163 GONFigure CDPower BTS MEASUuremint rrt ica lite 160 CONFigure CDPower BTS PV Time BURSCENT OT rissisris isserrat sieran asias N rencores 217 GONFigure CDPower EBTS PVTime EERESIGIU orto reden teer t er eere A EE ATENE 217 GONFigure CDPower BTS PV Time LIST RESUult 2 eit ttn tnnt retener nna 252 GONFigure CDPower BTS PV Time LISTESTATe ir ntt terret tritt nnn 269 GONFigure CDPower BTS RFSLEOL occorre rrt rare tuo teo egg aera n cu eee exo F2 ANE eo eee ewe sa SEHE E RUE 218 CONFigure CDPower EBTS SUBType trt ert rn nr m tee ren erp n e n ad 163 DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce ee e EE RUE ed RTE DISPlayEWINDOW SnP SIZE tnr emet terrre hi rt tre rer e t a ere HS EE REA EHE Nasi DISPlay WINDowsn 7 TRAGeSE MODE coo cone arcano porra 254 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO ONCE essen 184 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MAXI
177. e e Level and unit that corresponds to an UO sample with the magnitude 1 Full Scale Level Remote command OUTPut DIQ CDEVice on page 172 Connected Instrument Displays information on the instrument connected to the optional Digital Baseband Interface if available If an instrument is connected the following information is displayed e Name and serial number of the instrument connected to the Digital Baseband Inter face e Used port Remote command OUTPut DIQ CDEVice on page 172 Frontend Settings The frequency amplitude and y axis scaling settings represent the frontend of the measurement setup Gerd 82 e Amplitude Settings soinnin danas ue he dL Ee RA 2D ERE DV a ae Rn aa iia 84 e Amplitude Settings for Analog Baseband Input 88 YARS SGAN DEE 90 Frequency Settings Frequency settings for the input signal can be configured via the Frequency dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following e Select the FREQ key and then the Frequency Config softkey e Select the Frequency tab in the Input Settings dialog box Code Domain Analysis Frequency Offset Value 0 0 Hz ize Stepsize VIER 1 0 MHz Center TEE 83 Canter E EE 83 Frequency Offset 84 Center frequency Defines the normal center frequency of the signal The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span span gt 0 spanmin 2 lt foenter fmax SPANmin 2Z fmax and span
178. e int16 value 215 1 32767 0 999969482421875 V Example PreviewData in XML lt PreviewData gt lt ArrayOfChannel length 1 gt lt Channel gt lt PowerVsTime gt UO Data File Format iq tar lt Min gt lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 134 lt float gt lt float gt 142 lt float gt lt float gt 140 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Min gt lt Max gt lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 70 lt float gt lt float gt 71 lt float gt lt float gt 69 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Max gt lt PowerVsTime gt lt Spectrum gt lt Min gt lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 133 lt float gt lt float gt 111 lt float gt lt float gt 111 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Min gt lt Max gt lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 67 lt float gt lt float gt 69 lt float gt lt float gt 70 lt float gt lt float gt 69 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Max gt lt Spectrum gt IQ Histogram width 64 height 64 gt 0123456789 0 lt Histogram gt IQ lt Channel gt lt ArrayOfChannel gt lt PreviewData gt A 4 2 Q Data Binary File The I Q data is saved in binary format according to the format and data type specified in the XML file see Format element and DataType element To allow reading and writing of streamed UO data all data is interleaved i e complex values are interlea
179. e urrenin saana dada 52 e Code Mapping and Branches ccceceeeeeeceeecceeeeeeeeeeesedeneaeeaeceseeeeeeeeeseessesesaeeees 52 e Code Display and Som dE 53 e Test Setup for 1xEV DO Base Station or Mobile Station Tests 54 e CDA Measurements in MSRA Operating Mode 56 4 1 Slots and Sets The cdma2000 High Rate Packet Data standard was defined for packet oriented data transmission The user data is transmitted in individual data packages each of which may have different transmission settings such as the power level The data in one such package is called a slot In the 1xEV DO standard a slot is a basic time unit of 1 666 ms duration and corresponds to the expression power control group PCG in cdma2000 Each slot consists of two half slots with identical structures Each half slot contains 1024 chips which are distributed as shown below according to the different channel types Scrambling via PN Offsets and Long Codes HA Slot 2048 chips_ _ gt LI eege Weg D MAC Pilot MAC Data n E 64 of Half Slots 0 83 ms period T 1 E ge Packat Modulation Chips in following Total ize Type this slot slots Chips v 384 kbps 1024 1 5 OPSK 16 576 15 em 24576 v 7 8kbps 1024 IS QPSK 8 1088 7 2 1600 12208 Y N 153 6 kbps 1024 1 5 QPSK 4 1344 3 gt 1600 6144 Y N 307 2 kbps 1024 1 5 QPSK 2 1472 1 gt 1
180. e command DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce on page 181 Trigger 2 3 Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors where Trigger 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel Trigger 3 TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Trigger 1 is INPUT only Note Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R amp S FSW No further trigger parameters are available for the connector 6 2 4 3 Code Domain Analysis Output The R amp S FSW sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 196 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt DIRection on page 195 Output Type Trigger 2 3 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the R amp S FSW triggers gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FSW is in Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 as well as by a low level signal at the AUX port pin 9 User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Trigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTY
181. e command INPut SELect on page 168 Input Coupling The RF input of the R amp S FSW can be coupled by alternating current AC or direct cur rent DC This function is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface or from the optional Analog Baseband Interface AC coupling blocks any DC voltage from the input signal This is the default setting to prevent damage to the instrument Very low frequencies in the input signal may be dis torted However some specifications require DC coupling In this case you must protect the instrument from damaging DC input voltages manually For details refer to the data sheet Remote command INPut COUPling on page 166 Impedance The reference impedance for the measured levels of the R amp S FSW can be set to 50 Q or 75 Q Code Domain Analysis 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impe dance using a 75 Q adapter of the RAZ type 25 Q in series to the input impedance of the instrument The correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 This value also affects the unit conversion see Reference Level on page 85 This function is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface or from the optional Analog Baseband Interface For analog baseband input an impe dance of 50 Q is always used Remote command INPut IMPedance on page 167 Direct Path Enables or disables the use of the
182. e currently active application only The results for any other applications remain unchanged The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Example SYST SEQ OFF Deactivates the scheduler NIT CONT OFF witches to single sweep mode NIT WAI tarts a new data measurement and waits for the end of the eep NST SEL IQ ANALYZER elects the IQ Analyzer channel NIT REFR Refreshes the display for the UO Analyzer channel H 40 Du D Wa H Usage Event Querying the Status Registers SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet Offset This setting is only available for applications in MSRA mode not for the MSRA Master It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements Parameters lt Offset gt This parameter defines the time offset between the capture buf fer start and the start of the extracted application data The off set must be a positive value as the application can only analyze data that is contained in the capture buffer Range 0 to lt Record length gt RST 0 Manual operation See Capture Offset on page 95 11 13 Querying the Status Registers The following commands query the status registers specific to the 1xEV DO applica tions In addition the 1xEV DO applications also use the standard status registers of the R amp S FSW For details on the common R amp S FSW status registers refer to the description of remote commands basics in the R amp S FSW User Manual o RST does not infl
183. e keyword If you don t quote a suffix for keywords that support one a 1 is assumed Example DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe enables the zoom in a particular mea surement window selected by the suffix at WINDow DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON refers to window 4 11 1 4 Optional Keywords Some keywords are optional and are only part of the syntax because of SCPI compli ance You can include them in the header or not Note that if an optional keyword has a numeric suffix and you need to use the suffix you have to include the optional keyword Otherwise the suffix of the missing keyword is assumed to be the value 1 Optional keywords are emphasized with square brackets Example Without a numeric suffix in the optional keyword SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as FREQuency CENTer With a numeric suffix in the optional keyword DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe DISPlay ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 1 no suffix DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 4 Introduction 11 1 5 Alternative Keywords A vertical stroke indicates alternatives for a specific keyword You can use both key words to the same effect Example SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution In the short form without optional keywords BAND 1MHZ would have the same effect as BWID 1MHZ 11 1 6 SCPI Parameters Many commands feature one or more parameters If a command suppor
184. e last adjustment is setting the PN Pseudo Noise offset correctly The measure ment is only valid if the PN offset on the analyzer is the same as that of the transmit signal gt Signal Description gt PN Offset 200 In the General Result Summary the Trigger to Frame result is not correct Also the error message SYNC FAILED indicates that the synchronization has failed Correct the PN Offset gt Signal Description gt PN Offset 0 User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 145 Meas 5 Measuring the Composite EVM Now the PN offset on the R amp S FSW is the same as that of the signal In the Gen eral Result Summary the Trigger to Frame value is now correct 10 5 Meas 5 Measuring the Composite EVM The Error Vector Magnitude EVM describes the quality of the measured signal com pared to an ideal reference signal generated by the R amp S FSW In the I Q plane the error vector represents the ratio of the measured signal to the ideal signal on symbol level The error vector is equal to the square root of the ratio of the measured signal to the reference signal The result is given in In the Composite EVM measurement the error is averaged over all channels by means of the root mean square for a given PCG The measurement covers the entire signal during the entire observation time In the graphical display the results are shown in a diagram in which the x axis represents the examined PCGs and the y axis shows the EVM
185. e level See Full Scale Level on page 74 The availa bility of units depends on the measurement application you are using This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is installed Parameters lt Level gt VOLT DBM DBPW WATT DBMV DBUV DBUA AMPere RST Volt Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 74 INPut DIQ SRATe lt SampleRate gt This command specifies or queries the sample rate of the input signal from the optional Digital Baseband Interface see Input Sample Rate on page 74 Parameters lt SampleRate gt Range 1 Hz to 10 GHz RST 32 MHz Example INP DIQ SRAT 200 MHz Configuring Code Domain Analysis Manual operation See Input Sample Rate on page 74 INPut DIQ SRATe AUTO lt State gt If enabled the sample rate of the digital UO input signal is set automatically by the con nected device This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is installed Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Input Sample Rate on page 74 OUTPut DIQ lt State gt This command turns continuous output of UO data to the optional Digital Baseband Interface on and off Using the digital input and digital output simultaneously is not possible If digital baseband output is active the sample rate is restricted to 100 MHz 200 MHz if enhanced mode is possible max 160 MHz bandwidth Parameters lt State gt
186. east one of the slots being examined The measurement results that can be read out for the Preamble channel type are not valid if the analysis takes all slots into account CDP with Average Peak Code Domain Error Compo site EVM In MS application this bit is not used 6 to 14 These bits are not used 15 This bit is always 0 STA Ne eeh de EC KE 266 STATUSQUESTONAbDIE S NGICON DION EE 266 STATus QUEStionable SYNC ENABle nano nnn conan nano nana nana naaa 267 STATus QUEStionable SYNC NTRansition nano n ana nnana nana 267 STATUS QUE St nable SYNC PT RANSOM nunca 267 STATus QUEStionable SYNC EVENt lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the EVENt section of the status register The command also deletes the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Usage Query only STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the CONDition section of the status register The command does not delete the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Usage Query only Commands for Compatibility STATus QUEStionable SYNC ENABle lt
187. edia org wiki Comparison of file archivers available for most operating systems The advantage of tar files is that the archived files inside the tar file are not changed not com pressed and thus it is possible to read the UO data directly within the archive without the need to unpack untar the tar file first Contained files An ig tar file must contain the following files e Q parameter XML file e g xyz xm1 Contains meta information about the l Q data e g sample rate The filename can be defined freely but there must be only one single UO parameter XML file inside an iq tar file e J Q data binary file e g xyz complex f10oat32 Contains the binary l Q data of all channels There must be only one single UO data binary file inside an iq tar file Optionally an iq tar file can contain the following file e Q preview XSLT file e g open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt Contains a stylesheet to display the UO parameter XML file and a preview of the UO data in a web browser A sample stylesheet is available at http www rohde schwarz com file open Joar xml file in web browser xslt A 4 1 I Q Parameter XML File Specification The content of the UO parameter XML file must comply with the XML schema RsIqTar xsd available at http www rohde schwarz com file RslqTar xsd In particular the order of the XML elements must be respected i e iq tar uses an ordered XML schema For your own implementation of the iq t
188. eep count 0 default averaging is performed over 10 sweeps For sweep count 1 no averaging maxhold or minhold operations are per formed Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 207 SENSe AVERage n COUNt on page 206 Continuous Sweep RUN CONT After triggering starts the sweep and repeats it continuously until stopped This is the default setting While the measurement is running the Continuous Sweep softkey and the RUN CONT key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the Continuous Sweep softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected channel however the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel and only for a channel defined sequence In this case a channel in continuous sweep mode is swept repeatedly Furthermore the RUN CONT key controls the Sequencer not individual sweeps RUN CONT starts the Sequencer in continuous mode For details on the Sequencer see the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 230 Single Sweep RUN SINGLE After triggering starts the number of sweeps set in Sweep Count The measurement stops after the defined number of sweeps has been performed While the measurement is running the Single Sweep softke
189. eerte 93 Digital input Connection informatiori 22 ttt 74 Digital output Eniablilig TE 81 Direct path Input configuration E ue Display Configuration remote irssi aiai ie Configuration softkey Configuration Softkey Informatio Mins cia rh eee nhe rure a aa DO IDLE Predefined channel table sss 270 272 DO8PSK Predefined channel table 270 271 DO16QAM Predefined channel table 270 271 Domain conflict Charinel table 2 2 tei te ri dicte etas 104 DOQPSK Predefined channel table A 270 DRC AN O 48 Drop out time die GE 94 Duplicating Measurement channel remote 156 E E4E2 Modulation ty Pe imstande 51 Electronic input attenuation ooooocconncccnnncccccnccccconanccnnno 86 87 Eliminating IQ fa 119 121 211 Enhanced algorithm Multicarrier signals isiin 67 69 163 Enhanced mode Digital e EE Error messages Error vector magnitude ti M 26 Errors Device connections cooocococnccconocoonnnnnnccononanononononannnnns 173 IFOVIEDO EE 85 88 Evaluation methods Remote TE 220 Evaluation range Branch E 123 125 214 Chanel 2 5 etti c 122 124 Remote commands eege ti edes 213 O 98 123 125 215 Settings siii Here ardet tica 118 kim 123 125 Eet cot etre desi bert tenus 122 124 Evaluation
190. efined as the ratio of the peak power and the mean power The Result Summary dis plays the number of included samples the mean and peak power and the crest factor The CCDF measurement is performed as in the Spectrum application with the follow ing settings Table 6 7 Predefined settings for 1xEV DO CCDF measurements CCDF Active on trace 1 Analysis bandwidth 10 MHz Number of samples 62500 VBW 5 MHz For further details about the CCDF measurements refer to Statistical Measurements in the R amp S FSW User Manual To restore adapted measurement parameters the following parameters are saved on exiting and are restored on re entering this measurement e Reference level and reference level offset e Analysis bandwidth e Number of samples D Code Domain Analysis Settings BTS application Analysis General result analysis settings concerning the evaluation range trace markers etc can be configured via the Analysis button in the Overview 0 7 1 Analyzing RF Measurements General result analysis settings concerning the trace markers lines etc for RF mea surements are identical to the analysis functions in the Spectrum application except for some special marker functions and spectrograms which are not available in the 1xEV DO applications For details see the General Measurement Analysis and Display chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual e Code Domain Analysis Settings BTS ap
191. el Signal levels above this value may not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IF OVLD status display OVLD for analog baseband or digitial baseband input The reference level is also used to scale power diagrams the reference level is then used as the maximum on the y axis Since the hardware of the R amp S FSW is adapted according to this value it is recom mended that you set the reference level close above the expected maximum signal level to ensure an optimum measurement no compression good signal to noise ratio Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel on page 186 Shifting the Display Offset Reference Level Defines an arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level The scal ing of the y axis is changed accordingly Define an offset if the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the R amp S FSW so the application shows correct power results All displayed power level results will be shifted by this value The setting range is 200 dB in 0 01 dB steps Code Domain Analysis Note however that the internal reference level used to adjust the hardware settings to the expected signal optimally ignores any Reference Level Offset Thus it is impor tant to keep in mind the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle and not to rely on the displayed reference level internal reference level displayed reference level offset
192. en sion option R amp S FSW B500 0 Output Meas Time 21 221 us Sbate gt Ma Output Digital IQ Digital Baseband Output op Output Settings Max Sample Rate 100 MHz Sample Rate 32 MHz Full Scale Level 0 dBm Device Name SMBV 100A Serial Number 257374 Port Name Dig BB In For details on digital UO output see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer User Manual Digital Baseband Quip E 81 Output Settings Informistio unies eei per nea e putaretur dana 82 Connected BE IC EE 82 Digital Baseband Output Enables or disables a digital output stream to the optional Digital Baseband Interface if available Note If digital baseband output is active the sample rate is restricted to 200 MHz max 160 MHz bandwidth The only data source that can be used for digital baseband output is RF input For details on digital UO output see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer User Manual Remote command OUTPut DIQ on page 172 User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 81 6 2 5 6 2 5 1 Code Domain Analysis Output Settings Information Displays information on the settings for output via the optional Digital Baseband Inter face The following information is displayed e Maximum sample rate that can be used to transfer data via the Digital Baseband Interface i e the maximum input sample rate that can be processed by the con nected instrument e Sample rate currently used to transfer data via the Digital Baseband Interfac
193. ent can be defined automatically or manually To activate the automatic adjustment of a setting select the corresponding function in the AUTO SET menu or in the configuration dialog box for the setting where available MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode the following automatic settings are not available as they require a new data acquisition However 1xEV DO applications cannot perform data acquisition in MSRA operating mode Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically Auto All 108 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level esses 108 Auto Scalo WINDOW EEN 109 PUTO SSCA EC TT 109 Restore Scale Window re eei aie d Eee dE Eo RAE E RE E ud 109 Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto 109 Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual 109 Upper Level Hysteresis isa a dav 109 Lower Level E r tee cuid 109 Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically Auto All Activates all automatic adjustment functions for the current measurement settings This includes e Auto Level e Auto Scale All on page 109 This function is only available for the MSRA MSRT Master not for the applications Remote command SENSe ADJust ALL on page 208 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Automatically determines the optimal reference l
194. er ccoo ci 179 E Ee eg eier 179 SENSE PROBesp gt SE ipi MODE ina at ea 179 SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETUPp NAME coo 180 SENSeJPROBSsSp SETUp S TATe oett enhn ans 180 SENSe PROBe sp SETUp TYPE eteece uec epe a Re SR e oh signees 181 SENSe PROBe lt p gt ID PARTnumber Queries the R amp S part number of the probe Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Return values lt PartNumber gt Part number in a string Usage Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt ID SRNumber Queries the serial number of the probe Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Return values lt SerialNo gt Serial number in a string Usage Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup MODE lt Mode gt Select the action that is started with the micro button on the probe head See also Microbutton Action on page 78 Configuring Code Domain Analysis Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Parameters Mode RSINgle Run single starts one data acquisition NOA
195. er ER EE EI E e Ree e EE SENSe CDPower PNOF SSL EE SENSe CDPower PREFerence SENSe CDPower PRES et oeiia iip aaiae A a cna PER EEo Caen ee ER ER a SENSe GDPowWer QIINVGTL cit oed ra sete p aa Pet aa Ei E CDPOWef SE WEE EI E e ee e Eer el ET E E e Eeer e EI E e Ree e EE SENSe FREQuency CENTer SENSe EREQUency CENTERS TEP EE 182 SENSe FREQuency GENTer STEP AU TO i e tnter enr rhet nh einer e ERE EX pines 183 SENSe FREQuency CENTerSTEP LINK 2 rettet rhe trn irte pe chr Pe err e Eee 183 SENS JFEREQuency CENTer STERIEINKIEAGTOE itineri pente ced Er Er eret rn eben cene MM s 183 SENSe FREQuUuency e EE 184 SENSe MSRA CAP Ture OF FS6et rnc rere ree reete e chest A 265 SENSe JPROBesp gt ID PARTOUMbDe EE 179 SENSe PROBesp ID SRNu trib6er rire ener er EE ero aia 179 SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETUP MODE 0 eie terrre her reir i e ERNEST 179 SENSE PROBS sp SETUP NAME fire cei cce tr etr cori tcr cadi eee n ab E ve bei aad ee oz demas 180 SENSe PROBe sp SETUp S TAT63 E 180 SENSe PROBesp gt SE LUD TYPE csn an trn tho ta 181 SENSE SWE P COUNT nnnm a a a a a T 207 ABORU EE 228 GALCulatesn DEL Tamarkers m gt AOF Finnar a e i eiA a 256 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimuUm LEFT sisirin ea a a aiana 260 CAL Culate cnz DEL Tamarker mzMAimumNEST nennen nsns n erinnern nnn CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt CAL Culate lt n gt DELTamarker l
196. er SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis lt Hysteresis gt This command defines the trigger hysteresis which is only available for IF Power trig ger sources Parameters lt Hysteresis gt Range 3 dB to 50 dB RST 3 dB Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HYST 10DB Sets the hysteresis limit value Manual operation See Hysteresis on page 94 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel BBPower lt Level gt This command sets the level of the baseband power trigger This command is available for the optional Digital Baseband Interface and the optional Analog Baseband Interface Parameters lt Level gt Range 50 dBm to 20 dBm RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV BBP 30DBM Configuring Code Domain Analysis TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal lt port gt lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the level the external signal must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that the variable INPUT OUTPUT connectors ports 2 3 must be set for use as input using the OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt DIRection command Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port 1 trigger port 1 TRIGGER INPUT connector on front panel 2 trigger port 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on front panel 3 trigger port 3 TRIGGER3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on rear panel Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 0 5V to 3 5 V RST 1 4 V Example TRIG LEV 2V Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 94 TRIGger
197. er in 16 bits determines the half slot in which the channel is active value 1 or inactive value 0 See table 11 5 lt Reserved1 gt Always 0 reserved lt Status gt 0 inactive 1 active Can be used in a setting command to disable a channel tempo rarily lt Reserved2 gt Always 0 reserved Configuring Code Domain Analysis Example INST SEL MDO Activate 1xXEV DO MS CONF CDP CTAB NAME NEW_TAB Select table to edit CONF CDP CTAB DATA 0 4 0 0 65535 0 1 0 1 4 0 0 43690 0 1 0 2 2 2 1 05535 0 1 0 Selects PICH 0 16 on with full activity RRI 0 16 on I in each even numbered half slot and DATA 2 4 on Q with full activity Manual operation See Channel Type on page 105 See Channel Number Walsh Ch SF on page 105 See Status on page 106 See Activity on page 106 Table 11 5 Examples for Activity parameter settings Dec Binary Description 65535 1111 1111 1111 1111 Channel is active in each half slot e g DATA 43690 1010 1010 1010 1010 Channel is active in half slot 0 2 4 etc e g RRI 24576 0110 0000 0000 0000 Channel is active in half slot 1 and 2 e g DRC CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle NAME Name This command creates a new channel table file or selects an existing channel table in order to copy or delete it Parameters Name string with a maximum of 8 characters name of the channel table RST RECENT Example CONF CDP CTAB NAM
198. et gt lt SRATe gt lt CHANnel gt lt SFACtor gt lt TOFFset gt lt POFFset gt lt CDPRelative gt lt CDPabsolute gt lt EVMRms gt lt EVMPeak gt lt MTYPe gt For details on the individual parameters see chapter 3 1 1 Code Domain Parame ters on page 16 Result Summary MS application The command returns 25 values in the following order lt SLOT gt lt PTOTal gt lt PPICh gt lt PRRI gt lt RHO gt lt MACCuracy gt lt PCDerror gt lt ACTive gt lt FERRor gt lt FERPpm gt lt DRPich gt lt RHOVerall gt lt TFRame gt lt CERRor gt lt IQOFfset gt lt IQIMbalance gt lt SRATe gt lt CHANnel gt lt SFACtor gt lt TOFFset gt lt POFFset gt lt CDPRelative gt lt CDPabsolute gt lt EVMRms gt lt EVMPeak gt For details on the individual parameters see chapter 3 1 1 Code Domain Parame ters on page 16 Symbol Constellation When the trace data for this evaluation is queried the real and the imaginary branches of each symbol are returned lt Rep gt lt Imp gt lt Re gt lt Imy gt lt Re gt lt lm gt The number of values depends on the number of symbols and therefore the spreading factor see chapter A 2 Channel Type Characteristics on page 273 Symbol EVM When the trace data for this evaluation is queried one EVM value per symbol is returned lt value in gt The number of values depends on the number of symbols and therefore the sprea
199. evel for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier for analog baseband input the full scale level are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal compression clipping and overload conditions are minimized To determine the optimal reference level a level measurement is performed on the R amp S FSW Code Domain Analysis You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 109 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 210 Auto Scale Window Automatically determines the optimal range and reference level position to be dis played for the current measurement settings in the currently selected window No new measurement is performed Auto Scale All Automatically determines the optimal range and reference level position to be dis played for the current measurement settings in all displayed diagrams No new mea surement is performed Restore Scale Window Restores the default scale settings in the currently selected window Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto Resets the measurement duration for automatic settings to the default value Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE on page 209 Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual This function allows you to change the measurement duration for autom
200. factor and thus on the channel type For details on the relationship between channel types and spreading factors see chap ter A 2 Channel Type Characteristics on page 273 Parameters lt CodeNumber gt Code number depending on the channel type Range 0 to lt Spreading factor gt 1 RST 0 Example CDP CODE 11 Selects code number 11 Manual operation See Channel on page 122 Configuring Code Domain Analysis SENSe CDPower CTYPe lt ChannelType gt This command is used to select the channel type The number of results then changes in most analyses such as code domain power symbol EVM and bit stream because either a different spreading factor or a different number of symbols is available for the analysis Parameters lt ChannelType gt PlLot MAC PREamble DATA RST PILOT Example CDP CTYP MAC Select MAC channel type Manual operation See Channel Type on page 124 SENSe CDPower MAPPing lt SignalComponent gt This command switches between the and Q branch of the signal Parameters lt SignalComponent gt l Q RST Q Example CDP MAPP Q Manual operation See Mapping on page 106 See Branch on page 125 SENSe CDPower MMODe lt Mode gt This command defines the mapping mode either automatically or user defined for all channel types Parameters lt Mode gt AUTO IOQ COMPlex 10Q or Q mapping COMPlex Complex mapping AUTO Mapping is defined automatically according
201. fined channel tables provided by the 1xEV DO applications see chapter A 1 Predefined Channel Tables on page 270 The following channel tables are available by default DO16QAM DO8PSK DO IDLE DOQPSK Channel tables for BTS application 5CHANS PICH PICHRRI Channel tables for MS application Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle CATalog on page 200 Selecting a Table Selects the channel table currently focussed in the Predefined Tables list and com pares it to the measured signal to detect channels Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SELect on page 202 Creating a New Table Creates a new channel table For a description of channel table settings and functions see chapter 6 2 10 3 Channel Table Settings and Functions on page 102 For step by step instructions on creating a new channel table see To define or edit a channel table on page 135 Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle NAME on page 206 Editing a Table You can edit existing channel table definitions The details of the selected channel are displayed in the Channel Table dialog box 6 2 10 3 Code Domain Analysis Copying a Table Copies an existing channel table definition The details of the selected channel are dis played in the Channel Table dialog box Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle COPY on page 201 Deleting a Table Deletes the currently selected channel table after a messa
202. g to the current input data MANual The R amp S FSW uses the measurement length defined by SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation on page 208 RST AUTO Manual operation See Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto on page 109 See Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 109 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWer Threshold When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 210 command the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below compared to the last measurement before the reference level is adapted auto matically Parameters Threshold Range O dB to 200 dB RST 1dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST LOW 2 For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level falls below 18 dBm Manual operation See Lower Level Hysteresis on page 109 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis UPPer Threshold When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 210 command the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can defi
203. ge is confirmed Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DELete on page 202 Restoring Default Tables Restores the predefined channel tables delivered with the instrument Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle RESTore on page 202 Channel Table Settings and Functions Some general settings and functions are available when configuring a predefined channel table Channel tables are configured in the Channel Table dialog box which is displayed when you select the New Copy or Edit buttons for a predefined channel table in the Channel Detection dialog box For details on channel table entries see chapter 6 2 10 4 BTS Channel Details on page 103 or chapter 6 2 10 5 Channel Details MS application on page 105 WINS ee EES a LAS aa 102 COMMEN E o 102 eeler TEE 103 Deleting a Channel 103 Creating a New Channel Table from the Measured Signal Measure Table 103 Sorting the Elo Em 103 Cancelling the Configuration netten entem ERANA 103 SAVNI Me RE 103 Name Name of the channel table that will be displayed in the Predefined Channel Tables list Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle NAME on page 206 Comment Optional description of the channel table Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle COMMent on page 203 6 2 10 4 Code Domain Analysis Adding a Channel Inserts a new row in the channel table to defi
204. h a spectral mask over a range of at least 4 0 MHz around the 1xEV DO carrier To assess the power emissions within the specified range the signal power is measured with a 30kHz filter The resulting trace is compared with a limit line as defined in the 1xEV DO standard The limit lines are automatically selected as a function of the used band class Test setup gt Connect the RF output of the R amp S SMU to the RF input of the R amp S FSW coaxial cable with N connectors Settings on the R amp S SMU 1 PRESET FREQ 878 49 MHz LEVEL 0 dBm DIGITAL STD 1xEV DO DIGITAL STD gt Set Default DIGITAL STD gt LINK DIRECTION gt DOWN FORWARD DIGITAL STD gt 1xEV DO gt STATE ON N Oo a F o wm Settings on the R amp S FSW 1 PRESET 2 MODE gt 1xEV DO BTS 3 AMPT gt Reference level 0 dBm 4 FREQ gt Center frequency 878 49 MHz 5 MEAS gt Spectrum Emission Mask The spectrum of the signal is displayed including the limit line defined in the stand ard To understand where and about how much the measurement has failed the General Result Summary shows the frequencies where the largest spurious emis sions in each range occurred R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurement Examples MultiView 32 Spectrum 1xEV DO BTS Ref Level 0 00 dBm Mode Auto Sweep 1 Spectrum Emission Mask CF 878 608453352 MHz 1001 pts 800 0 kHz Span 8 0 MHz 2 Result Summary cdma2000 BCO DL Power 14 82 dBm Tx Ba
205. h this value all channels with signals such as the 1xEV DO test models are detected by the Code Domain Power analysis Decrease the Inac tive Channel Threshold value if not all channels contained in the signal are detected Remote command SENSe CDPower ICTReshold on page 203 Using Predefined Channel Tables Defines the channel search mode Predefined Compares the input signal to the predefined channel table selected in the Predefined Tables list Auto Detects channels automatically using pilot sequences and fixed code numbers The automatic search provides an overview of the channels con tained in the currently measured signal If channels are not detected as being active change the Inactive Channel Threshold or select the Predefined channel search mode Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle STATe on page 202 Code Domain Analysis 6 2 10 2 Channel Table Management Channel tables are managed in the Channel Detection dialog box which is displayed when you select the Channel Detection button in the configuration Overview Frodomod RE 101 Selecting a KEE 101 Greaung a Now TIDE mida n 101 EOS cM mm 101 Copying a NE SEU 102 agro 102 Restoring Default Tables seen enne nnne 102 Predefined Tables The list shows all available channel tables and marks the currently used table with a checkmark The currently focussed table is highlighted blue For details on prede
206. han the expected ideal value negative symbol phase errors indicate a symbol phase that is less than the ideal one pum PE INN aaa User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 34 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurements and Result Displays 1 Symbol Phase Error Symb 0 Symb 19 Fig 3 20 Symbol Phase Error display for 1xEV DO BTS measurements Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH SPERror see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 220 TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt 1 4 gt 3 2 RF Measurements In addition to the Code Domain Analysis measurements the 1xEV DO firmware appli cations also provide some RF measurements as defined in the 1xEV DO standard RF measurements are identical to the corresponding measurements in the base unit but configured according to the requirements of the 1xEV DO standard For details on these measurements see the R amp S FSW User Manual 3 2 1 RF Measurement Types and Results The 1xEV DO applications provide the following RF measurements Power vs Time BTS application only 35 at ET 36 Chamel Power AGUR resi 37 Spectrum TE RE 38 OCU BIS BINA ET 39 ep HR 40 Power vs Time BTS application only The Power vs Time measurement examines a specified number of half slots Up to 36 half slots can be captured and processed simultaneously That means that for a stand ard measurement of 100 half slots only three data captures are necessary After the data has been capture
207. hannel Comment 1xEV DO standard table Delete Channel Channel Walsh Sym Rate Active Measure Table Ch SF ksps Modulation Mapping State 0 HALFSLOT 15 Pilot 0 16 76 8 BPSK I I 1111111111111111 0 16 76 8 BPSK I 1010101010101010 Sort Table 4 8 153 6 BPSK I 0000000000001000 8 16 76 8 307 2 BPSK Q 0110000000000000 BPSK Q 1111111111111111 For details on the individual parameters see chapter 3 1 1 Code Domain Parame ters on page 16 INE T 105 Channel Number Walsh C S F locucion 105 SOV UMNO ERM er 106 ME ME 106 MAPPING DEE 106 ee TEE 106 e 106 Channel Type Type of channel according to 1xEV DO standard For a list of possible channel types see chapter 4 4 2 MS Channel Types on page 48 Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 205 Channel Number Walsh Ch SF Channel number consisting of walsh channel code and spreading factor Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 205 Code Domain Analysis Symbol Rate Symbol rate at which the channel is transmitted Modulation Modulation type used for transmission For a list of available modulation types see table 1 10 Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 203 Mapping Branch onto which the channel is mapped I or Q The setting is not editable since the standard specifies the channel assignment for each channel For more information see cha
208. hase synchronization always requires a pilot channel Pilot or Auxiliary Pilot Synchronization is usually only successful if both frame and frequency phase synchronization were performed correctly Auto synchronization Using auto synchronization mode the following modes are tried sequentially until syn chronization was successful If none of the methods was successful a failed synchroni zation is reported If the result of the correlation methods sync on Pilot and Auxiliary Pilot becomes increasingly worse due to bad power conditions the non data aided synchronization works optimally and synchronization should be successful Pilot synchronization For frame synchronization this method uses the correlation characteristic of the known pilot channel i e pilot channel sequence spreading code including scrambling sequence The correlation must be calculated for all hypotheses of the scrambling code 32768 for external triggers only 2048 in order to get the correct peak at the position where the frame begins This correlation method may fail if the power of the underlying pilot channel is too low compared to the total power In this case the expec ted correlation peak is hidden by the upcoming auto correlation noise of the bad hypothesis The frequency phase synchronization also takes advantage of the known linear phase of the pilot channel User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 46 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurement Basics Auxiliary
209. he INPUT OUTPUT key in the Input dialog box input Input Source Power Sensor Frequency boxx Digital 1Q Input Sample Rate 10 0 MHz Auto KEE IQR 100 101165 Digital IQ OUT 10 MHz 10 dBm For more information see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Digital VG put State m 74 PIU campo EE 74 Full Scale EE 74 Code Domain Analysis Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level esee 74 Connected InstrulTielt EE 74 proe pem 75 Digital UO Input State Enables or disable the use of the Digital IQ input source for measurements Digital IQ is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is installed Remote command INPut SELect on page 168 Input Sample Rate Defines the sample rate of the digital UO signal source This sample rate must corre spond with the sample rate provided by the connected device e g a generator If Auto is selected the sample rate is adjusted automatically by the connected device The allowed range is from 100 Hz to 10 GHz Remote command INPut DIQ SRATe on page 171 INPut DIQ SRATe AUTO on page 172 Full Scale Level The Full Scale Level defines the level and unit that should correspond to an UO sam ple with the magnitude 1 If Auto is selected the level is automatically set to the value provided by the connec ted device Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer on page 171 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer
210. he application data range is defined by the same settings used to define the signal capturing in Signal and Spec trum Analyzer mode see Number of Sets on page 98 In addition a capture offset can be defined i e an offset from the start of the captured data to the start of the analysis interval for the 1xEV DO BTS measurement see Cap ture Offset on page 95 The analysis interval cannot be edited manually but is determined automatically according to the selected channel slot or set to analyze which is defined for the evalu ation range depending on the result display Note that the channel slot set is analyzed within the application data Synchronization MS application only The Synchronization settings are only available for MS measurements They define how channels are synchronized for channel detection Sync To Defines the synchronization mode for frame synchronization detection of the first chip of the frame Two methods use the known sequence of a pilot channel Pilot or Auxili ary Pilot a third does not require a pilot channel For details see chapter 4 3 Synchronization MS application only on page 46 Code Domain Analysis Auto The following modes are tried sequentially until synchronization was successful If none of the methods was successful a failed synchroni zation is reported Pilot Uses the correlation characteristic of the known pilot channel Auxiliary Pilot Similar to synchronizatio
211. he binary format used for samples in the UO data binary file see DataFilename element and chapter A 4 2 I Q Data Binary File on page 279 The following data types are allowed int8 8 bit signed integer data int16 16 bit signed integer data int32 32 bit signed integer data float32 32 bit floating point data IEEE 754 float64 64 bit floating point data IEEE 754 Q Data File Format iq tar Element Description ScalingFactor Optional describes how the binary data can be transformed into values in the unit Volt The binary UO data itself has no unit To get an UO sample in the unit Volt the saved samples have to be multiplied by the value of the ScalingFactor For polar data only the magnitude value has to be multiplied For multi channel signals the ScalingFactor must be applied to all channels The attribute unit must be set to v The ScalingFactor must be gt 0 If the ScalingFactor element is not defined a value of 1 V is assumed NumberOfChan Optional specifies the number of channels e g of a MIMO signal contained in the nels 1 Q data binary file For multi channels the UO samples of the channels are expected to be interleaved within the UO data file see chapter A 4 2 I Q Data Binary File on page 279 If the NumberOfChannels element is not defined one channel is assumed DataFilename Contains the filename of the UO data binary file that is part of the iq tar file It is recommended that
212. he channel table b Define the channel specifications required for detection 5 Select the Save Table button to store the channel table The table is stored and the dialog box is closed The new channel table is included in the Predefined Tables list in the Channel Detection dialog box 6 To activate the use of the new channel table a Select the table in the Predefined Tables list b Select the Select button A checkmark is displayed next to the selected table c Toggle the Use Predefined Channel Table setting to Predefined d Toggle the Compare Meas Signal with Predefined Table setting to On e Start anew measurement To perform an RF measurement 1 Press the MODE key and select the 1xEV DO BTS application for base station tests or 1xEV DO MS for mobile station tests Code Domain Analysis of the input signal is performed by default 2 Select the RF measurement a Press the MEAS key b Inthe Select Measurement dialog box select the required measurement The selected measurement is activated with the default settings for 1xEV DO immediately User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 135 R amp S FSW 84 K85 How to Perform Measurements in 1xEV DO Applications eee 3 Ifnecessary adapt the settings as described for the individual measurements in the R amp S FSW User Manual 4 Select the Display Config button and select the evaluation methods that are of interest to you Arrange them on the display t
213. he selected channel and the selected slot The BTS application supports BPSK QPSK 8PSK 16QAM and 64QAM modulation types The modulation type itself depends on the channel type Refer to chapter A 2 Channel Type Characteristics on page 273 for further information Note QPSK constellation points are located on the diagonals not x and y axis of the constellation diagram BPSK constellation points are always on the x axis IESSE User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 32 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurements and Result Displays 3 Symbol Constellation Fig 3 17 Symbol Constellation display in the BTS application The number of symbols is in the range from 1 to 100 depending on the symbol rate of the channel see chapter A 2 Channel Type Characteristics on page 273 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH SCONst see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 220 CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 234 Symbol EVM The Symbol EVM evaluation shows the error between the measured signal and the ideal reference signal in percent for the selected channel and the selected slot A trace over all symbols of a slot is drawn 4 Symbol EVM 1 Symb Fig 3 18 Symbol EVM display in the BTS application The number of symbols is in the range from 1 to 100 depending on the symbol rate of the channel see chapter A 2 Channel Type Characteristics on page 273 User Manual
214. he specified trigger level See Trigger Level on page 94 Note The External Trigger 1 softkey automatically selects the trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT connector on the front panel For details see the Instrument Tour chapter in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual External Trigger 1 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 1 INPUT connector External Trigger 2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 2 INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input in the Outputs con figuration see Trigger 2 3 on page 79 Code Domain Analysis External Trigger 3 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Note Connector must be configured for Input in the Outputs con figuration see Trigger 2 3 on page 79 Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT TRIG SOUR EXT2 TRIG SOUR EXT3 See TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 193 Digital I Q Trigger Source Trigger Source For applications that process l Q data such as the I Q Analyzer or optional applica tions and only if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is available Defines triggering of the measurement directly via the LVDS connector In the selection list you must specify which general purpose bit GPO to GP5 will provide the trigger data Note If the Digital UO enhanced mode is used i e the connected device supports transfer rates up to 200 Msps only the general purpose bits GPO and GP1 are available a
215. hes between the evaluation of the or the Q branch or the complex signal in BTS measurements Mapping can be defined manually for all channels or automatically depending on the channel type Table 7 1 Automatic mapping according to channel type for evaluation Channel type Mapping Pilot lor Q MAC lor Q Preamble lor Q Data Complex This setting affects the following evaluations e Code Domain Power e Code Domain Error Power Peak Code Domain Error Power vs slot 7 4 Evaluation Range MS application e Result Summary Remote command SENSe CDPower MMODe on page 214 Channel Type In the 1xEV DO BTS signals each of the four channel types occurs at a specific time within each slot Thus instead of selecting a code you can also select which channel type is to be evaluated and displayed directly By default the Pilot channel as the first in the slot is evaluated e Pilot e MAC e Preamble e Data For further details on the characteristics of the channel types refer to chapter A 2 Channel Type Characteristics on page 273 Remote command SENSe CDPower CTYPe on page 214 Evaluation Range MS application The evaluation range defines which part of the signal is analyzed in the result display Channel Slot Set Select Branch Channel a a EES 124 e Ee 125 MCL LO AMAL YZ e 125 SA 125 Channel Selects a channel for the following evaluations see also chapter 3 1 2
216. hich a single channel must have com pared to the total signal in order to be regarded as an active channel Channels below the specified threshold are regarded as inactive Parameters lt ThresholdLevel gt Range 100 to 10 RST 40 dB Default unit dB Example CDP ICTR 10 Sets the minimum power threshold to 10 dB Manual operation See Inactive Channel Threshold on page 100 Configuring Channel Tables Some general settings and functions are available when configuring a predefined channel table CONFioure CDbower BITGlCTAbBle COMMent nennen nnn nnne 203 GONFigure GDPower BTS CTABle DATA coo nissan trabada no Ron een an 203 CONFloure CDbowerf BTGICTABe DATA 205 CONFiquresGDPowerBTS CTABIE NAME ciutat eg ene tot adn eee NEES 206 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle COMMent Comment This command defines a comment for the selected channel table Prior to this command the name of the channel table has to be defined with command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle NAME on page 206 Parameters Comment Example CONF CDP CTAB NAME NEW TAB Defines the channel table name CONF CDP CTAB COMM Comment for table 1 Defines a comment for the table CONF CDP CTAB DATA 8 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 00 9 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 005T7 1 0 256 8 0 1 0 00 Defines the table values Manual operation See Comment on page 102 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA lt ChannelType gt lt CodeClass gt lt CodeNumber gt
217. ho Pilot RHOPilot BTS application only RHO over all slots for the PILOT area Trigger to Frame TFRame Reflects the time offset from the beginning of the captured signal section to the start of the first slot In case of triggered data acqui sition this corresponds to the timing offset timing offset frame trigger trigger offset start of first slot If it was not possible to synchronize the R amp S FSW to the 1xEV DO signal this measurement result is meaningless For the Free Run trigger mode dashes are displayed 9 in remote com mands Slot or Half Slot Parameters The following parameters refer to the total signal that is all channels for the selected slot or half slot Table 3 2 Code domain power parameters for a specific half slot Parameter SCPI Param Description eter Active Data Chs DACTive Number of active Data channels Active MAC Chs MACTive Number of active MAC channels Composite EVM MACCuracy The difference between the measured signal and the ideal refer ence signal in percent For further details refer to Composite EVM on page 26 Data Mode Type DMTYpe BTS application only Modulation type in the DATA channel type 2 QPSK 3 8 PSK 4 16 QAM 10 64 QAM IQ Imbalance IQIMbalance IQ imbalance of the signal in IQ Offset IQOFfset IQ offset of the signal in 96 Code Domain Analysis Parameter SCPI Param Description eter
218. ication with the following set tings Table 6 3 Predefined settings for 1xEV DO Output Channel Power measurements Setting Default Value ACLR Standard 1xEV DO MC1 Number of adjacent channels 0 Frequency Span 2MHz For further details about the Power measurement refer to Channel Power and Adja cent Channel Power ACLR Measurements in the R amp S FSW User Manual 6 3 3 Channel Power ACLR Measurements The Adjacent Channel Power measurement analyzes the power of the Tx channel and the power of adjacent and alternate channels on the left and right side of the Tx chan nel The number of Tx channels and adjacent channels can be modified as well as the band class The bandwidth and power of the Tx channel and the bandwidth spacing and power of the adjacent and alternate channels are displayed in the Result Sum mary Channel Power ACLR measurements are performed as in the Spectrum application with the following predefined settings according to 1xEV DO specifications adjacent channel leakage ratio Table 6 4 Predefined settings for 1xEV DO ACLR Channel Power measurements Setting Default value Bandclass 0 800 MHz Cellular Number of adjacent channels 2 For further details about the ACLR measurements refer to Measuring Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power in the R amp S FSW User Manual To restore adapted measurement parameters the following parameters are saved on exiting and are re
219. ied bandwidth and spectrum emission mask with predefined settings Functions that are not discussed in this manual are the same as in the Spectrum appli cation and are described in the R amp S FSW User Manual The latest version is available for download at the product homepage http www2 rohde schwarz com product FSW html Installation You can find detailed installation instructions in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual or in the Release Notes R amp S FSW 84 K85 Welcome to the 1xEV DO Applications 2 1 2 2 Starting the 1xEV DO Applications The 1xEV DO measurements require special applications on the R amp S FSW To activate the 1xEV DO applications 1 Select the MODE key A dialog box opens that contains all operating modes and applications currently available on your R amp S FSW 2 Select the 1xEV DO BTS or 1xEV DO MS item DO EW 1xEV DO BTS 1xEV DO MS The R amp S FSW opens a new measurement channel for the 1xEV DO application The measurement is started immediately with the default settings It can be configured in the 1xEV DO Overview dialog box which is displayed when you select the Over view softkey from any menu see chapter 6 2 2 Configuration Overview on page 63 Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function When you activate an application a new measurement channel is created which deter mines the measurement settings for that application The same applicat
220. ignals from different base stations can be distinguished quickly by the 1xEV DO BTS application if the PN R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurement Basics Offset is defined in the signal description and an external trigger is used to provide a reference for the start phase If no offset is specified or no external trigger is available calculation is much slower as the correct PN must be determined from all possible positions During short code scrambling the channel data is split up into and Q components Long code scrambling Mobile stations also use a PN short code but with a fixed or no offset Additionally a complex long code is used for scrambling making the data less susceptible to inter ference The long code used by a mobile station is defined by a mask on either branch These masks are required by the 1xEV DO MS application to distinguish the senders and are defined in the signal description During long code scrambling the channel data is mapped either to the or to the Q branch of the complex input signal 4 3 Synchronization MS application only The 1xEV DO MS application has two synchronization stages the frame synchroniza tion detection of the first chip of the frame and the rough frequency phase synchroni zation For the frame synchronization different methods are implemented Two meth ods use the known sequence of a pilot channel Pilot or Auxiliary Pilot a third does not require a pilot channel The frequency p
221. ilable Off Deactivates the preamplifier 15 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 15 dB 6 2 5 3 Code Domain Analysis 30 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 30 dB Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 186 INPut GAIN VALue on page 187 Amplitude Settings for Analog Baseband Input The following settings and functions are available to define amplitude settings for input via the optional Analog Baseband Interface in the applications that support it They can be configured via the AMPT key or in the Amplitude tab of the Input dialog box Amplitude Scale Reference Level Input Settings Offset Unit Auto Level Full Scale Level Mode Value The input settings provided here are identical to those in the Input Source gt Analog Baseband tab see Analog Baseband Input Settings on page 75 For more information on the optional Analog Baseband Interface see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Pieter eeh sated id Lidia ad add banner 88 L Shifting the Display Offset 89 e PT 89 L Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level 89 Full Scale Level Mode Value nr 89 Reference Level Defines the expected maximum reference level Signal levels above this value may not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IF OVLD status display OVLD for analog baseband or digitial baseband input The reference level is also used to scale power diagr
222. ilot 1 0 32 BPSK I Mac 5 2 64 RA BPSK I 3 64 BPSK I 4 64 BPSK I 34 64 BPSK Q 35 64 BPSK Q Preamble 64 chips long 1 3 32 BPSK I Data 16 0 16 8 PSK 1 16 8 PSK 2 16 8 PSK 13 16 8 PSK 14 16 8 PSK 15 16 8 PSK Table 1 3 Base station channel table DO16QAM with 16QAM modulation in DATA area Channel Type Number of Code Channel Walsh Modulation Channels Code SF Mapping Pilot 1 0 32 BPSK I Mac 5 2 64 RA BPSK I 3 64 BPSK I 4 64 BPSK I 34 64 BPSK Q 35 64 BPSK Q Predefined Channel Tables Channel Type Number of Code Channel Walsh Modulation Channels Code SF Mapping Preamble 64 chips long 1 3 32 BPSK I Data 16 0 16 16QAM 1 16 16QAM 2 16 16QAM 13 16 16QAM 14 16 16QAM 15 16 16QAM Table 1 4 Base station test model DO IDLE for idle slot configuration Channel Type Number of Code Channel Walsh Modulation Channels Code SF Mapping Pilot 1 0 32 BPSK I Mac 5 2 64 RA BPSK I Table 1 5 Mobile station channel table PICH Channel type Code channel Mapping Activity Walsh Code SF PICH 0 16 l 1111 1111 1111 1111 Table 1 6 Mobile station channel table PICHRRI Channel type Code channel Mapping Activity Walsh Code SF PICH 0 16 l 1111 1111 1111 1111 RRI 0 16 l 1010 1010 1010 1010 Table 1 7 Mobile station channel table 5CHANS Channel type Code channel Mapping Activity Walsh Code SF PICH 0 16 l 1111 1111 1111 1111 RRI 0 16 l 1
223. ing a matching pad of the RAZ type 25 Q in series to the input impedance of the instrument The power loss correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 The command is not available for measurements with the optional Digital Baseband Interface Parameters Impedance 50 75 RST 50 Q 11 5 2 2 Configuring Code Domain Analysis Example INP IMP 75 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Impedance on page 71 INPut SELect lt Source gt This command selects the signal source for measurements i e it defines which con nector is used to input data to the R amp S FSW If no additional input options are instal led only RF input is supported Parameters lt Source gt RF Radio Frequency RF INPUT connector DIQ Digital IQ data only available with optional Digital Baseband Interface For details on UO input see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer User Manual AIQ Analog Baseband signal only available with optional Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 For details on Analog Baseband input see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer User Manual RST RF Manual operation See Radio Frequency State on page 71 See Digital UO Input State on page 74 See Analog Baseband Input State on page 76 Remote Commands for the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 The following commands are required to control the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 in a remote environment They are only av
224. ing commands also depend on the selected measure ment channel Note that the suffix n always refers to the window in the currently selected measure ment channel see INSTrument SELect on page 159 X dotiu pip WINDOW rx 220 LAYOURCA Talog WMINDON KEE 222 de De RTE 223 LAYout REMove WINDOW cccccecececee cece eaeeea ee ee eae nemememnnnemennnnnn nnns ns nn tr tr sre rei erar nnn nens 223 Bd Dr Lace WINDOW m 223 LA YOUES PAG EE 223 LAYOUT Oh eene EE 225 LAYOUt WINDOW lt A gt DENUN P cana na nnnnnn nn aidaa aatan aiaia nennen 225 Bd e uk ee 226 LAYOUT WINDOWSA REPLACE 226 LAYout ADD WINDow lt WindowName gt lt Direction gt lt WindowType gt This command adds a window to the display in the active measurement channel This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result To replace an existing window use the LAYout REPLace WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window the new win dow is inserted next to By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query lt Direction gt LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow Direction the new window is added relative to the existing win dow lt WindowType gt text value Type of result display evaluation method you want to
225. input coupling e YIG filter state After initial setup the parameters for the measurement channel are stored upon exiting and restored upon re entering the channel Thus you can switch between applications quickly and easily Apart from these settings the following default settings are activated directly after a 1xEV DO application is activated or after a Preset Channel The following default settings of the Code Domain Analysis are activated Configuration Overview Throughout the measurement channel configuration an overview of the most important currently defined settings is provided in the Overview The Overview is displayed when you select the Overview icon which is available at the bottom of all softkey menus Code Domain Analysis Code Power Palat Predel Tables Table Nome tele atom 1 Code Domain Power In addition to the main measurement settings the Overview provides quick access to the main settings dialog boxes Thus you can easily configure an entire measurement channel from input over processing to output and evaluation by stepping through the dialog boxes as indicated in the Overview The available settings and functions in the Overview vary depending on the currently selected measurement For RF measurements see chapter 6 3 RF Measurements on page 111 For Code Domain Analysis the Overview provides quick access to the following con figuration dialog boxes listed in the recom
226. ion can be acti vated with different measurement settings by creating several channels for the same application The number of channels that can be configured at the same time depends on the avail able memory on the instrument Only one measurement can be performed at any time namely the one in the currently active channel However in order to perform the configured measurements consecu tively a Sequencer function is provided If activated the measurements configured in the currently active channels are per formed one after the other in the order of the tabs The currently active measurement is indicated by a 8 symbol in the tab label The result displays of the individual channels are updated in the tabs as well as the MultiView as the measurements are per formed Sequential operation itself is independent of the currently displayed tab For details on the Sequencer function see the R amp S FSW User Manual Understanding the Display Information The following figure shows a measurement diagram during a 1xEV DO BTS measure ment All different information areas are labeled They are explained in more detail in the following sections The basic screen elements are identical for 1xEV DO MS measurements User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 12 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Welcome to the 1xEV DO Applications MultiView 1xEV DO BTS CDMA2000 BTS Ref Level 1E Freq 132 Hz Channel 2 Code Power F 1 Att 1043 Slot f Channel Type 1
227. ions or assignments to a numeric value are used as described in chapter 11 5 7 Channel Detection on page 199 Specific commands e Retrieving Calculated CDA Res lts ccs tenni teens 233 e Retrieving GDA Trace Resulls cernere bec cette tet de te eat 238 e Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACEems sss 239 Exporting Trate ET 248 e Retrieving RF Results esce tc nitccarda 249 11 9 1 Retrieving Calculated CDA Results The following commands describe how to retrieve the calculated results from the CDA measurements CALOCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESUIt sees 234 GALCulatesmsMARISEFSIIPSY Q cites tte vo ecu A a ede d euo 237 Retrieving Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult lt Parameter gt This command queries individual parameters from the measured and calculated results of the 1xEV DO code domain power measurement For details on individual parameters see chapter 3 1 1 Code Domain Parameters on page 16 Query parameters lt Parameter gt Retrieving Results For each result add the corresponding query parameter ACTive Number of active channels CDERms MS application RMS value of EVM error vector magnitude of composite data channel CDEPeak MS application Peak value of EVM error vector magnitude of composite data channel CDPabsolute Channel power absolute in dBm CDPRela
228. iple zoom on and off Suffix lt zoom gt 1 4 Selects the zoom window If you turn off one of the zoom windows all subsequent zoom windows move up one position Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 110 See Restore Original Display on page 110 See RK Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 110 Starting a Measurement The measurement is started immediately when an 1xEV DO application is activated however you can stop and start a new measurement any time EE I TT 228 INUTiateSth gt CON MG aS m 229 INITIate lt gt 2CON ge EE 230 INlTlate nzfiMMedatel cece eaeae eee ea eae eee tetedeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesesasanaaaaaaaeaaenes 230 INITiate lt n gt SEQUENCEMABORE EE 231 INITlate nz GEOuencerJMMedate seen enennn nnns nnns anidar ASERTE 231 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer MODE occoocccccconnccccocnnnnoconnnonnnnncnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnonannnnnnnnncnnnnnnonans 231 INITate lt n SEQuencern REFResh p ALL ea ttt ARA 232 SVS TMS E QUe ine E 232 ABORt This command aborts the measurement in the current measurement channel and resets the trigger system Starting a Measurement To prevent overlapping execution of the subsequent command before the measure ment has been aborted successfully use the OPC or WAT command after ABOR and before the next command For details see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manu
229. isplay on page 130 Positioning the Marker This chapter contains remote commands necessary to position the marker on a trace e Positioning Normal MaIKOls eocer tiet pnt e n et pude atados 258 e Positioning Delta Maker ite e eene tbt e eee eege 260 Positioning Normal Markers The following commands position markers on the trace CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum LEFT cccc0sccccesccceceseecsseeeecenccecseseeceeeceeeneeeaes 258 CAL Culate nz M AbkermzMAximumNENT 259 CAL Culate nzM Abkercm M AXimumf PDEAK nono 259 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzM AximumbRlGHt seen en nsns n nsns s nnns aan 259 CAL Culate nz M Abkermz MiNimum LEET 259 CAL Culate nz M Abkermz MiNimumNENT esee nens a aaia iaa 259 CALCulate n MARKer m MlNimum PEAK cessisse nennen nena 259 CAL Culate nz M bker mmz MiNimum BIG 260 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command moves a marker to the next lower peak The search includes only measurement values to the left of the current marker posi tion Usage Event General Analysis CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next lower peak Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 132 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the highest level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event
230. isting window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt REPLace command This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result Parameters lt Direction gt LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to add See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 220 for a list of availa ble window types Return values lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Example LAY WIND1 ADD LEFT MTAB Result 2 Adds a new window named 2 with a marker table to the left of window 1 Usage Query only LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify This command queries the name of a particular display window indicated by the lt n gt suffix in the active measurement channel Note to query the index of a particular window use the LAYout IDENtifyl WINDow command Return values lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window In the default state the name of the window is its index Usage Query only R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements 11 7 3 11 7 3 1 LAYout WINDow lt n gt REMove This command removes the window specified by the suffix lt n gt from the display in the active measurement channel The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REMove NINDow command Usage Event LAYout WINDow lt n gt REPLace l
231. ital UO remote A 171 H Hadamard AA ee ert ral 53 120 211 Half slot e 30 Hardware settings ele EU E 13 High pass filter une 167 PRE ANU EE 72 Hysteresis Lower Auto level naciona as 109 Trigger tua Upper Auto level eee 109 l 1 Q data Export file binary data description Export file parameter description EXDpOrFlifig BE E Exporting rermiote count nme tut jore Importing remote Irporting EXporting occorre or teme cene UO Power Trigger level remote sese 192 IF Power net Dui aste oa o eset co ene 93 Trigger level remote seesse 192 Impedance Remolino 167 Setting Importing A 59 60 62 276 l Q data r mote EE 261 fec geesde ege ee tee 60 Inactive Channel Threshold occcccnnocccncccccnnccnnooo 100 203 Inactive channels xci ME 17 Input Analog Baseband Interface B71 settings 75 Connector remote seseeee 165 COUPIING E Coupling remote is Digital Baseband Interface settings 73 Overload remote AA 165 hime een Geert 71 E Un Le EE 70 87 Source Configuration softkey ssss 70 Source connection errors 173 Source Radio frequency RF sss 70 Input sample rate ISR Digital Ir rsen f edel 74 Input sources Analog Basebarnd eere tene 76 Digi
232. ite Data EVM MS application sometime 245 e Composite EVM RMS heann te esae x e SUE 245 e IMagiENOrVS 5 rom 245 Peak Code Domain EMO anisina Eee ita eae 246 e Phase EMOS OD aos 246 e Power vs Chip BTS applicaton sess 246 Power vs Half Slot MS appliCallon 2 riter eaa Eee tti et 246 e POWER VS Symbol tei aio 246 e Power vs Time BTS application 246 e Result Summary Channel Results General Results BTS application 247 e Result Summary MS application ocio 247 Ee Deele TE Le DE 247 ONDO EE 247 Bitstream The command returns the bitstream of one slot i e it returns one value for each bit ina symbol lt bit 1 gt lt bit 2 gt lt bit n gt The number of symbols per slot depends on the spreading factor while the number of returned bits per symbol depends on the modulation type see chapter A 2 Channel Type Characteristics on page 273 Accordingly the bitstream per slot is of different lengths If a channel is detected as being inactive the invalid bits in the bit stream are marked by the value 9 Channel Table Two different commands are available to retrieve the channel table results e TRAC DATA TRACEx commands return detailed trace information for each chan nel e TRAC DATA CTABle provides the maximum values of the timing phase offset between each assigned channel and the pilot channel Results for TRACEx Parameters The command retu
233. ized to the square root of the average power at the selected slot 11 9 3 15 Power vs Chip BTS application The command returns one value for each chip lt level value in dBm gt The number of results that are displayed is always 2048 one power level for each chip 11 9 3 16 Power vs Half Slot MS application The command returns one value pair for each half slot lt half slot number gt lt level value in dB gt The number of returned value pairs corresponds to the number of captured half slots 11 9 3 17 Power vs Symbol The command returns one value for each symbol lt value in dBm gt The number of values depends on the number of symbols and therefore the spreading factor see chapter A 2 Channel Type Characteristics on page 273 11 9 3 18 Power vs Time BTS application The command returns two values for each sweep point power value in dBm gt measurement time in uis 11 9 3 19 11 9 3 20 11 9 3 21 11 9 3 22 Retrieving Results Result Summary Channel Results General Results BTS application The command returns 30 values for the selected channel in the following order lt FERRor gt lt FERPpm gt lt CERRor gt lt TFRame gt lt RHOPilot gt lt RHO1 gt lt RHO2 gt lt PPILot gt lt PMAC gt lt PDATa gt lt PPReamble gt lt MACCuracy gt lt DMTYpe gt lt MAC Tive gt lt DACTive gt lt PLENGth gt lt RHO gt lt PCDerror gt lt IQIMbalance gt lt IQOFfs
234. l slot or set to analyze which is defined for the evalu ation range depending on the result display The analysis interval can not be edited directly in the 1xEV DO BTS application but is changed automatically when you change the evaluation range Analysis line A frequent question when analyzing multi standard signals is how each data channel is correlated in time to others Thus an analysis line has been introduced The analysis line is a common time marker for all MSRA applications It can be positioned in any MSRA application or the MSRA Master and is then adjusted in all other applications Thus you can easily analyze the results at a specific time in the measurement in all applications and determine correlations Ifthe marked point in time is contained in the analysis interval of the application the line is indicated in all time based result displays such as time symbol slot or bit dia grams By default the analysis line is displayed however it can be hidden from view manually In all result displays the AL label in the window title bar indicates whether or not the analysis line lies within the analysis interval or not e orange AL the line lies within the interval e white AL the line lies within the interval but is not displayed hidden e no AL the line lies outside the interval User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 57 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurement Basics 1 Code Domain nal Power lysis Ir Code 0 Code 1
235. lable for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface In Manual mode you can set the RF attenuation in 1 dB steps down to 0 dB Other entries are rounded to the next integer value The range is specified in the data sheet If the defined reference level cannot be set for the defined RF attenuation the refer ence level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed NOTICE Risk of hardware damage due to high power levels When decreasing the attenuation manually ensure that the power level does not exceed the maximum level allowed at the RF input as an overload may lead to hardware damage Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 187 INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 188 Code Domain Analysis Using Electronic Attenuation If the optional Electronic Attenuation hardware is installed on the R amp S FSW you can also activate an electronic attenuator In Auto mode the settings are defined automatically in Manual mode you can define the mechanical and electronic attenuation separately This function is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface Note Electronic attenuation is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span gt 13 6 GHz In Auto mode RF attenuation is provided by the electronic attenuator as much as possible to reduce the amount of mechanical switching required Mechanical attenua tion may provide a better signal to noise ratio
236. le FREQ OFFS 1GHZ Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Frequency Offset on page 84 Amplitude and Scaling Settings Useful commands for amplitude settings described elsewhere INPut COUPling on page 166 e INPut IMPedance on page 167 SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 210 Remote commands exclusive to amplitude settings DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTR ACectstSCALelAUlTOONCE 184 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MAXIMUM ccec cece cece eee eneeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 185 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MINIMUM ceeeeeeeee eee ee eee ae eee ae ee ae eeneneteeeneees 185 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTR ACectz lt SCALelb Dhvislon nnn 185 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel 2 cccceceeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 186 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTR ACectzvltSCALelbRlEVelOEtzGet nenen er en errrererene 186 INPUEGAIN ESTA TO E 186 INP VA ia iii RR id i 187 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO ONCE Automatic scaling of the y axis is performed once then switched off again for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Auto Scale Once on page 90 Configuring Code Domain Analysis DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MAXimum Value This command defines the maximum value of the y axis for all traces in the selected result display The suffix lt t gt is irrelevant Parameters
237. le Station Tests 54 CDA Measurements in MSRA Operating Mode eee 56 UO Data Import and Export cccccccccccccccncccncnonanananannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 59 Import Export FUNCTIONS ccceceeeeeecee EENEG 59 Configuratio E 61 Result DiS play iii cette ERE Eeer esch 61 Code Domain Analysis trei ie 62 RE E EE 111 e 118 Code Domain Analysis Settings BTS application SEENEN NEEN 118 User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 3 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Contents 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 7 7 8 1 10 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 11 11 1 11 2 11 3 11 4 11 5 11 6 11 7 11 8 11 9 11 10 11 11 11 12 11 13 11 14 Code Domain Analysis Settings MS application esses 119 Evaluation Range BTS application eere 122 Evaluation Range MS application eeeeeeennneeennnn nn 124 Channel Table Configuration eese nnne nennen nennen 126 ll A 126 Markere 127 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement 133 Error ET EL E 133 How to Perform Measurements in 1xEV DO Applications 134 Measurement ExampleS ocunicaiainsanassas 138 Meas 1 Measuring the Signal Channel Power eene 138 Meas 2 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask
238. lid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single measurement mode See also INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 230 Return values lt Result gt Result at the marker position Retrieving Results Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single measurement mode CALC MARK2 ON Switches marker 2 INIT WAI Starts a measurement and waits for the end CALC MARK2 Y Outputs the measured value of marker 2 Usage Query only Manual operation See CCDF on page 40 See Marker Table on page 42 See Marker Peak List on page 42 11 9 2 Retrieving CDA Trace Results The following commands describe how to retrieve the trace data from the CDA mea surements Note that for these measurements only 1 trace per window can be config ured FORMat DATA lt Format gt This command selects the data format that is used for transmission of trace data from the R amp S FSW to the controlling computer Note that the command has no effect for data that you send to the R amp S FSW The R amp S FSW automatically recognizes the data it receives regardless of the format Parameters lt Format gt ASCii ASCii format separated by commas This format is almost always suitable regardless of the actual data format However the data is not as compact as other for mats may be REAL 32 32 bit IEEE 754 floating point
239. lot limit RHO2 BTS application RHO oyeran 2 over all slots over all chips with averaging starting at the quarter slot limit RHOData BTS application RHO over all half slots for the DATA area RHOMac BTS application RHO over all half slots for the MAC area RHOPilot BTS application RHO over all slots for the PILOT area RHOVerall Retrieving Results BTS application RHO over all half slots SFACtor Spreading factor of channel SLOT BTS application Half slot number SRATe Symbol rate in ksps TFRame Trigger to frame TOFFset Timing offset in s Example CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES PTOT Usage Query only Manual operation See BTS Channel Results on page 21 See Code Domain Power Code Domain Error Power on page 22 See Composite Constellation on page 24 See Composite Data Bitstream MS application only on page 24 See Composite Data Constellation MS application only on page 25 See Composite EVM on page 26 See General Results BTS application only on page 26 See Peak Code Domain Error on page 28 See Power vs Halfslot MS application only on page 30 See Power vs Symbol on page 31 See Result Summary MS application only on page 32 See Symbol Constellation on page 32 See Symbol EVM on page 33 CAL Culate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y This command queries the position of a marker on the y axis If necessary the command activates the marker first To get a va
240. lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 234 Channel Table The Channel Table evaluation displays the detected channels and the results of the code domain power measurement over the selected slot The analysis results for all channels are displayed 2 Channel Table 1 Cirw Channel Walsh SymRate Power Power T Offs P Offs Type Ch SF ksps dBm dB ns mrad Fig 3 3 Channel Table display in the BTS application For details on the individual parameters see chapter 3 1 1 Code Domain Parame ters on page 16 The channels that must be available in the signal to be analyzed and any other control channels are displayed first The data channels that are contained in the signal are displayed last If the type of a channel can be fully recognized based on pilot sequences or modula tion type the type is indicated in the table The channels are in descending order according to symbol rates and within a symbol rate in ascending order according to the channel numbers Therefore the inactive codes are always displayed at the end of the table if Show inactive channels is enabled see chapter 7 5 Channel Table Configuration on page 126 Which parameters are displayed in the Channel Table is configurable see chapter 7 5 Channel Table Configuration on page 126 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH CTABle see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 220 Code Domain Power Code Domain Error Power The Code Domai
241. ly in MSRA mode In MSRA mode UO data can only be exported to other applications l Q data cannot be imported to the MSRA Master or any MSRA applications e Import Export PUNCUONS ss cene rrr crean e Rete RR dde eae ete ER ern EEN 59 5 1 Import Export Functions The following import and export functions are available via softkeys in the Save Recall menu which is displayed when you select the Save or Open icon in the tool p bar Some functions for particular data types are also available via softkeys or dialog boxes in the corresponding menus e g trace data or marker peak lists For a description of the other functions in the Save Recall menu see the R amp S FSW User Manual IMPOR MITT 60 LY TT EE 60 EXPO EE 60 A MMC 60 Import Export Functions Import Provides functions to import data UO Import Import Opens a file selection dialog box to select an import file that contains IQ data This function is only available in single sweep mode and only in applications that process UO data such as the UO Analyzer or optional applications Note that the I Q data must have a specific format as described in the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Remote command MMEMory LOAD 1Q STATe on page 262 Export Opens a submenu to configure data export UO Export Export Opens a file selection dialog box to select an export file to which the IQ data will be stored This function is only available i
242. mands used by the R amp S FSW follow the SCPI syntax rules e Asynchronous commands A command which does not automatically finish executing before the next com mand starts executing overlapping command is indicated as an Asynchronous command e Reset values RST Default parameter values that are used directly after resetting the instrument RST command are indicated as RST values if available e Default unit This is the unit used for numeric values if no other unit is provided with the parame ter e Manual operation If the result of a remote command can also be achieved in manual operation a link to the description is inserted User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 151 Introduction 11 1 2 Long and Short Form The keywords have a long and a short form You can use either the long or the short form but no other abbreviations of the keywords The short form is emphasized in upper case letters Note however that this emphasis only serves the purpose to distinguish the short from the long form in the manual For the instrument the case does not matter Example SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as SENS FREQ CENT 11 1 3 Numeric Suffixes Some keywords have a numeric suffix if the command can be applied to multiple instances of an object In that case the suffix selects a particular instance e g a mea surement window Numeric suffixes are indicated by angular brackets lt n gt next to th
243. marker indicates the absolute value at the defined position in the diagram Delta A delta marker defines the value of the marker relative to the speci fied reference marker marker 1 by default Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 255 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 256 All Markers Off Deactivates all markers in one step Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF on page 255 7 7 2 General Marker Settings General marker settings are defined in the Marker Config tab of the Marker dialog box R amp S FSW 84 K85 Analysis m x Range Marker Table Code Domain Settings off Trace Analysis Markers Marker Settings Search Marker Marker Table Display Defines how the marker information is displayed On Displays the marker information in a table in a separate area beneath the diagram Off Displays the marker information within the diagram area Auto Default Up to two markers are displayed in the diagram area If more markers are active the marker table is displayed automatically Remote command DISPlay MTABle on page 258 7 7 3 Marker Search Settings Several functions are available to set the marker to a specific position very quickly and easily In order to determine the required marker position searches may be performed The search results can be influenced by special settings These settings are available a
244. me as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows in the active measurement channel use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query lt WindowType gt Type of result display you want to use in the existing window See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 220 for a list of availa ble window types Example LAY REPL WIND 1 MTAB Replaces the result display in window 1 with a marker table LAYout SPLitter lt Index1 gt lt Index2 gt lt Position gt This command changes the position of a splitter and thus controls the size of the win dows on each side of the splitter R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements Compared to the DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE on page 219 command the LAYout SPLitter changes the size of all windows to either side of the splitter per manently it does not just maximize a single window temporarily Note that windows must have a certain minimum size If the position you define con flicts with the minimum size of any of the affected windows the command will not work but does not return an error y 100 x 100 y 100 1 01 GHz 102 12 dim x 0 y 0 x 100 Fig 11 1 SmartGrid coordinates for remote control of the splitters Parameters lt Index1 gt The index of one window the splitter controls lt Index2 gt The index of a window on the other side of the splitter lt Position gt New vertical or horizontal position of the splitter as a fraction of
245. mended order of processing 1 Select Measurement See Selecting the measurement type on page 61 Signal Description See chapter 6 2 3 Signal Description on page 65 Input Frontend Seechapter 6 2 4 Data Input and Output Settings on page 70 and chap ter 6 2 5 Frontend Settings on page 82 Optionally Trigger See chapter 6 2 6 Trigger Settings on page 91 Signal Capture See chapter 6 2 7 Signal Capture Data Acquisition on page 96 Synchronization MS application only See chapter 6 2 9 Synchronization MS application only on page 98 Channel Detection See chapter 6 2 10 Channel Detection on page 99 Analysis Code Domain Analysis See chapter 7 Analysis on page 118 9 Display Configuration See chapter 3 1 2 Evaluation Methods for Code Domain Analysis on page 20 To configure settings P Select any button in the Overview to open the corresponding dialog box Select a setting in the channel bar at the top of the measurement channel tab to change a specific setting Preset Channel Select the Preset Channel button in the lower lefthand corner of the Overview to restore all measurement settings in the current channel to their default values Note that the PRESET key restores the entire instrument to its default values and thus closes all measurement channels on the R amp S FSW except for the default Spectrum application channel See chapter 6 2 1 Def
246. ment This command adds a comment to a file that contains UO data The suffix n is irrelevant Parameters Comment String containing the comment Example MMEM STOR IQ COMM Device test 1b Creates a description for the export file MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Stores UO data and the comment to the specified file Manual operation See UO Export on page 60 MMEMory STORe lt n gt 1Q STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command writes the captured UO data to a file The suffix n is irrelevant The file extension is iq tar By default the contents of the file are in 32 bit floating point format Secure User Mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters 1 11 12 Configuring the Application Data Range MSRA mode only lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Stores the captured UO data to the specified file Manual operation See Q Export o
247. mp S FSW are configured in a separate tab of the dialog box Trigger Source Trigger In Out Output Type User Defined Level Tow Pulse Length 100 0 us Send Trigger JL Trigger 3 input For step by step instructions on configuring triggered measurements see the main R amp S FSW User Manual User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 91 Code Domain Analysis Re Lee SUS OU E 92 L tu 92 VE 92 A A ato Do oido ias 92 uro LEE 93 Dix NN T c UT 93 Buu A 94 L Drop Out Time 94 e EU NP E T TREE 94 e MNT 94 L A 95 B P HO 95 BEE eegene 95 USE EE 95 L Outp t e EE 95 Bro eee 96 E al E EE 96 A eal ere 96 Trigger Source The trigger settings define the beginning of a measurement Trigger Source Trigger Source Defines the trigger source If a trigger source other than Free Run is set TRG is displayed in the channel bar and the trigger source is indicated Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 193 Free Run Trigger Source Trigger Source No trigger source is considered Data acquisition is started manually or automatically and continues until stopped explicitely Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 193 External Trigger 1 2 3 Trigger Source Trigger Source Data acquisition starts when the TTL signal fed into the specified input connector meets or exceeds t
248. mponent and one for the quadrature compo nent l The in phase component of the input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center fre quency is not O see SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 182 the in phase component of the input signal is down converted first Low IF 1 Q The quadrature component of the input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center fre quency is not 0 the quadrature component of the input signal is down converted first Low IF Q RST IQ INP IO TYPE Q See I Q Mode on page 76 CALibration AIQ HATiming STATe State Activates a mode with enhanced timing accuracy between analog baseband RF and external trigger signals For more information see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Parameters State Example Manual operation ON OFF 1 0 ON 1 The high accuracy timing function is switched on The cable for high accuracy timing must be connected to trigger ports 1 and 2 OFF 0 The high accuracy timing function is switched off RST OFF CAL AIQ HAT STAT ON See High Accuracy Timing Trigger Baseband RF on page 77 Configuring Code Domain Analysis 11 5 2 4 Setting up Probes Probes can be connected to the optional BASEBAND INPUT connectors if the Analog Baseband interface option R amp S FSW B71 is installed SENSe PROBe lt p gt ID PARThumb
249. n Power evaluation shows the power of all possible code channels in the total signal over the selected slot for the selected branch Code Domain Error Power is the difference in power between the measured and the ideal signal User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 22 R amp S9FSW 84 K85 Measurements and Result Displays The x axis represents the channel code number which corresponds to the base spreading factor The y axis is a logarithmic level axis that shows the error power of each channel With the error power both active and inactive channels can be evalu ated at a glance Both evaluations support either Hadamard or BitReverse code sorting order see chap ter 4 8 Code Display and Sort Order on page 53 1 Code Domain Power I Branch Fig 3 4 Code Domain Power Display in the BTS application 1 Code Domain Error Power I Branch 2 Bode Fig 3 5 Code Domain Error Power result display Active and inactive data channels are defined via the Inactive Channel Threshold The power values of the active and inactive channels are shown in different colors Table 3 4 Assignment of colors in CDEP result display Color Usage Red Selected channel code number Yellow Active channel Green Inactive channel User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 23 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurements and Result Displays EH Color Usage Light blue Alias power of higher spreading factor Magenta Alias power
250. n W For SEM measurements the return value is the channel power of the reference range in the specified sub block PPOWer Peak power measurements Returns the peak power The unit of the return values depends on the scaling of the y axis logarithmic scaling returns the power in the current unit linear scaling returns the power in W Retrieving Results For SEM measurements the return value is the peak power of the reference range in the specified sub block OBANdwidth OBWidth Occupied bandwidth Returns the occupied bandwidth in Hz Usage Query only Manual operation See Power on page 36 See Channel Power ACLR on page 37 See Spectrum Emission Mask on page 38 See Occupied Bandwidth on page 39 See CCDF on page 40 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics RESult lt t gt lt ResultType gt This command queries the results of a CCDF or ADP measurement for a specific trace lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt ResultType gt MEAN Average RMS power in dBm measured during the measure ment time PEAK Peak power in dBm measured during the measurement time CFACtor Determined crest factor ratio of peak power to average power in dB ALL Results of all three measurements mentioned before separated by commas lt mean power gt lt peak power gt lt crest factor gt Example CALC STAT RES2 ALL Reads out the three measurement results of trace 2 Example of answer string 5 56 19 25 13 69 i e mea
251. n on pilot but with the different known sequence spreading code of the auxiliary pilot channel This mode is useful if the signal does not contain a pilot channel Channel Analyzes the power of any specified channel Power Remote command SENSe CDP SMODe on page 198 6 2 10 Channel Detection The channel detection settings determine which channels are found in the input signal e General Channel Detection SOMOS cicatrices 99 e Channel Table Management voii rr eei ea iii 101 e Channel Table Settings and Funchions cnn arrancan 102 e BTS Channel Detalle tetro dI tte eere tns 103 e Channel Details MS application cernere rede 105 6 2 10 1 General Channel Detection Settings Channel detection settings are configured in the Channel Detection dialog box which is displayed when you select the Channel Detection button in the configuration Over view Code Domain Analysis Inactive Channel Threshold 40 0 dB Predefined Channel Tables Use Dredefined Channel Table Predefined ir Predefined Tables New DO16QAM DO8PSK DO_IDLE Edit DOQPSK Copy 1xEV DO standard table Delete Restore Default Inactive Channel Threshold ee id 100 Using Predefined Channel Tables etm 100 Inactive Channel Threshold Defines the minimum power that a single channel must have compared to the total sig nal in order to be recognized as an active channel The default value is 60 dB Wit
252. n page 60 Configuring the Application Data Range MSRA mode only In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master actually captures data the MSRA applications define an extract of the captured data for analysis referred to as the application data For the 1xEV DO BTS application the application data range is defined by the same commands used to define the signal capture in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode see SENSe CDPower SET COUNt on page 198 Be sure to select the correct measurement channel before executing this command In addition a capture offset can be defined i e an offset from the start of the captured data to the start of the application data for the 1xEV DO BTS measurement The analysis interval used by the individual result displays cannot be edited but is determined automatically However you can query the currently used analysis interval for a specific window The analysis line is displayed by default but can be hidden or re positioned Remote commands exclusive to MSRA applications The following commands are only available for MSRA application channels CAL Culate lt n gt MSRA ALINe HOW 263 CAL Culate nzMSbRA AL INelVAl ue 264 CAL Culate nzMSbRA WINDOWS M gt MAL 264 INITiate lt n gt REFRESH EE 264 SENSe MSRA CAP Tur lO FF OL cocaina tiritas 265 CALCulate lt n gt MSRA ALINe SHOW This command defines whether or not the analysis line is displayed in all time based windows in all MSRA
253. n power 5 56 dBm peak power 19 25 dBm crest factor 13 69 dB Usage Query only Manual operation See CCDF on page 40 CONFigure C DPower BTS PVTime LIST RESult Queries the list evaluation results The results are a comma separated list containing the following values for each list range Return values lt RangeNo gt consecutive number of list range lt StartTime gt Start time of the individual list range General Analysis lt StopTime gt Stop time of the individual list range lt AverageDBM gt Average power level in list range in dBm lt AverageDB gt Average power level in list range in dB lt MaxDBM gt Maximum power level in list range in dBm lt MaxDB gt Maximum power level in list range in dB lt MinDBM gt Minimum power level in list range in dBm lt MinDB gt Minimum power level in list range in dB lt LimitCheck gt Result of limit check for the list range 0 Passed 1 Failed lt Reserved1 gt 0 currently not used lt Reserved2 gt 0 currently not used Usage Query only Manual operation See Power vs Time BTS application only on page 35 11 10 General Analysis The following commands configure general result analysis settings concerning the trace and markers for CDA measurements Analysis for RF Measurements General result analysis settings concerning the trace markers lines etc for RF mea surements are identical to the analysis functions in the Spectrum application except for some spe
254. n single sweep mode and only in applications that process UO data such as the UO Analyzer or optional applications Note Secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote command MMEMory STORe lt n gt 1Q STATe on page 262 MMEMory STORe lt n gt 1IQ COMMent on page 262 Result Display 6 Configuration 6 1 The 1xEV DO applications provide several different measurements for signals accord ing to the 1xEV DO standard The main and default measurement is Code Domain Analysis In addition to the code domain power measurements specified by the 1xEV DO standard the 1xEV DO applications offer measurements with predefined settings in the frequency domain e g RF power measurements Only one measurement type can be configured per channel however several chan nels for 1xEV DO applications can be configured in parallel on the R amp S FSW Thus you can configure one channel for a Code Domain Analysis for example and another for a Power measurement for the same input signal Then you can use the Sequencer
255. nce the phase offset values of each active channel can be either negative or positive the absolute values are compared and the maximum is displayed with the original sign 9 for e CDP TPM OFF e gt 50 active channels found e inactive channel Symbol EVM EVMRms RMS or Peak value of the symbol EVM measurement result EVMPeak For further details refer to Symbol EVM on page 33 Code Domain Analysis Parameter SCPI Parame Description ter Symbol Rate SRATe Symbol rate in ksps with which symbols are transmitted Timing Offset TOFFset Timing offset between the selected channel and the pilot channel If enabled see Timing and phase offset calculation on page 119 the maximum value of the timing offset is displayed together with the associated channel in the last two lines Since the timing offset values of each active channel can be either negative or positive the absolute values are compared and the maximum is displayed with the original sign 9 for e CDETTPM OFF e gt 850 active channels found e inactive channel 3 1 2 Evaluation Methods for Code Domain Analysis The captured UO data can be evaluated using various different methods without having to start anew measurement All evaluation methods available for the selected 1xEV DO measurement are displayed in the evaluation bar in SmartGrid mode To activate SmartGrid mode do one of the following X Select the SmartGrid icon from the toolbar
256. nd decouples the attenuation from the reference level Configuring Code Domain Analysis Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 86 INPut ATTenuation AUTO lt State gt This command couples or decouples the attenuation to the reference level Thus when the reference level is changed the R amp S FSW determines the signal level for optimal internal data processing and sets the required attenuation accordingly This function is not available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is active Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example INP ATT AUTO ON Couples the attenuation to the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 86 INPut EATT lt Attenuation gt This command defines an electronic attenuation manually Automatic mode must be switched off INP EATT AUTO OFF see INPut EATT AUTO on page 188 If the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level This command requires the electronic attenuation hardware option It is not available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is active Parameters lt Attenuation gt attenuation in dB Range see data sheet Increment 1 dB RST 0 dB OFF Example INP EATT AUTO OFF INP EATT 10 dB Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 87 INPut EATT
257. ndwidth 1 229 MHz RBW 30 000 kHz Ran R U Frequency Power Abs Power Rel ACimit Fig 10 2 Meas 2 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask 10 3 Meas 3 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power and Frequency Error A Code Domain Power measurement analyzes the signal over a single Power Control Group PCG It also determines the power of all codes and channels The following examples show a Code Domain Power measurement on a test model with 9 channels In this measurement changing some parameters one after the other should demonstrate the resulting effects values adapted to the measurement signal are changed to non adapted values Test setup 1 Connect the RF output of the R amp S SMU to the input of the R amp S FSW 2 Connect the reference input REF INPUT on the rear panel of the R amp S FSW to the reference input REF on the rear panel of the R amp S SMU coaxial cable with BNC connectors Settings on the R amp S SMU 1 PRESET FREQ 878 49 MHz 2 3 LEVEL 0 dBm 4 DIGITAL STD 1xEV DO 5 DIGITAL STD gt Set Default User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 141 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurement Examples 6 DIGITAL STD gt LINK DIRECTION gt DOWN FORWARD 7 DIGITAL STD gt 1xEV DO gt STATE ON Settings on the R amp S FSW 1 PRESET 2 MODE gt 1xEV DO BTS 3 AMPT gt Reference level 10 dBm 4 FREQ gt Center frequency 878 49 MHz The following results are displayed the first window sh
258. ne a hysteresis This setting defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed compared to the last measurement before the reference level is adapted automatically Configuring Code Domain Analysis Parameters lt Threshold gt Range 0 dB to 200 dB RST 1 dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST UPP 2 Example For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level rises above 22 dBm Manual operation See Upper Level Hysteresis on page 109 SENSe ADJust LEVel This command initiates a single internal measurement that evaluates and sets the ideal reference level for the current input data and measurement settings This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R amp S FSW or limiting the dynamic range by an S N ratio that is too small Example ADJ LEV Usage Event Manual operation See Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level on page 86 11 5 10 Code Domain Analysis Settings Some evaluations provide further settings for the results The commands for Code Domain Analysis are described here SENSe CDPOowWet AVERage 2 xai ieri a O AAA 210 SENSe CDPower ee 211 SENSO ICU POWernmOPERGI GIN ii E 211 SENSe COPOWerORDET comic aaa 211 SENSE ICD Power PDI Silay ciar 212 IGENGeJCDbower bt Ference nn nn nn 212 SENSeTODPOWeITP
259. ne another channel Deleting a Channel Deletes the currently selected channel from the table Creating a New Channel Table from the Measured Signal Measure Table Creates a completely new channel table according to the current measurement data Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 160 Sorting the Table Sorts the channel table entries Cancelling the Configuration Closes the Channel Table dialog box without saving the changes Saving the Table Saves the changes to the table and closes the Channel Table dialog box BTS Channel Details Channel details are configured in the Channel Table dialog box which is displayed when you select the New Copy or Edit buttons for a predefined channel table in the Channel Detection dialog box x Add Channel 0814 Name DO16QAM Comment 1xEV DO standard table Delete Channel Walsh Sym Rate Power Domain Measure Table Ch SF ksps State Conflict 38 4 0 00 BPSK I BPSK I Sort Table BPSK I BPSK I BPSK Q BPSK Q BPSK I 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM 16QAM For details on the individual parameters see chapter 3 1 1 Code Domain Parame ters on page 16 Code Domain Analysis MTA RK 104 Channel Number Walsh Ch JE 104 SWINDON RAGS A ad 104 DOCU AON DEE 104 POWGM EE 104 e 104 reins EE 104 Channel Type Type of channel according to
260. neeeesenseeeeeeenes 267 rl M 270 User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 4 A 1 Predefined Channel Tables ccccssscceceessseeeeeessseeeeeesesseeeeensnsseeeeeeesseeeeseseesaeees 270 A 2 Channel Type Characteristics cccccceeeeccescceseeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeeesseeseeeeeeesseeseneeeeeneas 273 A 3 Reference Supported Bandclasses ccccscccccesssseeeeeeesseceeeesesseeeeeeesseeeeeeensseeeees 274 AA VQ Data File Format iq tar cccccsccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesecaeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeseeeeesseneneenees 275 List of Remote Commands 1XEV DO ccccccssesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 282 MOEK E 287 About this Manual 1 Preface 1 1 About this Manual This User Manual provides all the information specific to the 1xEV DO applications All general instrument functions and settings common to all applications and operating modes are described in the main R amp S FSW User Manual The main focus in this manual is on the measurement results and the tasks required to obtain them The following topics are included e Welcome to the 1xEV DO Measurements Application Introduction to and getting familiar with the application e Measurements and Result Displays Details on supported measurements and their result types e Measurement Basics Background information on basic terms and principles in the context of the mea surement e Configuration Analysis A concise description of all func
261. nel 1xEV DO measurements require special applications on the R amp S FSW The measure ment is started immediately with the default settings INS Tr ment oREate DUPLDIG8le ocio ett ne datos dx etat AAA 156 INSTr ment CREate NEW rire retos oink a taie eaa cas ont 156 INSTrument GREate REPLa66 ni oido Seed SOERENSEN RR RM NR Ee 157 INS Wieden os cet ETE TTD TOTO IL DL 157 d Egit HUS cm 157 INSTr ment SENSING i eee neret o SSES Osea Re E Tct d A dn E Sieg 159 INS Trument SEE Sect 2 ses aere age pee pnr parete EES 159 SYSTemiPRESebpOHANnSIEEXE Quite daa saccades ptu reitera ere eee eet 159 INSTrument CREate DUPLicate This command duplicates the currently selected measurement channel i e creates a new measurement channel of the same type and with the identical measurement set tings The name of the new channel is the same as the copied channel extended by a consecutive number e g Spectrum gt Spectrum 2 The channel to be duplicated must be selected first using the INST SEL command This command is not available if the MSRA Master channel is selected Example INST SEL Spectrum INST CRE DUPL Duplicates the channel named Spectrum and creates a new measurement channel named Spectrum 2 Usage Event INSTrument CREate NEW lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName gt This command adds an additional measurement channel The number of measurement channels you can configure at the same
262. ng only INSTrument DELete lt ChannelName gt This command deletes a measurement channel If you delete the last measurement channel the default Spectrum channel is activa ted Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel you want to delete A measurement channel must exist in order to be able delete it Example INST DEL Spectrum4 Deletes the channel with the name Spectrum4 Usage Event INSTrument LIST This command queries all active measurement channels This is useful in order to obtain the names of the existing measurement channels which are required in order to replace or delete the channels Return values lt ChannelType gt For each channel the command returns the channel type and lt ChannelName gt channel name see tables below Tip to change the channel name use the INSTrument REName command Activating the Measurement Channel Example INST LIST Result for 3 measurement channels ADEM Analog Demod IQ IOQ Analyzer IQ IQ Analyzer2 Usage Query only Table 11 1 Available measurement channel types and default channel names in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode Application lt ChannelType gt Default Channel Name Parameter Spectrum SANALYZER Spectrum 1 Q Analyzer IQ IQ Analyzer Pulse R amp S FSW K6 PULSE Pulse Analog Demodulation R amp S FSW K7 ADEM Analog Demod
263. nly available for IF Power trigger sources The range of the value is between 3 dB and 50 dB with a step width of 1 dB This setting is available for frequency and time domain measurements only Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis on page 191 Code Domain Analysis Trigger Holdoff Trigger Source Defines the minimum time in seconds that must pass between two trigger events Trigger events that occur during the holdoff time are ignored Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 191 Slope Trigger Source For all trigger sources except time you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe on page 193 Capture Offset Trigger Source This setting is only available for applications in MSRA operating mode It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements it defines the time offset between the capture buffer start and the start of the extracted application data In MSRA mode the offset must be a positive value as the capture buffer starts at the trigger time 0 Remote command SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet on page 265 Trigger 2 3 Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors where Trigger 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel Trigger 3 TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Trigger 1 is INPUT only Note
264. nly available if the optional Analog Baseband Interface is instal led Remote command INPut SELect on page 168 UO Mode Defines the format of the input signal For more information on UO data processing modes see the R amp S FSW IO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual jQ The input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application Two inputs are required for a complex signal one for the in phase component and one for the quadrature component Only Low IF I The input signal at the BASEBAND INPUT I connector is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center frequency is set to 0 Hz the real baseband signal is dis played without down conversion Real Baseband l If a center frequency greater than 0 Hz is set the input signal is down converted with the center frequency Low IF 1 Q Only Low IF Q The input signal at the BASEBAND INPUT Q connector is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center frequency is set to 0 Hz the real baseband signal is dis played without down conversion Real Baseband Q If a center frequency greater than 0 Hz is set the input signal is down converted with the center frequency Low IF Q Remote command INPut IQ TYPE on page 178 Input Configuration Defines whether the input is provided as a differential signal via all 4 Analog Baseband connectors or as a plain UO signal via 2 simple ended lines
265. ns Kier leen E Ile 151 Copying Measurement channel remote 156 Coupling Input remote ieee cereale ait tees 166 Cut off frequency RRO TINGE E 67 70 161 D Data acquisition MSRA T 97 98 197 el Eed e EE 96 Data En 48 EValuatiON 124 Data format REMOTO incio in 238 Data inputs atan 70 Data el ni ti ice dorado 70 Data rate MS application 2 rt Percent rre 274 DC offset Analog Baseband B71 remote control 178 see IQ offSet unica ic 119 121 Default values PESE D 63 Delta markers DG HMING o tdt Delta RRI PICH Diagrams Eval atiori method n tad 41 Footer information Differential input Analog Baseband B71 remote control Analog Baseband B71 cios DiglConf see also R amp S DiglGonf 2 rens 75 Digital Baseband Interface ssssssssssss 81 Connected instrument cete 82 put SettifijS cocer netten rre 73 Input status remote 169 Output connection status remote 172 Output settings etes 80 82 otatus tegisters reete enets 173 Digital UO Connection information ssadst 82 Enhanced mode 493 Input connection information 14 Input settings T3 Output settings nere ipee tee renes 80 Output settings information 82 dier Ge irre erre teet
266. nt and to connected devices Ensure the following operating conditions before you switch on the instrument e All fan openings are unobstructed and the airflow perforations are unimpeded The minimum distance from the wall is 10 cm e The instrument is dry and shows no sign of condensation e The instrument is positioned as described in the following sections e The ambient temperature does not exceed the range specified in the data sheet e Signal levels at the input connectors are all within the specified ranges e Signal outputs are correctly connected and are not overloaded Required units and accessories The measurements are performed with the following units and accessories e An R amp S FSW equipped with the 1xEV DO BTS or MS option e R amp S SMU signal generator equipped with option SMU B9 B10 B11 baseband gen erator and SMUK46 1xEV DO incl 1xEVDV e 1 coaxial cable 50 Q approximately 1 m N connector e 2 coaxial cables 50 Q approximately 1 m BNC connector General Test Setup Connect the antenna output or TX output of the base station mobile station to the RF input of the R amp S FSW Use a power attenuator exhibiting suitable attenuation T RoHpEascHwaRz TX signal 21600000 The following values for external attenuation are recommended to ensure that the RF input of the R amp S FSW is protected and the sensitivity of the unit is not reduced too much User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 55
267. nt nun tne ront trn tent nnn 259 CAL Gulate sn MARKersm X onion verir Eea ra eh erri Fiaa AEDA EORR e t IEEE KR SOERENSEN 256 e e aic 237 GALGulatesn MARKer m STATe6 citer kr ttr ener tne cte nt r prx Enn 255 GALGulatesn MSRA ALING SEIQW nct ir rtt rre rre ren is 263 GAL Culatesp MSRACALINSEVALUe certo rre repre pane ense RENE orca Ert SEHR XY ENEE SEE e SEHE DR 264 GALGCulate n MSRA WINDow n MAL trot nnn err rh rh tren n enn Ai 264 GALGulate n STATistics RESUlt E rtt err rrr nte rere ER e EC Y iaa 252 GALibration AIG BIATiming S PAW 6 sceau rere xa ott ao Fe ke HEY FENCE eek ena 178 CONFigure CDPower BTSIEBCGLass BANDSIasS encantan tt three aa 218 GONFigure CDPower BTS GTABIe CATalog 1 ner na t rrr e tenor trien 200 GONFigure CDPower BTS GTABlIe COMMAenl inre pr nr ttr EEEE eere ek ne Co np ai EENE 203 GONFigure CDPower BTS GTABle GOPY terror eer tnr nr nete ere ep nena GONFigure CDPower BTS GTABle DATA 2c nnt rrt er tpe iet etd roin Rn geen GONFigure CDPower BTS G TABle ATA cess soo reno teet tute ER totes RES Ke Peek x RN ER par CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DELete GONFigure CDPower BTS GTABle NAME 2 ttn nennt tenerent n inrer one E PR CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle RESTore GONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SEL cl rrt rn tar CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle STAT
268. number of halfslots used for averaging The default value is 100 Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 207 RF Slot Defines the expected signal The limit lines and the borders for calculating the mean power are set accordingly Full Full slot signal The lower and upper limit line are called PVTFL PVTFU RF Measurements Idle Idle slot signal The lower and upper limit line are called PVTIL PVTIU Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS RFSLot on page 218 BurstFit Activates an automatic burst alignment to the center of the diagram If enabled the fol lowing steps are performed e 1 The algorithm searches the maximum and minimum gradient e 2 The maximum peak between these two values is determined e 3 From this point the 7 dB down points are searched e 4 If these points are within plausible ranges the burst is centered in the screen otherwise nothing happens By default this algorithm is OFF This function is only available if the RF Slot is set to Idle Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime BURSt CENTer on page 217 Reference Mean Pwr If enabled the mean power is calculated and the limit lines are set relative to that mean power The standard requires that the FULL slot first be measured with the limit line relative to the mean power of the averaged time response This value should also be used as the reference for the IDLE slot measurement Remote command CALCulate lt n
269. numbers in the definite length block format In the Spectrum application the format setting REAL is used for the binary transmission of trace data For UO data 8 bytes per sample are returned for this format set ting RST ASCII Example FORM REAL 32 Usage SCPI confirmed TRACe lt n gt DATA lt ResultType gt This command reads trace data from the R amp S FSW 11 9 3 Retrieving Results For details on reading trace data for other than code domain measurements refer to the TRACe DATA command in the base unit description Query parameters lt ResultType gt TRACE1 TRACE2 TRACE3 TRACE4 Reads out the trace data of the corresponding trace in the speci fied measurement window The results of the trace data query depend on the evaluation method in the specified window which is selected by the LAY ADD WIND command The individual results are described in chapter 11 9 3 Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt on page 239 CTABle For the Channel Table result display reads out the maximum values of the timing phase offset between each assigned chan nel and the pilot channel see SENSe CDPower TPMeas commana To query the detailed channel information use the TRAC DATA TRACE1 command for a window with Channel Table evaluation LIST Queries the results of the peak list evaluation for Spectrum Emission Mask measurements For each peak the following entries are given peak f
270. o the mean power of the averaged time response This value should also be used as the reference for the IDLE slot measurement Parameters Mode AUTO ONCE MANual AUTO The mean power is calculated and the limit lines are set relative to that mean power value automatically ONCE The current mean power value of the averaged time response is used as the fixed reference value for the limit lines The refer ence mode is set to MANua1 Now the IDLE slot can be selected and the measurement sequence can be finished MANual The reference value for the limits are defined manually RST AUTO Configuring RF Measurements Example CALC LIM PVT REF AUTO Automatic reference value for limit lines The value should be set to mean power CALC LIM PVT REF MAN Manual reference value for limit lines CALC LIM PVT RVA 33 5 Set manual reference value to 33 5 CALC LIM PVT REF ONCE Set reference value to mean power CALC LIM PVT RVA Query reference value for limit lines The value should be set to mean power value Manual operation See Reference Mean Pwr on page 113 See Reference Manual on page 113 See Set Mean to Manual on page 113 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt PVTime RVALue lt RefLevel gt This command sets the reference level for calculating the limit lines Precondition is that the automatic mode of power calculation is switched off via the commands CALC LIM PVT REF ONC
271. o suit your preferences 5 Exit the SmartGrid mode and select the Overview softkey to display the Over view again 6 Select the Analysis button in the Overview to make use of the advanced analy sis functions in the result displays e Configure a trace to display the average over a series of sweeps if necessary increase the Sweep Count in the Sweep settings e Configure markers and delta markers to determine deviations and offsets within the evaluated signal e Use special marker functions to calculate noise or a peak list e Configure a limit check to detect excessive deviations 7 Optionally export the trace data of the graphical evaluation results to a file a Inthe Traces tab of the Analysis dialog box switch to the Trace Export tab b Select Export Trace to ASCII File c Define a file name and storage location and select OK To select the application data for MSRA measurements In multi standard radio analysis you can analyze the data captured by the MSRA Mas ter in the 1xEV DO BTS application Assuming you have detected a suspect area of the captured data in another application you would now like to analyze the same data in the 1xEV DO BTS application 1 Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for Code Domain Analysis 2 Select the Signal Capture button 3 Define the application data range as and the Number of Sets You must deter mine the number of sets according to
272. ode Domain Analysis the y axis usually displays the measured power levels Amplitude Scale Aa Eu 0 0 dB AULE 70 0 dB Auto Scale Once Restore Scale iaa 1 Code Domain Power Ke dt Zi D E MINIMUM ER 90 Auto Scale EE 90 Restore Scale indow A 91 Y Maximum Y Minimum Defines the amplitude range to be displayed on the y axis of the evaluation diagrams Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MAXimum on page 185 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MINimum on page 185 Auto Scale Once Automatically determines the optimal range and reference level position to be dis played for the current measurement settings The display is only set once it is not adapted further if the measurement settings are changed again Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO ONCE on page 184 R amp S9FSW 84 K85 Configuration Restore Scale Window Restores the default scale settings in the currently selected window 6 2 6 Trigger Settings Trigger settings determine when the input signal is measured Trigger settings can be configured via the TRIG key or in the Trigger dialog box which is displayed when you select the Trigger button in the Overview Trigger Source Trigger In Out Source Drop Out Time Offset Slope Rising Falling Hysteresis Holdoff External triggers from one of the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors on the R a
273. ommand queries the result of a limit check Note that for SEM measurements the limit line suffix lt k gt is irrelevant as only one spe cific SEM limit line is checked for the currently relevant power class To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single measurement mode See also INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 230 Return values lt Result gt 0 PASS 1 FAIL Example INIT WAI Starts a new sweep and waits for its end CALC LIM3 FAIL Queries the result of the check for limit line 3 Usage Query only SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Spectrum Emission Mask on page 38 Retrieving Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer lt sb gt RESult lt Measurement gt This command queries the results of power measurements lt n gt lt m gt are irrelevant To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single measurement mode See also INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 230 Suffix lt sb gt 1 2 3 4 5 Sub block in a Multi standard radio measurement MSR ACLR 1 to 5 Multi SEM 1 to 3 for all other measurements irrelevant Retrieving Results Query parameters lt Measurement gt ACPower MCACpower ACLR measurement
274. on Methods for RF Measurements The evaluation methods for RF measurements are identical to those in the Spectrum application BICI HM 41 Result SUMINI oa Ade 42 Marker Table aes cu lr ade wares 42 piane AR MASE iva iic ier HO ime dV M 42 ues 43 Diagram Displays a basic level vs frequency or level vs time diagram of the measured data to evaluate the results graphically This is the default evaluation method Which data is displayed in the diagram depends on the Trace settings Scaling for the y axis can be configured pum EE INN a User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 41 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurements and Result Displays CF 1 95 GHz 1001 pts 2 57 MHz Span 25 7 MHz Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH DIAG see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 220 Result Summary Result summaries provide the results of specific measurement functions in a table for numerical evaluation The contents of the result summary vary depending on the selected measurement function See the description of the individual measurement functions for details 2 Result Summary Bandwidth Offset Power 1 229 M 0 86 dBm 0 86 dBm ower Upper 79 59 dB 80 34 dB 85 04 dB 83 85 dB Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH RSUM see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 220 Marker Table Displays a table with the current marker values for the active markers This table may be displayed automaticall
275. only be set if an error occurred at the current measurement e Protocol or data header errors May occurred at data synchronization problems or vast transmission errors The bit will be set constantly and all data will be erroneous To solve the problem the Digital UO connection has to be newly initialized NOTE If this error is indicated repeatedly either the Digital UO LVDS connection cable or the receiving or transmitting device might be defect 5 not used 6 Digital UO Input FIFO Overload This bit is set if the sample rate on the connected instrument is higher than the input sam ple rate setting on the R amp S FSW Possible solution e Reduce the sample rate on the connected instrument e Increase the input sample rate setting on the R amp S FSW 7 not used 8 Digital UO Output Device connected This bit is set if a device is recognized and connected to the Digital UO Output 9 Digital UO Output Connection Protocol in progress This bit is set while the connection between analyzer and digital UO data signal source e g R amp S SMW R amp S Ex 1 Q Box is established 10 Digital UO Output Connection Protocol error This bit is set if an error occurred while the connection between analyzer and digital UO data signal source e g R amp S SMW R amp S Ex 1 Q Box is established 11 Digital UO Output FIFO Overload This bit is set if an overload of the Digital UO Output FIFO occurred This happens if the output
276. onocccinncnanccanncnnno 22 Color assignment eiii 23 Evaluation Method 22 2 eti eased 22 Trace results idonee De nae HE ee D eee da 242 CDP Absolute Relative sessssssss 119 121 212 Average 119 121 210 Channel table 9 etie a es 104 Golor assignment mascotas 23 REI dE 119 121 212 Evaluation Metodos edet 22 Measurement examples ooococonnccccnoncccnnoncccconnccnnonnnnn 141 Reference power 121 212 Results remote A niia 234 acta 240 Trace results cte A Triggered Measurement example Center frequency eet Analog Baseband B71 Deviation Measurement example SOfIKGy creer etn ter SEP S ZE e Channel bandwidth LO nee 57 Channel Daria ees 13 Channel detection AAA eii ere ure a aies 47 GOMAQUIING iii 99 Methods 47 Predefined tables AT Remote commands 199 200 Search mode a Ge EE Channel n tmber cuca di do Configuring in table s ROMEO ep M Channel power ACLR See e 37 Channel tables SCHANS com pereo rt gets 270 272 Adding charnnels 2 irren tnn 103 CDP EE 104 Channel number Channel status Channel type 104 105 Comment 102 203 COMPANISON M 47 CONTIQUEINO e 126 135 Configuring remote eese 203 Copying
277. ory only if the new value is lower than the previous one VIEW The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and dis played BLANk Hides the selected trace RST Trace 1 WRITe Trace 2 6 BLANk Example INIT CONT OFF Switching to single sweep mode SWE COUN 16 Sets the number of measurements to 16 DISP TRAC3 MODE WRIT Selects clear write mode for trace 3 INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the measure ment Manual operation See Trace Mode on page 127 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe State This command turns a trace on and off The measurement continues in the background 11 10 2 11 10 2 1 General Analysis Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 for TRACe1 0 for TRACe 2 to 6 Example DISP TRAC3 ON Usage SCPI confirmed Markers Markers help you analyze your measurement results by determining particular values in the diagram In 1xEV DO applications only 4 markers per window can be configured for Code Domain Analysis e Individual Marker Setllligjs ctetu c d ccn rrt i bad cnt edd 255 e General Marker Settings cine rptu a aan 258 e Positioning the Marker eerie eret ne Hh eee eR XO RRERSSRERK a EENS 258 Individual Marker Settings CALCulate lt n gt MARKers lt sm gt AOF Fo asirdin nnan i EEE aa EAEE AR Ea 255 CALCulate n MARKer m STATe nana ca nn nnnnnn corn 255 CALCUlatesn MARKETS MA X EN 256 CALCulate l
278. ote command SENSe CDPower MAPPing on page 214 Channel Table Configuration 7 5 Channel Table Configuration You can configure which parameters are displayed in the Channel Table evaluation by double clicking the table header A Table Configuration dialog box is displayed in which you select the columns to be displayed Columns to be displayed Chan Type PowerDBm Ch SF PowerDB SymRate TOffs Modulation POffs Show Inactive Channels By default only active channels are displayed In order to display all channels includ ing the inactive ones enable the Show Inactive Channels option For details on the individual parameters see chapter 3 1 1 Code Domain Parame ters on page 16 7 6 Traces The trace settings determine how the measured data is analyzed and displayed on the screen ar Write E Saad 1 Code Domain Power Markers 7 7 Window specific configuration The settings in this dialog box are specific to the selected window To configure the settings for a different window select the window outside the displayed dialog box or select the window from the Specifics for selection list in the dialog box Trace Mode Defines the update mode for subsequent traces Clear Write Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each measurement This is the default setting Max Hold The maximum value is determined over several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSW saves each trace point
279. ough this is not immediately apparent from the display of the measured values e g transducer or trigger settings This information is dis pum E INN aT User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 13 Understanding the Display Information played only when applicable for the current measurement For details see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual Window title bar information For each diagram the header provides the following information 1 Code Domain Power Clrw 1 2 GS Fig 2 1 Window title bar information in 1xEV DO applications 1 Window number 2 Window type 3 Trace color 4 Trace number 5 Detector Diagram footer information The diagram footer beneath the diagram contains the following information depend ing on the evaluation Status bar information Global instrument settings the instrument status and any irregularities are indicated in the status bar beneath the diagram Furthermore the progress of the current operation is displayed in the status bar Code Domain Analysis 3 Measurements and Result Displays The 1xEV DO applications provide several different measurements for signals accord ing to the 1xEV DO standard The main and default measurement is Code Domain Analysis In addition to the code domain power measurements specified by the 1xEV DO standard the 1xEV DO applications offer measurements with predefined settings in the frequency domain e g RF power measurements For details on sele
280. overloading the R amp S FSW or limiting the dynamic range by an S N ratio that is too small Note that this command is retained for compatibility reasons only For new R amp S FSW programs use SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 210 SENSe CDPower PRESet This command resets the 1xEV DO channel to its predefined settings Any RF mea surement is aborted and the measurement type is reset to Code Domain Analysis Note that this command is retained for comaptibility reasons only For new remote con trol programs use the SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute command Usage Event Predefined Channel Tables A Annex A 1 Predefined Channel Tables Predefined channel tables offer access to a quick configuration for the channel search The 1xEV DO BTS Analysis option provides the following set of channel tables com pliant with the 1xEV DO specification DOQPSK Channel table with channel types PILOT MAC PREAMBLE DATA with modulation type QPSK in channel type DATA and the following listed active codes in channel types DO8PSK Channel table with channel types PILOT MAC PREAMBLE DATA with modulation type 8 PSK in channel type DATA and the following listed active codes in channel types DO16QAM Channel table with channel types PILOT MAC PREAMBLE DATA with modulation type 16 QAM in channel type DATA and the following listed active codes in chan nel types DO_IDLE Channel table with channel types PILOT MAC known a
281. ows the power of the code domain of the signal The x axis represents the individual codes while the y axis shows the power of each code In the second window the General Result Summary is displayed It shows the numeric results of the code domain power measurement including the frequency error MultiView 33 Spectru 1xEV DO BTS Re gt Level Ref Level 10 00dBm Freq Channel Code Power 10 0 dBm Att Slot Dof3 Channel Type SubtypeO 1 1 Code Domain Power I Branch Code O 2 Result Summary General Results Set 0 Error ch SlotR F F Pov Pov M Fig 10 3 Meas 3 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power and Frequency Error Synchronization of the reference frequencies The frequency error can be reduced by synchronizing the transmitter and the receiver to the same reference frequency gt SETUP gt Reference gt External Reference Again the first window shows the Code Domain Power measurement and the sec ond window contains the General Result Summary After the reference frequen cies of the devices have been synchronized the frequency error should be smaller than 10 Hz User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 142 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurement Examples q _ JJ _ lt lt lt lt ee ee MultiView 33 Spectrum 1xEV DO BTS Ref Level 10 00 dBm Freq 87 z Channel Code Power Relative Att B8 Slot D 3 Channel
282. peak remote control ssssssse 258 Peak p 132 Peak remote control sess 258 POSITIONING PP 131 Querying position remote sssssssss 237 lA eean 130 Settings remole WEEN 255 DUALS 128 UE 130 Table evaluation method sisisihin 42 WY M 129 Maximizing Windows remote 2 nitet 219 Maximum col e 90 Measurement channel Activating remote Creating remote Deleting remote Duplicating remote AA 156 Querying remote 2 2 ertet 157 Renaming remote eese 159 Replacing remote eese 157 Measurement exaMplesS esses 138 CDP pP 141 Center frequency deviation isseire 143 Composite EVM tetro 146 FrequeriCy ne 141 pie m ds 147 RECH isc en rcs 147 SEM 140 Signal channel power sriain iar ii 138 Synchronization 2 eir rrt rne eiea 142 Trigger offset ere a 145 ier GC Ke RE 143 Wrong PN OMSET sisisi ainiin 145 Measurement time Auto SEHINOS asicicinicic a a 109 Measurements Results remote re ced Eats 234 RE cenio PER 35 e EE 61 65 Selecting remote Starting remote E 228 TYPES M 15 Microbutton PROD GS e ss
283. pilot synchronization Similar to synchronization on pilot but with the different known sequence spreading code of the auxiliary pilot channel The benefits and problems of this approach are therefore identical to the synchronization on pilot This mode is useful if the signal does not contain a pilot channel Channel power synchronization This frame synchronization method does not require a pilot channel because it ana lyzes the power of any specified channel currently code 3 with spreading factor 4 which is the data channel 2 Again the channel power must be calculated for all hypotheses of the scrambling code 32768 for external triggers only 2048 Only for the correct position the result is low inactive channel or high active channel in con trast to the wrong hypothesis Obviously a small band exists for which we will not get a power drop or peak if the power of the tested channel is nearly equal to the noise of the other hypotheses from total signal The frequency phase synchronization works in the same way as for the methods above with the difference that here both pilot channels are tried consecutively 4 4 Channel Detection and Channel Types The 1xEV DO applications provide two basic methods of detecting active channels e Automatic search using pilot sequences The application performs an automatic search for active channels throughout the entire code domain At the specific codes at which channels can be expected
284. plication 118 e Code Domain Analysis Settings MS appltcatton rees 119 e Evaluation Range BTS application 122 e Evaluation Range MS application 124 Channel Table Conflgul allo eroe er eoe a eee kn yea ambe Ry sU Une XXE YR 126 AR Co e E EE E S S E E E A T E E E E T 126 EE EE 127 Code Domain Analysis Settings BTS application Some evaluations provide further settings for the results The settings for CDA mea surements are described here Compensate IQ Offset Timing and phase offset calculation Code Domain Power CDP Average Code Power Display Absolute Relative e Compensate IQ OTSGL icono tada Et et ERE Sedan EE testen a ori 119 Timing and phase offsstcaleuldllon recen riot eet een rie e rie deals 119 CDP Ur HQ 119 Code Power DISPARA 119 Code Domain Analysis Settings MS application Compensate IQ Offset If enabled the UO offset is eliminated from the measured signal This is useful to deduct a DC offset to the baseband caused by the DUT thus improving the EVM Note however that for EVM measurements according to standard compensation must be disabled Remote command SENSe CDPower NORMalize on page 211 Timing and phase offset calculation Activates or deactivates the timing and phase offset calculation of the channels to the pilot channel If deactivated or if more than 50 active channels are in the signal the calculation does not take place and dashe
285. pter 4 7 Code Mapping and Branches on page 52 Remote command SENSe CDPower MAPPing on page 214 Status Indicates the channel status Codes that are not assigned are marked as inactive channels Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 205 Activity The decimal number interpreted as a binary number in 16 bits determines the half slot in which the channel is active value 1 or inactive value 0 Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 205 6 2 11 Sweep Settings The sweep settings define how the data is measured Sweep Average Count tette tena t Rer deca ans EENS REENEN 106 Continuous Sweep RUN CONT sssssssssssseeeeenen enne nennen tren tensis 107 single Sweep REN SINGLE eodd a da 107 Continue Single SWOeBD as inertio idas 107 Sweep Average Count Defines the number of sweeps to be performed in the single sweep mode Values from 0 to 200000 are allowed If the values 0 or 1 are set one sweep is performed The sweep count is applied to all the traces in all diagrams If the trace modes Average Max Hold or Min Hold are set this value also deter mines the number of averaging or maximum search procedures R amp S9FSW 84 K85 Configuration A O vw y me mmpeqeseil In continuous sweep mode if sw
286. ption Parameters lt Gain gt 15 dB 30 dB The availability of preamplification levels depends on the model of the R amp S FSW R amp S FSW8 13 15dB and 30 dB R amp S FSW26 or higher 30 dB All other values are rounded to the nearest of these two RST OFF Example INP GAIN VAL 30 Switches on 30 dB preamplification Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Preamplifier on page 87 Configuring the Attenuation INPUEATTenlatlo toc aa tee ean dE NENNEN 187 Lu SLE RE Ia tite us ut e M ist skeet 188 INPO EAT e 188 INPUEERTTAUTO li adi 188 INPUEEATTESTA TO 0 iia alas 189 INPut ATTenuation lt Attenuation gt This command defines the total attenuation for RF input If an electronic attenuator is available and active the command defines a mechanical attenuation see INPut EATT STATe on page 189 If you set the attenuation manually it is no longer coupled to the reference level but the reference level is coupled to the attenuation Thus if the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level This function is not available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is active Parameters lt Attenuation gt Range see data sheet Increment 5 dB RST 10 dB AUTO is set to ON Example INP ATT 30dB Defines a 30 dB attenuation a
287. put connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth on page 197 Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 3 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate on page 196 6 2 7 Signal Capture Data Acquisition You must define how much and how data is captured from the input signal Code Domain Analysis Common Settings Sample Rate Invert Q Capture Settings Number of Slots Number of Sets each Set has 32 Slots Set to Analyze Fig 6 1 Signal capture settings in BTS application MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master channel actually captures data from the input signal The data acquisition settings for the 1xEV DO application in MSRA mode define the application data see chapter 6 2 8 Application Data MSRA on page 98 For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual Sample Ra io lee EES 97 VE sai diia 97 NUMBER of MOS init diia 97 rel ege 98 MIG UO AAV ZG RR 98 Sample Rate The sample rate is always 5 333
288. r Manual 1173 9340 02 13 24 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurements and Result Displays 2Composite Data Bitstream Fig 3 7 Composite Data Bitstream result display The number of displayed symbols depends on the spreading factor see chapter A 2 Channel Type Characteristics on page 273 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH CDB see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 220 CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 234 Composite Data Constellation MS application only This result display is only available in the MS application for subtypes 2 or 3 The Composite Data Constellation shows the channel constellation of the modulated composite data signal at symbol level The results are displayed for the special compo site data channel regardless of which channel is selected 3 Composite Data Constellation 1 ClrW Fig 3 8 Composite Data Constellation result display Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH CDC see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 220 CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 234 User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 25 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurements and Result Displays Composite EVM This result display measures the modulation accuracy It determines the error vector magnitude EVM over the total signal The EVM is the root of the ratio of the mean error power root mean square to the
289. r measurement the total channel power of the 1xEV DO signal is dis played The measurement also displays spurious emissions like harmonics or intermo dulation products that occur close to the carrier Test setup gt Connect the RF output of the R amp S SMU to the RF input of the R amp S FSW coaxial cable with N connectors R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurement Examples T Settings on the R amp S SMU 1 PRESET FREQ 878 49 MHz LEVEL 0 dBm DIGITAL STD 1xEV DO DIGITAL STD gt Set Default DIGITAL STD gt LINK DIRECTION gt DOWN FORWARD N OQ a A QON DIGITAL STD gt 1xEV DO gt STATE ON Settings on the R amp S FSW 1 PRESET 2 MODE gt 1xEV DO BTS 3 AMPT gt Reference level 0 dBm 4 FREQ gt Center frequency 878 49 MHz 5 MEAS gt POWER The spectrum of the signal and the corresponding power levels within the 1 2288 MHz channel bandwidth are displayed MultiView Spectrum 1xEV DO BTS Frequenc y Center Ref Level 0 RBW 10 kHz 878 49 MH x Att SWT 100 rr VBW 300 kHz Mode Auto Sweep 1 1Rm Clrw CF 878 49 MHz 1001 pts 200 0 kHz Span 2 0 MHz ve CDMA 2000 Bandwidth Offset Power 10 14 dBm 10 14 dBm Fig 10 1 Meas 1 Measuring the Signal Channel Power SS errs User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 139 Meas 2 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask 10 2 Meas 2 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask The 1xEV DO specification calls for a measurement that monitors compliance wit
290. range and fmax is specified in the data sheet UP Increases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command DOWN Decreases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command RST fmax 2 Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Center Frequency on page 77 See Center frequency on page 83 This command defines the center frequency step size You can increase or decrease the center frequency quickly in fixed steps using the SENS FREQ UP AND SENS FREQ DOWN commands see SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 182 Parameters lt StepSize gt fmax IS specified in the data sheet Range 1 to MAX RST 0 1 x span Default unit Hz Configuring Code Domain Analysis Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Manual operation See Center Frequency Stepsize on page 83 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO lt State gt This command couples or decouples the center frequency step size to the span In time domain zero span measurements the center frequency is coupled to the RBW Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example FREQ CENT STEP
291. rement gt ACLR CCDF CDPower ESPectrum OBWidth POWer ACLR Adjacent Channel Power measurement CCDF measurement of the complementary cumulative distribution function signal statistics CDPower Code Domain Analyzer measurement ESPectrum check of signal power Spectrum Emission Mask OBWidth measurement of the occupied bandwidth POWer Signal Channel Power measurement with predefined settings according to the 1xEV DO standard RST CDPower Example CONF CDP MEAS POW Selects Signal Channel Power measurement Manual operation See Power vs Time BTS application only on page 35 See Power on page 36 See Channel Power ACLR on page 37 See Spectrum Emission Mask on page 38 See Occupied Bandwidth on page 39 See CCDF on page 40 See Creating a New Channel Table from the Measured Signal Measure Table on page 103 11 5 Configuring Code Domain Analysis e Signal Description dida 161 e Configuring the Data Input and Output 165 e Frontend Gong TE 181 e Configuring Triggered Measurements eeesssiese essentiae naa 189 e Signal Ca WAG oa ecce nei eade ese RC ER red sa nca 197 e Synchronization MS application on 198 e Channel Doei concedere ENEE GEN 199 LE up 206 Automatic SSE E 207 e Code Domain Analysis Gettmgs AAA 210 e jEvaluatiom Pag oon cene AL otl P ond 213 Configuring Code Domain Analysis 11 5 1 Signal Description The signal description
292. rent x axis range Example CALC MARK2 X 1 7MHz Positions marker 2 to frequency 1 7 MHz Manual operation See Marker Table on page 42 See Marker Peak List on page 42 See X value on page 129 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt AOFF This command turns all delta markers off lt m gt is irrelevant Example CALC DELT AOFF Turns all delta markers off Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe lt State gt This command turns delta markers on and off If necessary the command activates the delta marker first No suffix at DELTamarker turns on delta marker 1 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT2 ON Turns on delta marker 2 Manual operation See Marker State on page 128 See Marker Type on page 129 General Analysis CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X Position This command moves a delta marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker and positions a reference marker to the peak power Example CALC DELT X Outputs the absolute x value of delta marker 1 Manual operation See X value on page 129 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELative This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker first Return values lt Position gt Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker
293. requency absolute level of the peak distance to the limit line For details refer to the TRACe DATA command in the base unit description Usage Query only Manual operation See Mag Error vs Chip on page 27 See Phase Error vs Chip on page 29 See Symbol Magnitude Error on page 34 See Symbol Phase Error on page 34 Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt The results of the trace data query TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt depend on the evaluation method in the specified window which is selected by the LAY ADD WIND command For each evaluation method the returned values for the trace data query are described in the following sections For details on the graphical results of these evaluation methods see chapter 3 1 2 Evaluation Methods for Code Domain Analysis on page 20 LEM uc 240 e hanngl Table eessen ENER aa 240 e Code Domain Error Power BTS apphcaton eene 242 e Code Domain Error Power MS application 242 e Code Domain Power BTS application oce 243 11 9 3 1 11 9 3 2 Retrieving Results e Code Domain Power MS application eeclesie enenatis 244 e Composite Constellation ccccccccccccccncttcnciscccessasssezavenacacedtimenenceatccanccchsnesedtersvandeeces 244 e Composite Data Bitstream MS application 245 e Composite Data Constellation MS application eese 245 e Compos
294. rns 8 values for each channel in the following order lt channel type gt lt code class gt lt code number gt lt modulation gt lt mapping gt lt absolute level gt lt relative level gt lt timing offset gt lt phase offset gt For details on the individual parameters see table 3 3 Retrieving Results In the BTS application the channels are sorted according to these rules 1 All detected special channels 2 Data channels in ascending order by code class and within the code class in ascending order by code number 3 Unassigned codes with the code class of the base spreading factor In the MS application the channels are sorted according to these rules 1 All active channels 2 Allinactive or quasi active channels in ascending code number order branch first followed by Q branch Data channels in ascending order by code class and within the code class in ascending order by code number 3 Unassigned codes with the code class 4 Results for CTABle Parameter BTS application The command returns 12 values for each channel in the following order lt max time offset in s gt lt channel type for max time gt lt code number for max time gt lt code class for max time gt lt max phase offset in rad gt lt channel type for max phase offset gt lt code number for max phase gt lt code class for max phase gt lt reserved 1 gt reserved 4 For details on the individual parameters
295. s GDA Seite redis t re EE e ve Ee ET 20 ig 41 see also Result Displays sseesssssss 15 Sel cting rennen tt e ce eris 15 EVM COmpOSIIG trot erit Pee ee nre ocn ntes Results remote VSSYMDOL m Exporting VQ data xo dete VQ data remote ien eis 261 Ec M 60 Trace results remote 248 External trigger iori oet eie bee 92 Level remote iieri rr RR 192 F Files Format VQ data exis 275 1 Q data binary XML A lQ parameter XML eerte cs 276 Filter types Multicarrier ion cs 67 69 162 Filters Cut off frequency 67 70 161 High pass e 167 High passS RF Input cte trees 72 Multicarrier signals sssse 52 67 69 162 Roll off factor aec iii 67 70 161 YIG remote cm ana ERE ete 167 Format Data remote Frame synchronization Free Run TAJGO ir io etoile va pae us ecd tein 92 Frequency COnmigUrAUON osna 82 Configuration remote sssseee 182 oue M 84 Frequency error Measurement exaMplesS oconoconoccnoccccoccconcconnconanananos 141 Results remote Frontend COMIQUIIAG siria reet eres 82 Contfiguring remote vivia tii 181 Full scale level Analog Baseband B71 remote control 177 Analog Baseband B71 99 Digital e aint ln 74 Digital UO remote mu 170 171 Unit dig
296. s The number of dig its after the decimal point depends on the type of numeric value Example Setting SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ Query SENSe FREQuency CENTer would return 1E9 In some cases numeric values may be returned as text e INF NINF Infinity or negative infinity Represents the numeric values 9 9E37 or 9 9E37 e NAN Not a number Represents the numeric value 9 91E37 NAN is returned in case of errors Boolean Boolean parameters represent two states The ON state logically true is represen ted by ON or a numeric value 1 The OFF state logically untrue is represented by OFF or the numeric value 0 Querying boolean parameters When you query boolean parameters the system returns either the value 1 ON or the value 0 OFF Example Setting DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe ON Query DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe would return 1 Character Data Character data follows the syntactic rules of keywords You can enter text using a short or a long form For more information see chapter 11 1 2 Long and Short Form on page 152 Querying text parameters When you query text parameters the system returns its short form Common Suffixes Example Setting SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE NORMal Query SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE would return NORM 11 1 6 4 Character Strings Strings are alphanumeric characters They have to be in straigh
297. s also known as adjacent channel power or multicarrier adjacent channel measurements Returns the power for every active transmission and adjacent channel The order is power of the transmission channels power of adjacent channel lower upper e power of alternate channels ower upper MSR ACLR results For MSR ACLR measurements the order of the returned results is slightly different power of the transmission channels total power of the transmission channels for each sub block power of adjacent channels lower upper power of alternate channels lower upper power of gap channels lower1 upper1 lower2 upper2 The unit of the return values depends on the scaling of the y axis logarithmic scaling returns the power in the current unit linear scaling returns the power in W GACLr For MSR ACLR measurements only returns a list of ACLR val ues for each gap channel lower1 upper1 lower2 upper2 MACM For MSR ACLR measurements only returns a list of CACLR val ues for each gap channel lower1 upper1 lower2 upper2 CN Carrier to noise measurements Returns the C N ratio in dB CNO Carrier to noise measurements Returns the C N ratio referenced to a 1 Hz bandwidth in dBm Hz CPOWer Channel power measurements Returns the channel power The unit of the return values depends on the scaling of the y axis logarithmic scaling returns the power in the current unit linear scaling returns the power i
298. s IDLE slot since it does not contain any active channels in the DATA channel type PICH MS application only Channel table with the pilot channel as it exists in Access mode at least during the first slot 16 PICHRRI MS application only Channel table with pilot channel and RRI with the name PICHRRI The channels are active on the same code but at different times If the RRI and the PICH are active it is assumed that for the first 256 chips 1 4 of the half slot 1 8 of the entire slot only the RRI and then the PICH is active in this half slot If only the PICH is active RRI activity 0 the PICH is active for the entire 1024 chips of the half slot 5CHANS MS application only Channel table with 5 channels PICH RRI DRC ACK DATA Table 1 1 Base station channel table DOQPSK with QPSK modulation in DATA area Channel Type No of Chan Code Channel Modulation Mapping nels Walsh Code SF Pilot 1 0 32 BPSK I Mac 5 2 64 RA BPSK I 3 64 BPSK I 4 64 BPSK I 34 64 BPSK Q 35 64 BPSK Q Predefined Channel Tables Channel Type No of Chan Code Channel Modulation Mapping nels Walsh Code SF Preamble 64 1 3 32 BPSK I chips long Data 16 0 16 QPSK 1 16 QPSK 2 16 QPSK 13 16 QPSK 14 16 QPSK 15 16 QPSK Table 1 2 Base station channel table DO8PSK with 8 PSK modulation in DATA area Channel Type Number of Code Channel Walsh Modulation Channels Code SF Mapping P
299. s a Digital UO trigger source The following table describes the assignment of the general purpose bits to the LVDS connector pins For details on the LVDS connector see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer User Manual Table 6 1 Assignment of general purpose bits to LVDS connector pins Bit LVDS pin GPO SDATA4_P Trigger1 GP1 SDATA4 P Trigger2 GP2 SDATAO P Reserve1 GP3 SDATAA P Reserve2 GP4 SDATAO P Marker1 GP5 SDATAA P Marker2 not available for Digital UO enhanced mode Remote command TRIG SOUR GPO see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 193 IF Power Trigger Source Trigger Source The R amp S FSW starts capturing data as soon as the trigger level is exceeded around the third intermediate frequency For frequency sweeps the third IF represents the start frequency The trigger band width at the third IF depends on the RBW and sweep type For measurements on a fixed frequency e g zero span or UO measurements the third IF represents the center frequency Code Domain Analysis This trigger source is only available for RF input This trigger source is available for frequency and time domain measurements only It is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface or the optional Analog Baseband Interface The available trigger levels depend on the RF attenuation and preamplification A refer ence level offset if defined is also considered
300. s are displayed instead of values as results Remote command SENSe CDPower TPMeas on page 213 CDP Average The Code Domain Analysis is averaged over all slots in the set For channel types Data and Preamble this calculation assumes that preambles of different lengths do not occur in the slots If active ALL is displayed in the Slot field in the channel bar This function is required by the 1xEV DO standard Remote command SENSe CDPower AVERage on page 210 Code Power Display For Code Domain Power evaluation Defines whether the absolute power or the power relative to the chosen reference in BTS application relative to total power is displayed Remote command SENSe CDPower PDISplay on page 212 7 2 Code Domain Analysis Settings MS application Some evaluations provide further settings for the results The settings for CDA mea surements are described here Code Domain Analysis Settings MS application Code Doms er Common Code Order Hadamard Bit Reverse Compensate IQ Offset Timing and phase offset calculation Operation Mode Traffic Domain P CDP Average Off Code Power Display Absolute Relative Power Reference PICH Total eege Code Display OTIS ia 120 Compensate en E i a 121 Timing and phase offset calculation comia lia te eae 121 BTE E ee E 121 gas o EM 121 Code Power Display minec reete teresa eese eva aan e EYE PRA Aena 121 Power EE le EE 121 Code Display
301. s can filter out and analyze one carrier out of a multicarrier signal if a special multicarrier mode is activated in the signal description Two filter types used to select the required carrier from the signal are available for selection a low pass filter and an RRC filter By default the low pass filter is active The low pass filter affects the quality of the measured signal compared to a measurement without a filter The frequency response of the low pass filter is shown below Frequency response of low pass filter Multi Carrier On IH in dB D 01 02 03 04 05 06 OF 08 09 1 Frequency in MHz Fig 4 4 Frequency response of the low pass multicarrier filter The RRC filter comes with an integrated Hamming window The roll off factor of the RRC filter defines the slope of the filter curve and therefore the excess bandwidth of the filter The cut off frequency of the RRC filter is the frequency at which the passband of the filter begins Both parameters can be configured 4 7 Code Mapping and Branches Since 1xEV DO signals use long code scrambling the channel data is mapped either to the or to the Q branch of the complex input signal During channel detection the branch to which the data was mapped is determined and indicated in the channel table During analysis each branch of the symbol constellation area imaginary part or real part Q can be evaluated independantly Thus when analyzing signals you Code Display and
302. s command defines the length of the pulse generated at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Parameters lt Length gt Pulse length in seconds Manual operation See Pulse Length on page 80 11 5 5 Signal Capturing The following commands configure how much and how data is captured from the input signal MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master channel actually captures data from the input signal The data acquisition commands for the 1xEV DO application in MSRA mode define the application data see chapter 11 12 Configuring the Application Data Range MSRA mode only on page 263 For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual Useful commands for configuring signal capture described elsewhere e SENSe CDPower SET on page 215 Remote commands exclusive to signal capturing E Ee Ree 197 SENSe CDPower OINWVert ccsccessesssovesteadeededevsieeociees ENEE desc eter rede tee des 198 E Ee RE e EE 198 SENSe CDPower IQLength lt CaptureLength gt This command sets the capture length in multiples of slots In MS mode the number of half slots is defined 11 5 6 Configuring Code Domain Analysis Parameters lt CaptureLength gt Range 2 to 36 MS mode 70 RST 3 Manual operation See Number of Slots on page 97 SENSe CDPower QINVert lt S
303. s required that only the pilot chan nel is active Test setup 1 Connect the RF output of the R amp S SMU to the input of the R amp S FSW 2 Connect the reference input REF INPUT on the rear panel of the R amp S FSW to the reference input REF on the rear panel of the R amp S SMU coaxial cable with BNC connectors 3 Connect the external trigger input of the R amp S FSW TRIGGER INPUT to the exter nal trigger output of the R amp S SMU TRIGOUT1 of PAR DATA Settings on the R amp S SMU 1 PRESET FREQ 878 49 MHz LEVEL 0 dBm DIGITAL STD 1xEV DO DIGITAL STD gt Set Default DIGITAL STD gt LINK DIRECTION gt DOWN FORWARD N Oo a N o wm DIGITAL STD gt 1xEV DO gt STATE ON Settings on the R amp S FSW 1 PRESET MODE gt 1xEV DO BTS AMPT gt Reference level 0 dBm FREQ gt Center frequency 878 49 MHz TRIG gt External Trigger 1 MEAS CONFIG gt Display Config gt Peak Code Domain Error Window 1 N Oo a B o bh AMPT gt Scale Config gt Auto Scale Once The following results are displayed the first window shows the diagram of the Peak Code Domain Error In the second window the General Result Summary is dis played R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurement Examples MultiView 32 Spectrum 3 1xEV DO BTS Ref Level 0 00dBm Freq Att A 3 Channel Type Subtyped 1 1 Peak Code Domain Error Slot O LSlot 2 Result Summary ei Slot Results Pov Pilot Fig 10 7
304. s softkeys in the Marker To menu or in the Search tab of the Marker dialog box To display this tab do one of the following Press the MKR key then select the Marker Config softkey Then select the hori zontal Search tab nthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker Config tab Then select the horizontal Search tab m m RC SS C SSS to User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 130 7 7 4 Markers Analysis Markers Marker Settings Search Range Next Code Domain Settings Trace Marker Gelder 1 Code Domain Power Search Mode for Next Peak 131 Search Mode for Next Peak Selects the search mode for the next peak search Left Determines the next maximum minimum to the left of the current peak Absolute Determines the next maximum minimum to either side of the current peak Right Determines the next maximum minimum to the right of the current peak Remote command chapter 11 10 2 3 Positioning the Marker on page 258 Marker Positioning Functions The following functions set the currently selected marker to the result of a peak search These functions are available as softkeys in the Marker To menu which is displayed when you press the MKR gt key Markers Markers in Code Domain Analysis measurements In Code Domain Analysis measurements the markers are set to individual symbols codes slots or channels depending on the result display Thus you can
305. see table 3 3 Value Description time offset maximum time offset in s channel type channel type see table 11 2 code number code number of the channel with maximum time offset code class code class of the channel with maximum time offset phase offset maximum phase offset in rad channel type channel type see table 11 2 code number code number of the channel with maximum phase offset code class code class of the channel with maximum phase offset reserved 1 4 gt 0 reserved for future use Results for CTABle Parameter MS application The command returns 12 values for each channel in the following order max time offset in s gt code number for max time code class for max time max phase offset in rad code number for max phase code class for max phase reserved 1 reserved 6 Retrieving Results Value Description lt time offset gt maximum time offset in s lt code number gt code number of the channel with maximum time offset lt code class gt code class of the channel with maximum time offset lt phase offset gt maximum phase offset in rad lt code number gt code number of the channel with maximum phase offset lt code class gt code class of the channel with maximum phase offset lt reserved 1 6 gt 0 reserved for future use 11 9 3 3 Code Domain Error Power BTS application
306. set gt This command sets the PN offset of the base station in multiples of 64 chips Parameters lt Offset gt Range O to 511 RST 0 Example CDP PNOF 45 Sets PN offset Manual operation See PN Offset on page 66 MS Signal Description The following commands describe the input signal in MS measurements Useful commands for describing MS signals described elsewhere e CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer COFRequency on page 161 e CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer ROFF on page 161 e CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer TYPE on page 162 e CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer STATe on page 162 e CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier MALGo on page 163 e CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier STATe on page 163 e CONFigure CDPower BTS SUBType on page 163 Remote commands exclusive to describing MS signals E Ee RI LOCODE EE 164 SENSeJCDPowWerEGCOBemQ ue euet iia 164 SENSe CDPower LCODe l Mask Defines the long code mask of the branch of the mobile in hexadecimal form Parameters Mask Range HO to H4FFFFFFFFFF RST HO Example CDP LCOD I HF Define long code mask Manual operation See Long Code Mask Long Code Mask Q on page 69 SENSe CDPower LCODe Q lt Mask gt Defines the long code mask of the Q branch of the mobile in hexadecimal form Parameters lt Mask gt Range HO to H4FFFFFFFFFF RST HO
307. stored on re entering this measurement e Reference level and reference level offset e RBW VBW e Sweep time User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 114 RF Measurements e Span e Number of adjacent channels e Fast ACLR mode The main measurement menus for the RF measurements are identical to the Spectrum application However for ACLR and SEM measurements in 1xEV DO applications an additional softkey is available to select the required bandclass Bandclass The bandclass defines the frequency band used for ACLR and SEM measurements It also determines the corresponding limits and ACLR channel settings according to the 1xEV DO standard For an overview of supported bandclasses and their usage see chapter A 3 Refer ence Supported Bandclasses on page 274 Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS BCLass BANDclass on page 218 6 3 4 Spectrum Emission Mask The Spectrum Emission Mask measurement shows the quality of the measured signal by comparing the power values in the frequency range near the carrier against a spec tral mask that is defined by the 1xEV DO specifications The limits depend on the selected bandclass In this way the performance of the DUT can be tested and the emissions and their distance to the limit be identified Note that the 1xEV DO standard does not distinguish between spurious and spectral emissions The Result Summary contains a peak list with the values for the largest spectral emis sions inclu
308. t register Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel 11 14 Commands for Compatibility The following commands are provided for compatibility to other signal analyzers only For new remote control programs use the specified alternative commands Commands for Compatibility CAC ulate iis Fe EE 268 CONFigure CDPower BTS PVYTime LIST ESTATe nemen 269 SENSe CDPower LEVel ADJust cessisse nnne saeaeaaaaaeaagedeeeeseeeeeeeees 269 ISENSeTODPOWEIPISIESBL od coo o Pu a atrial re ad 269 CALCulate n FEED Evaluation This command selects the evaluation method of the measured data that is to be dis played in the specified window Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the LAYout commands for new remote control programs see chapter 11 7 2 Working with Win dows in the Display on page 220 Parameters Evaluation Type of evaluation you want to display See the table below for available parameter values Example CALC FEED XPOW CDP Selects the Code Domain Power result display Table 11 8 Evaluation parameter values String Parameter Text Parame Evaluation ter XTIM CDP BSTReam BITStream Bitstream XTIM CDP COMP CONStellation CCONst Composite Constellation XTIM
309. t 10dB Slot Oof3 Channel Type All SubtypeO 1 TRG EXT1 1 Composite EVM Slot 0 1 Slot 2 Result Summary al Results Set 0 Ji Error Fig 10 6 Meas 5 Measuring the Composite EVM 10 6 Meas 6 Measuring the Peak Code Domain Error and the RHO Factor The Code Domain Error Power describes the quality of the measured signal compared to an ideal reference signal generated by the R amp S FSW In the I Q plane the error vector represents the difference of the measured signal and the ideal signal The Code Domain Error is the difference in power on symbol level of the measured and the refer ence signal projected to the class of of the base spreading factor The unit of the result is dB In the Peak Code Domain Error PCDE measurement the maximum error value over all channels is determined and displayed for a given PCG The measurement covers the entire signal during the entire observation time In the graphical display the results are shown in a diagram in which the x axis represents the PCGs and the y axis shows the PCDE values A measurement of the RHO factor is shown in the second part of the example RHO is the normalized correlated power between the measured and the ideal reference sig nal The maximum value of RHO is 1 In that case the measured signal and the refer EECH User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 147 Meas 6 Measuring the Peak Code Domain Error and the RHO Factor ence signal are identical When measuring RHO it i
310. t Power MHz 9 84 dBm 9 84 dBm Offset Lower Upper d 00 kHz 0 Hz 20 81 dB 15 58 dB Alti kt 980 MH 78 61 dB 82 95 dB Fig 3 23 ACLR measurement results in the 1xEV DO BTS application Remote command CONF CDP MEAS ACLR see CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 160 Querying results CALC MARK FUNC POW RES ACP see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer lt sb gt RESul1t on page 250 CALC MARK FUNC POW RES ACP see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer lt sb gt RESult on page 250 Spectrum Emission Mask The Spectrum Emission Mask measurement determines the power of the 1xEV DO signal in defined offsets from the carrier and compares the power values with a spec tral mask specified by the 1xEV DO specifications The limits depend on the selected bandclass Thus the performance of the DUT can be tested and the emissions and their distance to the limit be identified Note The 1xEV DO standard does not distinguish between spurious and spectral emissions IESSE User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 38 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurements and Result Displays MultiView 32 Spectrum 13 1xEV DO BTS Ref Level 0 00 dBm Mode Auto Sweep 1 Spectrum Emission Mask CF 878 608453352 MHz 1001 pts 800 0 kHz Span 8 0 MHz cdma2000 BCO DL Tx Bandwidth MHz RBW 30 000 kHz Frequency Power Abs Power Rel AUimit Fig 3 24 SEM measurement results in the 1xEV DO BTS appli
311. t WindowType gt This command changes the window type of an existing window specified by the suffix lt n gt in the active measurement channel The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REPLace WINDow com mand To add a new window use the LAYout NINDow lt n gt ADD command Parameters lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to replace another one with See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 220 for a list of availa ble window types Zooming into the Display Using the Single Zoom REGER lee E ele 226 BISPlay WINDowsnsI ZOOM STAT ius a NEEN I 227 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 Frequency Sweep iRm EU 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 226 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements DESEN Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define lt x2 gt lt y2 gt the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 110 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe State
312. t m gt MAXimum PEAK CAL CGulate nz D I Tamarker zmz MiNimum LEET CAL Culate nz D I Tamarker mz MiNimumNENT A CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINIMUM RIGHT A CAL Culate nz D I Tamarker mz MiNmumf PEART cece cece nisnin E TNTE 261 CAL Culate lt n gt DEL Ee ue 257 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELative CALCulate n gt DELTamarkerM gt GE 257 CAL Culatesn gt DELTamarkerM gt LESTA TO liinda eg 256 CAL Culatesh gt EE 268 ee Ee TEE 249 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt PVTIMe REFGIENCC rs coria cte argentine aan ee CALGulate n bIMitsks PVTime RVALUG n tica cir aaa CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb RESUIt essent 250 GALCulatespn MARKer m MAXImum LE T innen rano isa 258 GALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum NENXT rte rn then tana nee thru ia 259 GALCulate n MARKer m 7 MAXimum RIGHIE aane hiat the trie bean tina einen 259 CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimumg PEAK essere enne enne EEEN EEEE 259 CALCGulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINIMUMILEF T enero tt iA 259 GALCulate n MARKer m MlINim m NENXT 2 trainer inni tienen kae ens 259 GALCulatesn MARKer m MlINimum RIGHEt iiiui ia rara tot tope pattern take caries par 260 GALGCulate n MARKer m MlINimumpBEAK 32 niu
313. t marker posi tion Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next higher minimum value Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Minimum on page 132 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the minimum level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Minimum on page 132 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command moves a delta marker to the next higher minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event 11 11 Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results For details on importing and exporting l Q data see chapter 5 1 Q Data Import and Export on page 59 MMEMor LOADACESTA VE 262 MMEM ory STORe lt sn gt 1Q COMMent eret enne enne nnne nnns nnn tn nnne in 262 MMEMON STORE IO STA NET 262 Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results MMEMory LOAD IQ STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command restores UO data from a file The file extension is iq tar Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the source file Example MMEM LOAD IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Loads IQ data from the specified file Usage Setting only Manual operation See UO Import on page 60 MMEMory STORe n IQ COMMent Com
314. t n gt DELTamarkerem gt AOF F onra E ar RAN E S sss dana 256 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmztSTATel nana nnnnnnnononnnnnns 256 CAL Culatesn gt DEL Tamat ker seed A dd 257 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz SREL ative eene enne 257 GAL Gulate lt n gt DEL Tamarker lt m gt Y ccc ccccieccesconcincesaieccncusttenasaessaactdceusaccuennensaecneduaaa aes 257 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF This command turns all markers off Example CALC MARK AOFF Switches off all markers Usage Event Manual operation See All Markers Off on page 129 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe State This command turns markers on and off If the corresponding marker number is cur rently active as a deltamarker it is turned into a normal marker Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK3 ON Switches on marker 3 General Analysis Manual operation See Marker State on page 128 See Marker Type on page 129 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X Position This command moves a marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the marker If the marker has been used as a delta marker the command turns it into a normal marker Parameters lt Position gt Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x axis The unit is either Hz frequency domain or s time domain or dB statistics Range The range depends on the cur
315. t quotation marks You can use a single quotation mark or a double quotation mark Example INSTRument DELete Spectrum 11 1 6 5 Block Data Block data is a format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data The ASCII character introduces the data block The next number indicates how many of the following digits describe the length of the data block In the example the 4 follow ing digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes The data bytes follow During the trans mission of these data bytes all end or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are transmitted 0 specifies a data block of indefinite length The use of the indefinite for mat requires a NL END message to terminate the data block This format is useful when the length of the transmission is not known or if speed or other considerations prevent segmentation of the data into blocks of definite length 11 2 Common Suffixes In 1xEV DO applications the following common suffixes are used in remote com mands and not described for each command individually Suffix Value range Description n 1 16 Window lt t gt 1 CDA Trace 6 RF lt m gt 1 4 CDA Marker 1 16 RF lt ch gt 1 18 Tx channel Channel in RF measurements 1 11 ALT channel lt k gt 1 8 Limit line Line in RF measurements 1 2 Display line Activating the Measurement Channel 11 3 Activating the Measurement Chan
316. take a channel type such as MAC into account over a slot Results that take a code in a channel type such as MAC into account over the whole period of observation Results that take a code in a channel type such as MAC into account over a slot Code Domain Analysis Remote command CONF CDP MEAS CDP see CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 160 e Code Doman Paramete S AEN geed 16 e Evaluation Methods for Code Domain Anahysls reser neren ees 20 3 1 1 Code Domain Parameters In Code Domain Analysis three different types of parameters describe the measured signals e Global parameters for the current set e Parameters for a specific set and slot e Parameters for a specific channel All parameters are described in detail in the tables below including the parameters used for settings or results in SCPI commands see chapter 11 Remote Commands for 1XEV DO Measurements on page 150 Global Parameters The following parameters refer to the total signal that is all channels for the entire period of observation that is all slots Table 3 1 Global code domain power parameters Parameter SCPI Parame Description ter Active Channels ACTive Specifies the number of active channels found in the signal Detected data channels as well as special channels are regarded as active Carrier Frequency FERRor The frequency error referred to the center frequency of the Error FERPpm R amp S FSW The absolute
317. tal UO Install EE unge E IQ imbalance eerte tern nene ien 17 Results remote 234 lero s ME 17 Eliminating 119 121 211 Results remote J iet 234 K Keys sj hs Elie e M MRR gt MKR FUNCT Peak Search RUN CONT RUN SINGLE SPAN fbi besteed Seege eiii ita L Lines OTT 62 LO feedthrough De ei lee eet E 45 Agilent Signals 5 ra at tico 46 GeneratiO isat mrasa e da 46 E 69 Mask remote nacida 164 Setrambling EE 46 52 Low pass filter MUltiGBETIGE reef teo D t ee ia piri on teas Lower Level Hysteresis MAC channe EE 48 Eval atiOD eutanasia EEr ero sits 124 Po Wu 18 Mag Error vs Chip Evaluati comisaria cera tert edd 27 Trace OS UNIS a coo ecce reete fete treiber 245 Mapping 18 52 273 Channel table eir rera 106 UO branches 106 Mode remote 214 Retrieving i poneret trn e err P rra 240 Tz Iz Ten pro ERE 123 125 214 Marker Functions UCM Eeer 62 Marker table Cotifigurilg WEE 129 Evaluation MEMO iio rai 42 Markers GotifigUrllg visi rre pert rn torre 128 Configuring remote 255 258 Gotifig ritig sotana 127 Deactivating 2129 Delta markers 2 129 MINIMUM ek nn wo E Minimum remote control AAA 258 VE dutt 132 Next minimum remote control 258 E dE 132 Next
318. tate gt This command inverts the Q component of the signal Parameters ON OFF RST OFF Example CDP QINV ON Activates inversion of Q component Manual operation See Invert Q on page 97 SENSe CDPower SET COUNt lt NumberSets gt This command sets the number of sets to be captured and stored in the instrument s memory Refer to Number of Sets on page 98 for more information Parameters lt NumberSets gt Range 1 to 1500 BTS mode or 810 MS mode RST 1 Example CDP SET COUN 10 Sets the number of sets to be captured to 10 Manual operation See Number of Sets on page 98 Synchronization MS application only Synchronization settings define how channels are synchronized for channel detection They are only available for MS measurements Ei Le Re RE 198 SENSe CDP SMODe lt Mode gt The method used for the two synchronization stages the frame synchronization detection of the first chip of the frame and the rough frequency phase synchroniza tion For details see chapter 4 3 Synchronization MS application only on page 46 Configuring Code Domain Analysis Parameters lt Mode gt AUTO The following modes are tried sequentially until synchronization was successful If none of the methods was successful a failed synchronization is reported BIL ot For frame synchronization this method uses the correlation characteristic of the known pilot channel i e pilot channel sequence spreading co
319. ter for multicarrier measurements CONF CDP MCAR FILT TYPE RRC Activates the RRC filter Manual operation See Filter Type on page 67 See Roll Off Factor on page 67 See Cut Off Frequency on page 67 Configuring Code Domain Analysis CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier MALGo lt State gt This command activates or deactivates the enhanced algorithm for the filters in multi carrier mode Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example CONF CDP MCAR ON Activates multicarrier mode CONF CDP MCAR FILT ON Activates an additional filter for multicarrier measurements CONF CDP MCAR MALG OFF Deactivates the enhanced algorithm Manual operation See Enhanced Algorithm on page 67 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier STATe State This command activates or deactivates the multicarrier mode Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CONF CDP MCAR ON Activates the multicarrier settings Manual operation See Multicarrier on page 67 CONFigure CDPower BTS SUBType lt Subtype gt Selects the subtype of the standard to be used for the measurements For more information see chapter 4 5 Subtypes on page 51 Parameters lt Subtype gt 0 1 2 3 0 1 subtype 0 1 2 subtype 2 3 subtype 3 RST 0 Example CONF CDP SUBT 3 Subtype 3 signal is analyzed Manual operation See Subtype on page 66 11 5 1 2 Configuring Code Domain Analysis SENSe CDPower PNOFfset lt Off
320. th Getting Started User Manuals for base unit and firmware applications Service Manual Release Notes Data sheet and product brochures Online Help The Online Help is embedded in the instrument s firmware It offers quick context sen sitive access to the complete information needed for operation and programming Online help is available using the Y icon on the toolbar of the R amp S FSW Web Help The web help provides online access to the complete information on operating the R amp S FSW and all available options without downloading The content of the web help corresponds to the user manuals for the latest product version The web help is availa ble from the R amp S FSW product page at http www rohde schwarz com product FSW html Downloads Web Help Getting Started This manual is delivered with the instrument in printed form and in PDF format on the CD ROM It provides the information needed to set up and start working with the instrument Basic operations and handling are described Safety information is also included The Getting Started manual in various languages is also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www rohde schwarz com product FSW html User Manuals User manuals are provided for the base unit and each additional firmware application The user manuals are available in PDF format in printable form on the Documenta
321. the application detects an active channel if the corresponding symbol rate and a suffi ciently high power level is measured see Inactive Channel Threshold on page 100 Any channel that does not have a predefined channel number and symbol rate is considered to be a data channel In the MS application a channel is considered to be active if a minimum signal noise ratio is maintained within the channel e Comparison with predefined channel tables The input signal is compared to a predefined channel table All channels that are included in the predefined channel table are considered to be active For a list of predefined channel tables provided by the 1xEV DO applications see chapter A 1 Predefined Channel Tables on page 270 o Quasi inactive channels in the MS application In the MS application only one branch in the code domain is analyzed at a time see also chapter 4 7 Code Mapping and Branches on page 52 However even if the code on the analyzed branch is inactive the code with the same number on the other branch may belong to an active channel In this case the channel is indicated as quasi inactive in the current branch evaluation IESSE User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 47 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurement Basics 4 4 1 BTS Channel Types The 1xEV DO standard defines the BTS channel types 1xEV DO forward link signals contain 4 channel types which are sent exclusively at specific times see also fig ure 4 1 e P
322. the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input EXT3 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input RF Power First intermediate frequency Frequency and time domain measurements only Not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Inter face or the optional Analog Baseband Interface IFPower Second intermediate frequency For frequency and time domain measurements only Not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Inter face For input from the optional Analog Baseband Interface this parameter is interpreted as BBPower for compatibility reasons TIME Time interval For frequency and time domain measurements only PSEN External power sensor For frequency and time domain measurements only GPO GP1 GP2 GP3 GP4 GP5 For applications that process l Q data such as the l Q Analyzer or optional applications and only if the optional Digital Base band Interface is available Defines triggering of the measurement directly via the LVDS connector The parameter specifies which general purpose bit 0 to 5 will provide the trigger data The assignment of the general purpose bits used by the Digital IQ trigger to the LVDS connector pins is provided in Digital 1 Q on page 93 RST IMMediate TRIG SOUR EXT Selects the external trigger input as source of the trigger signal 11 5 4 2
323. the capture buffer is re evaluated by all active MSRA MSRT applications The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Example SYST SEQ OFF Deactivates the scheduler INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a new data measurement and waits for the end of the Sweep INIT SEQ REFR Refreshes the display for all channels Usage Event SYSTem SEQuencer State This command turns the Sequencer on and off The Sequencer must be active before any other Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are executed otherwise an error will occur Retrieving Results A detailed programming example is provided in the Operating Modes chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 The Sequencer is activated and a sequential measurement is started immediately OFF 0 The Sequencer is deactivated Any running sequential measure ments are stopped Further Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are not available RST 0 Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single Sequencer mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements SYST SEQ OFF 11 9 Retrieving Results The following commands retrieve the results from a 1xEV DO measurement in a remote environment When the channel type is required as a parameter by a remote command or provided as a result for a remote query abbreviat
324. the input signal is performed by default 2 Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for Code Domain Analysis 3 Select the Signal Description button and configure the expected input signal 4 Select the Input Frontend button and then the Frequency tab to define the input signal s center frequency 5 Optionally select the Trigger button and define a trigger for data acquisition for example an external trigger to start capturing data only when a useful signal is transmitted 6 Select the Signal Capture button and define the acquisition parameters for the input signal 7 For MS tests select the Synchronization button and define the reference to be used for synchronization 8 Select the Channel Detection button and define how the individual channels are detected within the input signal If necessary define a channel table as described in To define or edit a channel table on page 135 9 Select the Display Config button and select the evaluation methods that are of interest to you Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences 10 Exit the SmartGrid mode and select the Overview softkey to display the Over view again 11 Select the Analysis button in the Overview to configure how the data is evalu ated in the individual result displays e Select the set slot or code to be evaluated e Configure specific settings for the selected evaluation method s e Optionally configure
325. the screen area without channel and status bar and softkey menu The point of origin x 0 y 0 is in the lower left corner of the screen The end point x 100 y 100 is in the upper right cor ner of the screen See figure 11 1 The direction in which the splitter is moved depends on the screen layout If the windows are positioned horizontally the splitter also moves horizontally If the windows are positioned vertically the splitter also moves vertically Range 0 to 100 Example LAY SPL 1 3 50 Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Table to the center 50 of the screen i e in the fig ure above to the left User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 224 Configuring the Result Display Example LAY SPL 1 4 70 Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Peak List towards the top 70 of the screen The following commands have the exact same effect as any combination of windows above and below the splitter moves the splitter vertically AY SPL 3 2 70 AY SPL 4 1 70 AY SPL 2 1 70 LAY out WINDow lt n gt ADD lt Direction gt lt WindowType gt This command adds a measurement window to the display Note that with this com mand the suffix n determines the existing window next to which the new window is added as opposed to LAYout ADD WINDow for which the existing window is defined by a parameter To replace an ex
326. the signal generated at the trigger output This command works only if you have selected a user defined output with OUTPut TRIGer lt port gt 0OTYPe Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Parameters lt Level gt HIGH TTL signal LOW OV RST LOW Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 79 See Level on page 80 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe lt OutputT ype gt This command selects the type of signal generated at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Parameters lt OutputType gt DEVice Sends a trigger signal when the R amp S FSW has triggered inter nally TARMed Sends a trigger signal when the trigger is armed and ready for an external trigger event UDEFined Sends a user defined trigger signal For more information see OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel RST DEVice Manual operation See Output Type on page 80 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate This command generates a pulse at the trigger output Configuring Code Domain Analysis Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Usage Event Manual operation See Send Trigger on page 80 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth lt Length gt Thi
327. the trace to display the average over a series of sweeps If necessary increase the Sweep Average Count in the Sweep Config dia log box e Configure markers and delta markers to determine deviations and offsets within the results e g when comparing errors or peaks R amp S FSW 84 K85 How to Perform Measurements in 1xEV DO Applications See Sey To define or edit a channel table Channel tables contain a list of channels to be detected and their specific parameters You can create user defined and edit pre defined channel tables 1 From the main Code Domain Analyzer menu select the Channel Detection soft key to open the Channel Detection dialog box 2 To define a new channel table select the New button next to the Predefined Tables list To edit an existing channel table a Select the existing channel table in the Predefined Tables list b Select the Edit button next to the Predefined Tables list 3 In the Channel Table dialog box define a name and optionally a comment that describes the channel table The comment is displayed when you set the focus on the table in the Predefined Tables list 4 Define the channels to be detected using one of the following methods Select the Measure Table button to create a table that consists of the channels detected in the currently measured signal Or a Select the Add Channel button to insert a row for a new channel below the currently selected row in t
328. tion type ecrire ri reb neret 51 Operation mode TANS MISSION s eat iai n land 121 Operation modes elen ET KE 49 Optimizing Test Selup unan 133 Options Electronic attenuation 3 iria erett 87 High pass EE 72 167 Preamplifigr suoi ttp sib cate e e es 87 Output Configuration rec a teat oec bn etter Configuration remote E Digital Baseband Interface settings 80 82 Digital Baseband Interface status 172 Digital UO remote e Klee 79 Power measurement Configuring 114 Settings Trigger Overload RF le ue E 2 neret tete 165 Overview Configuring 1xEV DO EE 63 P Parameters ODA 16 Channel table e Channel S mm 18 Global Slots PODE sorosiane aiin Eeee ARE aO EEA EES ais Peak Code Domain Cor 28 Evaluation method Measurement examples eeseeeee 147 Trace results n aie ibt cerei nrc e 246 Peak Code Domain Error see PODE vinoteca 28 Peak list Evaluation method ceci cas 42 Peak search ad 132 L Dro 131 Peaks Marker Positioning ore eet P tenet 132 Next SOMKOY EM 132 Performing 1xEV DO measurement cocococococccnncconoconononnccnancnnnnnnnoos 134 Phase Error vs Chip IS Cen Trace results EN Phase offset eiecti A Calculating cimi gente Results remote
329. tional Digital Baseband Interface The status of the STATus QUESTionable DIO register is indicated in bit 14 of the STATus QUI ESTionable register You can read out the state of the register with STA Tus QUEStionable DIO CONDition on page 175 and STATus QUEStionable DIQ EVENt on page 176 Bit No Meaning 0 Digital UO Input Device connected This bit is set if a device is recognized and connected to the Digital Baseband Interface of the analyzer Digital UO Input Connection Protocol in progress This bit is set while the connection between analyzer and digital baseband data signal source e g R amp S SMW R amp S Ex 1 Q Box is established Configuring Code Domain Analysis Bit No Meaning 2 Digital UO Input Connection Protocol error This bit is set if an error occurred during establishing of the connect between analyzer and digital UO data signal source e g R amp S SMW R amp S Ex 1 Q Box is established 3 Digital UO Input PLL unlocked This bit is set if the PLL of the Digital UO input is out of lock due to missing or unstable clock provided by the connected Digital UO TX device To solve the problem the Digital UO connection has to be newly initialized after the clock has been restored 4 Digital UO Input DATA Error This bit is set if the data from the Digital UO input module is erroneous Possible reasons e Bit errors in the data transmission The bit will
330. tions and settings available to configure measure ments and analyze results with their corresponding remote control command e Q Data Import and Export Description of general functions to import and export raw l Q measurement data e Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Hints and tips on how to handle errors and optimize the test setup e How to Perform Measurements in 1xEV DO Applications The basic procedure to perform each measurement and step by step instructions for more complex tasks or alternative methods e Measurement Examples Detailed measurement examples to guide you through typical measurement sce narios and allow you to try out the application immediately e Remote Commands for 1xEV DO Measurements Remote commands required to configure and perform 1xEV DO measurements in a remote environment sorted by tasks Commands required to set up the environment or to perform common tasks on the instrument are provided in the main R amp S FSW User Manual Programming examples demonstrate the use of many commands and can usually be executed directly for test purposes e Annex Reference material e List of remote commands Alphahabetical list of all remote commands described in the manual Index Documentation Overview 1 2 Documentation Overview The user documentation for the R amp S FSW consists of the following parts e Printed Getting Started manual e Online Help system on the instrument e Documentation CD ROM wi
331. tive Channel power relative in dB relative to total or PICH power refer to CDP PREF command CERRor Chip rate error in ppm CHANnel Channel number CODMulation MS application modulation type of the composite data channel CODPower MS application power of the composite data channel DACTive Number of active Data channels DMTYpe Data Mode Type DRPich MS application Delta RRI PICH in dB EVMPeak Error vector mag peak in EVMRms Error vector magnitude RMS in FERPpm Frequency error in ppm FERRor Frequency error in Hz IPMMax Maximum power level in inactive MAC channel in dB QlMbalance IQ imbalance in IQOFfset IQ offset in 96 MACCuracy Retrieving Results Composite EVM in MACTive BTS application number of active MAC channels MTYPe Modulation type including mapping PCDerror Peak code domain error in dB PDATa absolute power in the DATA channel type PDMax Maximum power level in Data channel PDMin Minimum power level in Data channel PLENGth Length of preamble in chips PMAC absolute power in the MAC channel type POFFset Phase offset in rad PPILot absolute power in the PILOT channel type PPICh Pilot power in dBm PPReamble absolute power in the PREAMBLE channel type PRRI MS application RRI power in dBm PTOTal Total power in dBm RHO RHO RHO1 BTS application RHO yerai_1 over all slots over all chips with averaging starting at the half s
332. to the channel type see Mapping on page 123 RST AUTO Example CDP MMODe COMP The pilot channel type and all other channel types is analyzed in complex mode Manual operation See Mapping on page 123 Configuring RF Measurements SENSe CDPower SET lt SetNo gt This command selects a specific set for further analysis The number of sets has to be defined with the SENSe CDPower SET COUNt command before using this com mand Parameters lt SetNo gt Range O to SET COUNT 1 Increment 1 RST 0 Example CDP SET COUN 10 Selects the 11th set for further analysis counting starts with 0 Manual operation See Set to Analyze on page 98 SENSe CDPower SLOT lt numeric value gt This command selects the slot PCG to be analyzed Parameters lt numeric value gt Range 0 to 63 Increment 1 RST 0 Example CDP SLOT 7 Selects slot number 7 for analysis Manual operation See Half Slot on page 123 11 6 Configuring RF Measurements RF measurements are performed in the Spectrum application with some predefined settings as described in chapter 3 2 1 RF Measurement Types and Results on page 35 For details on configuring these RF measurements in a remote environment see the Remote Commands chapter of the R amp S FSW User Manual The 1xEV DO RF measurements must be activated in 1xEV DO applications see chapter 11 3 Activating the Measurement Channel on page 156 The indivi
333. ts more than one parameter these are separated by a comma Example LAYout ADD WINDow Spectrum LEFT MTABle Parameters may have different forms of values e EE e 153 e BOCA it E 154 Character Dala oinin id editada da td tada ida 154 e Character EE 155 e Block EE 155 11 1 6 1 Numeric Values Numeric values can be entered in any form i e with sign decimal point or exponent In case of physical quantities you can also add the unit If the unit is missing the com mand uses the basic unit Example with unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ without unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1E9 would also set a frequency of 1 GHz Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down If the number you have entered is not supported e g in case of discrete steps the command returns an error Instead of a number you can also set numeric values with a text parameter in special cases e MIN MAX Defines the minimum or maximum numeric value that is supported e DEF Defines the default value 11 1 6 2 11 1 6 3 Introduction e UP DOWN Increases or decreases the numeric value by one step The step size depends on the setting In some cases you can customize the step size with a corresponding command Querying numeric values When you query numeric values the system returns a number In case of physical quantities it applies the basic unit e g Hz in case of frequencie
334. type of power detection 0 inactive channel 1 active channel In Hadamard order the different codes are output in ascending order together with their code power The number of output codes corresponds to the base spreading fac tor 11 9 3 6 11 9 3 7 Retrieving Results In BitReverse order codes belonging to a channel are next to one another and are therefore output in the class of the channel together with the consolidated channel power The maximum number of output codes or channels cannot be higher than the base spreading factor but decreases with every concentrated channel For details see chapter 4 8 Code Display and Sort Order on page 53 Code Domain Power MS application The command returns four values for each channel code class gt code number gt error power power ID Value Description code class code class of the channel see table 11 3 code number code number of the channel power level depending on SENSe CDPower PDISplay absolute level in dBm of the code channel at the selected channel slot or relative level in dB of the channel referenced to total power in the channel type power ID type of power detection 0 inactive channel 1 active channel 3 quasi inactive channel on the analyzed branch the channel is not occupied but an active channel exists on the other branch In Hadamard order the different codes are o
335. uence the status registers The STATus QUEStionable DIQ register is described in STATus QUEStiona ble DIQ Register on page 173 The STATus QUEStionable SYNC register contains information on the error situa tion in the code domain analysis of the 1xEV DO applications The bits can be queried with commands STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition on page 266 and STATus QUEStionable SYNC EVENt on page 266 Table 11 7 Status error bits in STATus QUEStionable SYNC register for 1xEV DO applications Bit No Meaning 0 This bit is not used 1 Frame Sync failed This bit is set when synchronization is not possible within the applica tion Possible reasons e Incorrectly set frequency e Incorrectly set level e Incorrectly set PN Offset e Incorrectly set values for Invert Q Invalid signal at input 2103 These bits are not used Querying the Status Registers Bit No Meaning 4 BTS application only Preamble Current Slot missing This bit is set when the Preamble channel type is being investigated within the 1xEV DO BTS application and there is no preamble in the current slot The measurement results that can be read out for the Preamble channel type are not valid In MS application this bit is not used 5 BTS application only Preamble Overall missing This bit is set when the Preamble channel type is being investigated within the 1xEV DO BTS application and there is no preamble in at l
336. uentially Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuencer on page 232 A detailed programming example is provided in the Operating Modes chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Note In order to synchronize to the end of a sequential measurement using OPC OPC or WAI you must use SING1e Sequence mode For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Suffix n irrelevant Starting a Measurement Parameters lt Mode gt SINGle Each measurement is performed once regardless of the chan nel s sweep mode considering each channels sweep count until all measurements in all active channels have been per formed CONTinuous The measurements in each active channel are performed one after the other repeatedly regardless of the channel s sweep mode in the same order until the Sequencer is stopped CDEFined First a single sequence is performed Then only those channels in continuous sweep mode INIT CONT ON are repeated RST CONTinuous Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer REFResh ALL This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated SYSTem SEQuencer SYST SEQ OFF and only in MSRA or MSRT mode The data in
337. utput in ascending order together with their code power The number of output codes corresponds to the base spreading fac tor In BitReverse order codes belonging to a channel are next to one another and are therefore output in the class of the channel together with the consolidated channel power The maximum number of output codes or channels cannot be higher than the base spreading factor but decreases with every concentrated channel For details see chapter 4 8 Code Display and Sort Order on page 53 Composite Constellation When the trace data for this evaluation is queried the real and the imaginary branches of each chip are transferred Re chipo Im chipo Re chip gt Im chip gt lt Re chip gt Im chip The number of value pairs corresponds to the number of chips from the 1024 chips in a half slot Retrieving Results 11 9 3 8 Composite Data Bitstream MS application The command returns the bitstream of one half slot for the composite data channel o This evaluation is only available for subtypes 2 or 3 The number of returned bits depends on the modulation type of the composite data channel Modulation Type Number of returned bits Q4Q2 1536 E4E2 2304 11 9 3 9 Composite Data Constellation MS application The command returns the real and imaginary parts from each despreaded chip of the composite data channel E This evaluation is only available for subtypes 2
338. ved pairs of and Q values and multi channel signals contain interleaved complex sam UO Data File Format iq tar ples for channel 0 channel 1 channel 2 etc If the NumberOfChannels element is not defined one channel is presumed Example Element order for real data 1 channel I 0 Real sample 0 11 Real sample 1 I 2 Real sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 1 channel I 0 Q 0 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 0 I 1 O 1 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 1 I 2 1 21 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex polar data 1 channel Mag 0 Phi 0 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 0 Mag 1 Phi 1 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 1 Mag 2 Phi 2 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 3 channels Complex data I channel no time index Q channel no time index 01 0 Q 0 0 Channel 0 Complex sample 0 1 0 Q 1 0 Channel 1 Complex sample 0 2 0 Q 2 0 Channel 2 Complex sample 0 O 1 Q 0 1 Channel 0 Complex sample 1 1 1 Qf1 1 Channel 1 Complex sample 1 2J 315 0121111 Channel 2 Complex sample 1 0 21 Q 01 21 Channel 0 Complex sample 2 1 Fed Ol Peay Channel 1 Complex sample 2 21 2 0121121 Channel 2 Complex sample 2 Example
339. ws the power of the code domain of the signal Compared to the measurement without an external trigger see figure 10 4 the repetition rate of the measurement increases In the second window the General Result Summary is displayed It shows the numeric results of the code domain power measurement including the frequency error The Trigger to Frame shows the offset between the trigger event and and the start of the PCG R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurement Examples MultiView SS Spectrum 3 1xEV DO BTS Ref Level 1 dBm 9 MHz Channel 0 32 Code Power Relative 10dB Slot Oof Channel Type PILOT Subtype Ti 1 Code Domain Power I Branch Code O 2 ode 2 Result Summary General Results Set 0 Error arler Freque Set 07 Slot 0 Fig 10 5 Meas 4 Measuring the Triggered Relative Code Domain Power 10 4 1 Adjusting the Trigger Offset If necessary the delay between the trigger event and the start of the frame can be compensated for by adjusting the trigger offset In the described measurement exam ple no significant delay is measured thus this step need not be performed 1 TRIG gt External Trigger 1 2 Setthe offset to the difference between the frame start and the trigger event TRIG gt Trigger Offset lt XXX gt s In the General Result Summary the Trigger to Frame offset between the trigger event and and the start of the frame should be eliminated 10 4 2 Behaviour With the Wrong PN Offset Th
340. y and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the high lighted softkey or key again Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the Single Sweep softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected channel however the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel and only for a chan nel defined sequence In this case a channel in single sweep mode is swept only once by the Sequencer Furthermore the RUN SINGLE key controls the Sequencer not individual sweeps RUN SINGLE starts the Sequencer in single mode If the Sequencer is off only the evaluation for the currently displayed measurement channel is updated Remote command INITiate lt n gt IMMediate on page 230 Continue Single Sweep After triggering repeats the number of sweeps set in Sweep Count without deleting the trace of the last measurement User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 107 6 2 12 Code Domain Analysis While the measurement is running the Continue Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONMeas on page 229 Automatic Settings Some settings can be adjusted by the R amp S FSW automatically according to the current measurement settings In order to do so a measurement is performed The duration of this measurem
341. y if configured accordingly see Marker Table Display on page 130 4 Marker Table Wnd Type X value 1 Mi 13 25 GHz 1 M 600 0 kHz 1 Mi 600 0 kHz 1 m V 2 0 MHz Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH MTAB See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 220 Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 256 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 237 Marker Peak List The marker peak list determines the frequencies and levels of peaks in the spectrum or time domain How many peaks are displayed can be defined as well as the sort order In addition the detected peaks can be indicated in the diagram The peak list can also be exported to a file for analysis in an external application User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 42 R amp S FSW 84 K85 Measurements and Result Displays 2 Marker Peak List No 1 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PEAK see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 220 Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 256 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 237 Evaluation List Displays the averaged maximum and minimim values and the measurement range for the current measurement Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH LEV see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 220 User Manual 1173 9340 02 13 43 Slots and Sets 4 Measurement Basics The R amp S FSW 1xEV DO applications perform measurements according to the cdma2000 High Rate Packet Data standard which is generally referred to as

R&S FSW-K84/-K85 1xEVDO User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S FSW-K84/-K85 1xEVDO User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S FSW-K84/-K85 1xEVDO User Manual